JP2019058792A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game board in which game amusement is enhanced.SOLUTION: A game board of a Pachinko game machine controls a display mode of a holding display symbol to any one of a normal mode (blue), special mode (white and gray), advanced notice mode (yellow, green, red and rainbow colors). The special mode is easier to be changed to the advanced notice mode than the normal mode. The display mode of a specific display is controlled so that the ratios to become a big winning game state are different when the display mode of the specific display is to be the special mode in a first timing and when it is changed to be the special mode in a second timing later than the first timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention changes the variable winning means capable of changing to either the first state advantageous to the player or the second state disadvantageous to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition to the first state The present invention relates to a game board used for a game machine such as a pachinko game machine to be made to

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to provide the player with

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode defined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display unit based on the game ball having won the start winning opening. When it is done, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Among such gaming machines, there is one configured to have a plurality of large winning opening (variable winning means). For example, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 includes a first large winning opening (first variable winning means) and a second large winning opening (second variable winning means), and a long hit (first specific gaming state) It is described that the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are alternately controlled to the open state when it is determined to be. In addition, when it is determined to be a short hit (second specific game state) and when it is determined to be a small hit (special game state), only the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state In addition, it is described that the first big winning opening is controlled in the open state in the common open mode.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-234981 (Paragraph 0093, 0094, 0114, 0115, FIG. 8)

  When using the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, changing the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state (open state) according to a predetermined order when controlling to the first specific gaming state Can. However, the change mode (opening mode) of the variable winning means does not change through the first specific game state, and the change mode of the variable winning means lacks interest and it can not be said that the interest for the game can be sufficiently enhanced.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to make it possible to focus attention on the change aspect of the variable winning means in a gaming board provided with a plurality of variable winning means, and to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 1) The gaming board according to the present invention is advantageous for the player on the basis of the predetermined condition being met (for example, occurrence of a big hit or a small hit), and is a first state (for example, Variable winning means (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a, the first special variable winning ball device 20a, which can be changed to any of the second state (for example, the closed state) more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). (2) A game board that changes the special variable winning ball device 20b) to the first state, wherein the variable winning means is a first variable winning means (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a) and a second variable winning means (for example For example, including the second special variable winning ball device 20b), the first variable winning means is provided at the upstream position where game media flow down, the second variable winning means is provided at the downstream position where game media flow down , Variable winning means in the first period The first advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit) to be changed to the first state (for example, 29 seconds), and the second period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first period ) State control means that can be controlled to a second advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a sudden probability variation big hit) to be changed to the first state (for example, a part that executes steps S305 to S310 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) Signal output means for outputting a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, etc.) that can specify the part that executes the information output process in the CPU 56 that has executed the game control main process Of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means when the state control means is controlled to the second advantageous state. Make one of the variable winning means change to the first state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S305 to S307 using the open pattern data for sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 22A) Thus, the first big winning opening is opened according to the opening pattern shown in FIG. 9 (B), and steps S308 to S310 are executed using the opening pattern data for small hit shown in FIG. 22 (B). 9 (B) to open the first big winning opening according to the opening pattern shown in 9 (B)), in the case of controlling in the first advantageous state, the variable winning of any one of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means After changing the means to the first state, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state according to a predetermined order (for example, the game control microphone The computer 560 executes the steps S305 to S307 using the open pattern data for normal big hit / probable variation big hit shown in FIG. 21 to follow the open pattern shown in FIG. When the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state, the first variable winning means is changed to the second state, and then the second variable winning means is changed to the second state. First variable prize so that the period from changing the second variable winning means to the second state to changing the first variable winning means to the first state is shorter than the time to change to the 1 state Controlling the means and the second variable winning means, when the first variable winning means is in the first state, it is easier for the game medium to enter than when the second variable winning means is in the first state, To featureWith such a configuration, since the change aspect of the variable winning means changes after the first period in the first specific gaming state, in the gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable winning means, the change aspect of the variable winning means It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 2) The gaming board according to the present invention is disadvantageous to the player in the first state (for example, the open state) which is advantageous for the player based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of big hit or small hit). Variable winning means (for example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a, the second special variable winning ball device 20b) that can be changed to any of the second state (for example, the closed state) to the first state The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means (eg, first special variable winning ball device 20a) and a second variable winning means (eg, second special variable winning ball device 20b). , Specific gaming state control means for controlling the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to a specific gaming state which is changed to the first state according to a predetermined order (for example, step in the gaming control microcomputer 560 The part that executes S305 to S310 and the winning means (for example, the first start winning hole 13, the second starting winning hole 14 and the big winning hole (the first special variable winning ball device 20a, the second), including the variable winning means The special variable winning ball device 20b) and a signal (for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, etc.) capable of specifying the winning means and the number of winnings for which the gaming medium has won among the special variable winning ball device 20). Signal output means (for example, a portion for executing information output processing in the CPU 56 which has executed the game control main processing), and the specific gaming state control means sets the variable winning means as the specific gaming state in the first period (for example, , 29 seconds) The first specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit) to change to the first state, and the variable winning means in the second period shorter than the first period If it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state based on sudden odd change big hit, small hitting gaming state) to be changed to the first state (for example, 1 second) and controlled to the second specific gaming state The first variable game means is changed to the second state after changing one of the first variable game means and the second variable game means to the second state, as compared to the case where the first specific game state is controlled. Control the winning means to be long before changing to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, after closing the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit) Closing time T3 (for example, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds) before starting to open the second big winning opening in the next round and the first big winning opening in the next round after closing the second big winning opening Until the opening of Opening of the second winning opening in the second round after closing the first winning opening in the big hit game suddenly based on the probability variation big hit suddenly than any of the closing time T4 (for example, 1 second +1 second = 2 seconds) Closing time T5 (e.g., 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds) is longer. With such a configuration, while the disadvantaged period is relatively shortened in the first specified gaming state, the disadvantaged period is relatively extended in the second specified gaming state, so a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable winning means It is possible to effectively control the disadvantage period and to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 3) In Means 1, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means differ in the ease of winning a game medium (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is the first special variable winning) The game state control means is more likely to win a prize compared to the ball device 20a), and when it is controlled to the second specific game state and when it is controlled to the special game state, the variable winning means of the one where the game medium is hard to win (For example, the microcomputer for gaming control 560 executes steps S305 to S307 using the open pattern data for sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 22A). In accordance with the opening pattern shown in 9 (B), the first large winning opening which is difficult to win is opened, and using the opening pattern data for small hit shown in FIG. 22 (B), steps S308 to S By performing the 10, to open the first special winning opening towards the hard winning accordance opening pattern shown in FIG. 9 (B)) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the game medium to win the variable winning means in the second specific gaming state and the special gaming state, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest for the game can be improved.

  (Means 4) In Means 1, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means differ in the ease of winning a game medium (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is the first special variable winning) The game state control means makes the variable winning means which is hard to win the game medium the first state in the second period for the second specific game state, when it is controlled to the second specific game state compared to the ball device 20a. (For example, when the microcomputer 560 for game control executes the steps S308 to S310 using the open pattern data for the small hit, the opening of the first big winning opening and the opening of the second big winning opening In both cases, the first large winning opening which is difficult to win may be opened. According to such a configuration, since the game medium is hard to win the variable winning means in the second specific game state, it is possible to make the game sharp and to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4, the first variable winning means is provided at the upstream position where game media flow down (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the first special variable winning ball device 20a is disposed on the upstream side, and the second variable winning means is provided at a downstream position where gaming media flow down (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is on the downstream side) When the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state according to a predetermined order, the gaming state control means changes the first variable winning means to the second state. The time from changing the second variable winning means to the second state to changing the first variable winning means to the first state is shorter than the time from changing the second variable winning means to the first state First variable winning means and 2 control the variable winning means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, the closing time T3 from the closing of the first large winning opening to the start of the opening of the second large winning opening in the next round (2) The closing time T4 from closing the big winning opening to starting opening of the first big winning opening in the next round may be configured to be shorter). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy for the variable winning means to win the game medium, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  (Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, abnormal prize notifying means for notifying abnormal winning of gaming media to the variable winning means (for example, steps S2126, S2127, S2130 in microcomputer 560 for game control The abnormal prize notifying means includes an abnormal prize of the gaming medium to the first variable prize means and an abnormal prize of the gaming medium to the second variable prize means. Informs abnormal winnings in different notification modes (for example, when Y in step S2129, the microcomputer 560 for game control executes step S2130 to turn on the LED 24a for error notification, while in step S2124 Y and step When N is determined in S2125, Step S2126 is executed to indicate the abnormality notification LED 24b. To) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize to which variable winning means the abnormal winning has occurred.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a big winning opening. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of open pattern data. It is an explanatory view showing an example of open pattern data. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening opening processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit open process. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of the prize-informing process in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a big winning opening opening in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the open pattern of the big winning opening in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the open pattern data in a modification. It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before and after a game board is attached to a front frame. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a card unit and a pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing an example of processing with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine when a card | curd is inserted in a card unit. It is a flowchart figure showing processing at the time of insertion which a card unit performs, when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the relationship of the CU state contained in the command of a card insertion notification, the command of a status information request | requirement, and the insertion state of a card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of carrying out ball lending from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko game machine at the time of having carried out ball-bearing delivery and storage-balls dispensing. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal processing of a card unit and a pachinko game machine when counting a game ball. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram for illustrating counting processing automatically performed when the game arcade is closed. It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process of the count log | history data memorize | stored in P units. It is a figure which shows an example of a count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power-off and communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which reads count history memorize | stored in P unit to CU. It is a figure which shows an example of a process in case there exists a response of a status information response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit, since there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows another example of a process in case there exists a response of a status information response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit, since there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived because there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived because there exists a power-off and communication circuit disconnection. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power supply cut off, a communication circuit | line connection break, and the response of the count response from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there is a power-off and communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko game machine to a card unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there is a power supply disconnection, communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko game machine has not arrived yet. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of game ball addition result abnormality at the time of a ball lending, ball-with-balls withdrawal, and a ball-stirring out. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P unit and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P unit | set and CU regarding a counting serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request | requirement serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request | requirement serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating the opportunity of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server to communication control IC. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a CU control part and a security chip (SC). It is a figure for demonstrating the standup process at the time of the power supply * hall | hole installation of CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the power supply * normal start-up of CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power-on and factory shipment start of CU control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code | cord. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the sequence of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality. It is a figure explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main-control part, a delivery control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with a payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating recovery completion confirmation processing. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of a command and response transmitted and received between a main control part and a payment control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main-control part and a delivery control part. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and a command of gaming state notification from the main control unit to the payout control unit has not arrived yet. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P unit connected to the game board development jig was connected to commercial CU by unit replacement | exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of a detection when P units | devices connected to CU for development were connected to commercial CU by unit replacement | exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of the detection at the time of connecting a game machine simulator to commercial CU. It is an explanatory view for explaining notice processing of operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the history information (machine history information) from the shipment to the disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the installation information input into a machine history management center in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until disposal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is a schematic diagram for explaining front row concerning this embodiment and machine history management of a game board. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. It is a flowchart for a machine history management center to explain abnormality determination processing of management of a front frame and a game board. FIG. 109 is a view for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG. 108. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front door of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission and reception mode.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receptacle 4 for storing gaming balls (also referred to as game balls) which can not be accommodated in the ball supply tray 3 ing. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Further, the ball hitting supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b for performing various kinds of abnormality notification.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a positive variation big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a game ball at the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden odd change big hit), and a plurality of big hit types with different number of rounds If it can be controlled, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the big hit game, etc. Also, as in this embodiment, for example, the opening period of the big winning opening Short (for example, two 1-second short opening), a big hit that can not expect a game ball to reach the big winning opening substantially, and a long opening period of the big winning opening (for example, 15 long opening for 29 seconds Times), when there is a big hit that can expect the game ball to win the big winning opening substantially, the display color according to whether or not the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening can be expected substantially Also, for example, even if there is a big hit and a big hit that can not be expected to be able to expect a game ball's winning to the big winning opening by changing the opening number of the big winning opening per round, for example. The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, the display color that recalls the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit Note that the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a positive variation big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a game ball at the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden odd change big hit), and a plurality of big hit types with different number of rounds If it can be controlled, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the big hit game, etc. Also, as in this embodiment, for example, the opening period of the big winning opening Short (for example, two 1-second short opening), a big hit that can not expect a game ball to reach the big winning opening substantially, and a long opening period of the big winning opening (for example, 15 long opening for 29 seconds Times), when there is a big hit that can expect the game ball to win the big winning opening substantially, the display color according to whether or not the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening can be expected substantially Also, for example, even if there is a big hit and a big hit that can not be expected to be able to expect a game ball's winning to the big winning opening by changing the opening number of the big winning opening per round, for example. The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display image from being disintegrated with the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable to have.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the first hold storage count and a second hold storage display unit 18d for displaying the second hold storage count are provided. ing. In addition, an area (summed pending storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total pending memory number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the variable winning ball device 15, a first special variable winning ball device 20a that forms a first large winning opening is provided. The first special variable winning prize ball device 20a has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit on the second special symbol display 8b) In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening and closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21a to be in the open state, and the first large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the first big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a second special variable winning ball device 20b forming a second large winning opening is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The second special variable winning ball device 20b has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21b, whereby the second large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening is detected by the second count switch 23b.

  In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big hit game During the state, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are controlled to the open state according to a predetermined order. Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b is larger than the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first special variable winning ball device 20a is controlled to the open state when the second special variable winning ball device 20b is controlled to the open state during the big hit game. Compared to, the game ball is easy to win in the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are comprehensively expressed, it may be simply expressed as "big winning opening".

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, both the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a and the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b are provided on the right side of the game area 7, and during the big hit game Then, the player can aim for winning in both the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening by aiming at the right side of the game area 7 and performing a shooting operation. That is, in this embodiment, for example, whether to perform the firing operation aiming at the left side of the game area 7 in the case of aiming for the winning of the first large winning opening and in the case of aiming for the winning of the second large winning opening Even if the method of firing operation is not changed, such as whether the shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side, the first large winning opening and the second winning opening can be performed by performing the same firing operation (in this example, the shooting operation aiming at the right). It is possible to aim for winning in both of the big prize winning openings.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change big hit occurs, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is more likely to be start winning (ie, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display are easily established. Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a gaming card as a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown) .

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  In addition, the input driver circuit 58 which provides the game control microcomputer 560 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b. It is mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21a which opens and closes the first special variable winning ball device 20a which forms the first large winning opening, and the second special variable winning ball which forms the second large winning opening. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21b for opening and closing the device 20b in accordance with an instruction from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main substrate 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41, and the LEDs 24a and 24b for notification of abnormality is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to power supply to the game machine being started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes security check processing, which is processing for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not. , The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode of the maskable interrupt is set (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of microcomputer 560 for gaming control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode that indicates the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter on the stack.

  Next, setting (initialization) of the built-in device register is performed (step S5). By the process of step S5, setting (initialization) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) as built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and shifts to a clear signal check process.

  Note that software delay processing may be executed to delay the start timing of the gaming apparatus control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software. Such software delay processing can delay the start timing of the game control processing as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not performed. When delay processing is performed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board can not receive the command transmitted by the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37) Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the clear switch is turned on (step S7). The CPU 56 may check the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may check the state of the clear signal multiple times. For example, when it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed after delaying a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds). If it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. At this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after setting a delay time of a predetermined time. Here, the number of reconfirmation is not limited to one or two, and may be three or more. Alternatively, the check may be made twice, and when the check results do not match, it may be confirmed again.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not the data protection process (for example, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It confirms (step S8). In this embodiment, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply is stopped. If it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of the power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes the initialization processing.

  Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed is a value corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). It is confirmed by whether it is). Note that such a confirmation method is an example, for example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop processing has been performed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping the power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the number of times of checksum calculation corresponding to the number of data to be checked is set. Then, an exclusive OR operation is performed on the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer. While storing the operation result in the checksum data area, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 and the value of the checksum calculation number is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the data after the inversion as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process (steps S10 to S14) to be executed at the time of power on not at the time of recovery from the power supply stop. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs gaming state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer), not yet It is a portion where data indicating the payout prize number of balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the top address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a buffer for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize symbol flag, an out of ball flag, etc. The initial value is set to the flag for performing.

  The CPU 56 sets the start address of the command transmission table for initialization stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board A process is performed (step S14). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the setting of the timer interrupt is completed, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt disable state (step S17), executes the initial value random number updating process (step S18a) and the display random number updating process (step S18b). The interrupt permission state is set again (step S19). That is, when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 is in the interrupt prohibition state, and when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed Make it

  The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determination to determine the type of the big hit (for example, the big hit symbol determination random number for determining the special symbol that generates the big hit, and whether to shift the gaming state to a definite variation state Initial value of count value such as random number for probability variation decision to be used, counter for generating normal pattern hit judgment random number to decide whether to generate hit based on normal pattern etc. It is a random number to determine the value. Game control processing (processing for controlling the gaming devices such as the effect display device 9, the variable winning ball device 15, the ball payout device 97 and the like provided to the gaming machine by the gaming control microcomputer) In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming device control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one revolution, an initial value is set to the counter.

  Further, the display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a variation pattern determination random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, and a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated. Used. The display random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  Further, it is also executed in the timer interrupt process that the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are described later (that is, the timer is in an interrupt-prohibited state when the display random number update process is executed). Since the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process, the conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process is avoided. That is, if the timer interruption occurs during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interruption processing, the count is counted. The continuity of the values may be lost. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Specifically, during the execution of the main processing, when a timer interrupt occurs during a period in which the interrupt processing is permitted during the execution of the loop processing of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 Execute timer interrupt processing which is started in response to the occurrence of timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 detects detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 23b, and the like through the input driver circuit 58. It inputs and detects the input of each switch (switching process: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is the on state, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 (step S22). With regard to the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning notification process for detecting an occurrence of an abnormal winning on the large winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening) and notifying abnormal winning (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed in accordance with the special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. And, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each processing according to the gaming state. Also, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting, to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, an effect control command regarding an effect pattern synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol command control process: step S30). In addition, that the fluctuation of a production | presentation pattern synchronizes with the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol means that the fluctuation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 outputs, as information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a starting opening signal supplied to a hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a big hit 1 to 3 signals, An information output process is performed to output information (data) on the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as a number from the information output circuit 64 (step S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b. (Step S32). Specifically, the payout control board 37 is selected according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b being turned on. The payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents regarding the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port (Step S34: output processing). Then, the CPU 56 executes a storage process of checking whether the number of pending storages increases or decreases (step S35).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S36). Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status indicator display process of setting status display control data for displaying each status indicator in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is the time saving state, state display control data for displaying a state indicator light indicating that the time saving state is set is set in the output buffer. If the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability change state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator light indicating that the state is a high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may do so.

Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S39), and the process is ended.
By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped without reaching reach.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, small hits mean that the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as that of the big hitting but the opening period per time is extremely short (in this embodiment, the number of opening of the big winning opening is two There are few and open time per time is as short as 1 second). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is very short opening period of the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, while the other big hit opens the big winning opening 15 times the number of opening of the big winning opening Is less than 2 times, and the opening time per time is as short as 1 second while the other big hit opens the big winning opening for 29 seconds per time) and the gaming state after the big hit game (Ie, it makes it appear to the player as if it were suddenly in a definite change state). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, it is not possible to recognize whether the game is a big hit or a small hit suddenly when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for one second, so a high probability state for the player State can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, there is shown a case where the number of opening times of the big winning opening is reduced to 2 times and the opening time per time is shortened to 1 second, in the case of sudden positive big hit or small hit. However, the opening period of the big winning opening in the sudden big hit or small hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of opening times of the special winning opening may be set to 15 times as in the other big hit, and only the opening time per time may be shortened (for example, 1 second). Also, for example, the opening time per one time may be the same, and only the number of times of opening of the big winning opening may be reduced (for example, twice). As such, when it suddenly becomes a big hit or small hit, the number of opening the big winning opening is reduced as compared with the big hit or the positive big hit, or the opening time of the big winning opening per time is shortened. It is sufficient that the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening is reduced by at least compared to at least a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows. (1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (normal big hit described later, definite variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit) (for big hit type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR 2): variation pattern type (type) (For variation pattern type determination) (3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR 4): Generate a hit based on a normal pattern Decide whether or not to make it (normally for pattern determination) (5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns may be grouped by reach type, and divided into a change pattern type including a change pattern accompanied by a normal reach and a change pattern type including a change pattern accompanied by a super reach. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of specific effects such as pseudo-runs and slip effects.

  At step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a random number for determining the jackpot type of (1) and a random number for determining the normal symbol of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 7A is an explanatory view showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 7 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 7 (A) is set in the positive change time jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 7A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 7B and 7C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 7B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 7C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 7B and 7C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the small hit occurs even when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, although the current playing state is the positive changing state Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 7A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (ie, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table that is referred to in order to determine either "probable big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a total of 10 determination values are allocated to the "big surprise probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (100 While it is determined that the probability change big hit is suddenly made at a rate of 10 minutes, the big hit type determination table 131b is assigned five determination values for "sudden probability change big hit" (5 of 100) Describe the case where it is determined that the probability is a big hit in a sudden manner). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. In other words, in this embodiment, when the second start winning opening 14 is start winning, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the first starting winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol The game value is high compared to the case where the variable display of is executed (in this example, the large winning opening is opened 15 times and the opening time of the large winning opening per time is as long as 29 seconds, which is 29 seconds High) The percentage determined to be “probable big hit” or “usually big hit” is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the special winning opening is opened 15 times as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, and each time a large winning opening is opened. A big hit (probably big hit or normal big hit) including a round with a long opening time of 29 seconds for the big winning opening, and a second specified gaming state that provides a smaller amount of gaming value than the gaming value, or a second specified gaming state As one of the big prize mouth is opened twice and the opening time of the big prize mouth per one time explains all the case where it decides sudden sudden change big hit which is all 1 seconds and short, but the game value of specified game state How to make it different is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared to the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state which has reduced the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. For example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, with 1st specified game state which opens large winning a prize opening plural times per 1 round, and 2nd specified game state which opens big winning a prize opening only once per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be lowered such that the number of opening times of the special winning opening is substantially reduced. In this manner, the game ball is less likely to win the winning opening by reducing the number of opening times of the special winning opening or shortening the opening time as compared with the first specific gaming state. It is sufficient if a specific gaming state is provided.

  Also, for example, when a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is ended, control is made to a definite change state or a short time state, and then, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times to configure a definite change state or a short time state, that certain change A first specified gaming state and a second specified gaming state may be provided in which the number of times of execution of the variable display in which the state or the time saving state is continued is made different. In this case, for example, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the definite change state or the time saving state is continued until the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and in the case of the second specific gaming state, the variable display When the number of times (for example, 20 times) that is less than that in the first specific gaming state ends, the probability change state or the time saving state may be ended, and the gaming value may be lowered compared to the first specific gaming state.

  The "probably big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a high probability state) At the same time, the system also shifts to the time saving state (see steps S167 and S168 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to big hit game state of 15 rounds, is not shifted to the positive change state after the big hit game state ends, and is transferred only to time saving state (see step S169 described later) . Then, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S141 to S144 described later). In this embodiment, the time saving state ends even if a big hit occurs before ending the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times after shifting to the time saving state (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, "Suddenly positive variation big hit" is a big hit with the opening number of the big winning opening being less than 2 times compared with "positive variation big hit" and "ordinary big hit", and opening time per time is 1 second and After the end of the big hit game, it is controlled to be in a definite change state (high probability state) and is controlled to be in a short time state (see steps S167 and S168 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 1 second each, which is the same as the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit". Control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained (described later) Steps S145 to S149). By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  Next, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit and the small hit for each big hit type will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing an opening pattern of the special winning opening. Among these, FIG. 9 (A) shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit (that is, the big hit of 15 rounds). Further, FIG. 9 (B) shows an opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of a definite big hit (that is, a big hit of two rounds) or a small hit.

  First, with reference to FIG. 9A, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit will be described. In this embodiment, when controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 9A, the first big winning opening is controlled to be open in the first round and the second round. Be done. Next, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the third round, the second large winning opening is controlled to be open, and thereafter, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are controlled to be alternately open. Ru. Also, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), the big winning opening per round was controlled to open for T1 time (in this example, 29 seconds) After that, it is controlled to be closed for a predetermined time.

  When controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit, the time controlled to the closed state after finishing the opening of the big winning opening is after the opening of the first big winning opening and the second large It differs from after the opening of the winning opening. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, after the opening of the first winning opening is finished, the closing time until the second winning opening is opened in the next round is T3 (this example). Then, as described later, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (refer to FIG. 21), but after the opening of the second large winning opening is finished, the first large winning opening is opened in the next round. The closing time up to T4 is T4 (in this example, 1 sec + 1 sec = 2 sec as described later, see FIG. 21). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, the closing time T3 is set to be longer than the closing time T4.

  The reason why T3> T4 is set as described above is as follows. In this embodiment, since the first large winning opening is arranged to be positioned above the second large winning opening, the game ball reaches from the first large winning opening to the second large winning opening. For example, even if the timing when the game ball reaches the first big winning opening is the closing timing of the first big winning opening, until the game ball reaches the second big winning opening It is possible that opening of the second big winning opening is started and it is possible to win the second big winning opening. Therefore, even if the closing time T3 from the closing of the first large winning opening to the start of the opening of the second large winning opening is somewhat long, the substantial closing time is not so long. On the other hand, since the second large winning opening is located below the first large winning opening, when the opening of the second large winning opening is ended, the opening of the first large winning opening is completely started. If it becomes impossible to win and the closing time T4 from the closing of the second big winning opening to the start of the opening of the first big winning opening is too long, the substantial closing time will be long. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the closing time T3 to be longer than the closing time T4, the game ball can be easily made to play in the big winning opening, and the interest to the game is improved.

  In addition, the game ball passes near the opening of the first large winning opening without reaching the first large winning opening provided on the upstream side, and then reaches near the opening of the second large winning opening downstream. It is desirable that the closing time T3 be shorter than the TX time. In addition, for example, it is possible to fire 100 game balls continuously in 60 seconds, and the time interval (fire interval) of game ball firing when firing game balls continuously is 60 seconds / 100 = 0.6 seconds In this case, it is desirable that the closing time T4 be shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the TX time from the firing interval of 0.6 seconds.

  In this embodiment, the closing time T3 is controlled to be longer than the closing time T4, but the closing time T3 and the closing time T4 may be the same time. For example, although it is necessary to set the closing time T4 to be somewhat short for the above reasons, it is not necessary to secure a long time for the closing time T3, so it is set to be as short as the closing time T4. May be

  In FIG. 9A, the closing period from the end of opening the first big winning opening in the first round to the start of opening the first big winning opening in the second round is not particularly mentioned. As described later, in this embodiment, the closing period from the end of the opening of the first winning opening in the first round to the start of the opening of the first winning opening in the second round is the closing time. The same three seconds as T3 plus four seconds (see FIG. 21) are used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 (B), the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the sudden variation big hit and the small hit will be described. In this embodiment, when controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a sudden probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 9B, the first big winning opening is controlled to an open state in the first round and the second round . Also, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the first big winning opening is controlled twice in the open state in the same manner as the big hit gaming state based on the sudden change big hit . It should be noted that when controlled to the small hit gaming state, unlike the big hit gaming state, there is no concept of a round, but in the example shown in FIG. 9 (B), one big winning opening is opened for convenience of illustration. It expresses as 2R opening of the second big winning a prize mouth as 2R.

  In addition, when it is controlled to the big hit game state which is suddenly based on the definite strange big hit or when it is controlled to the small hit game state, as shown in Figure 9 (B), the 1st large winning a prize mouth per T2 time (this example In the case, control the open state for 1 second). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the open time T2 in the sudden big hit or small hit is usually shorter than the open time T1 in the big hit or the positive big hit (T1> It is set to T2).

  In FIG. 9 (B), the closing time from when the first opening of the first large winning opening in the sudden big hit or small hitting ends to the start of the opening of the second first large winning opening in FIG. Although not mentioned, in this embodiment, the closing time from the end of the first opening of the first winning opening to the start of the opening of the second first opening is as described later. It is 6 seconds (see FIG. 22).

  10 and 11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol variably displayed on the presentation display device 9 corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 to A 003 (H) are presentation control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for designating a start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen. The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / suspiciously definite variation jackpot start designation command according to the type of jackpot. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the fanfare designation command for sudden probability big hit start designation suddenly when it is a definite odd hit, but not send the fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. It is also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 with the value indicating the number of rounds on the internal control (not the apparent number of rounds) set in the EXT data. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize how many rounds of the big hit game are to be started by checking the EXT data of the designated command during the big winning opening opening. For example, if "01 (H)" is set as EXT data, it can be recognized that it is the start of round 1 of the big hit game, and if "07 (H)" is set as EXT data , It can be recognized that it is the start of round 7 of the big hit game.

  A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, a value indicating a round number (not an apparent round number) in internal control is set in the EXT data, and the special winning opening after open designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 as the EXT data. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize how many rounds in the big hit game are to be ended by confirming the EXT data of the designated command after opening the big winning opening. For example, if "01 (H)" is set as EXT data, it can be recognized that the round 1 of big hit game is over, and if "07 (H)" is set as EXT data , It can be recognized that it is the end of the round 7 of the big hit game.

  Command A 301 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was usually a big hit with a production control command (big hit end 1 specified command: ending 1 specified command) is there. The command A 302 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was a definite variation big hit by the effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) is there. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. Although the gaming control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits an ending designation command for a definite odd jackpot end designation when it is a big hit, it is configured not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state (does not include the probability variation state). The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state background specification command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has increased or decreased is transmitted for the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages, the number of pending storages is shown. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, a presentation control command for designating which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been designated is transmitted as the pending storage number designating command for designating the number of pending storages. A common effect control command may be transmitted between the one pending storage number and the second pending storage number.

  Further, for example, different effect control commands (held memory number specifying command) may be transmitted when the first held memory number is specified and the second held memory number is specified. In this case, for example, as the pending storage number specification command, a value capable of specifying the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when specifying the first pending storage number When specifying the second hold storage number, "C1 (H)" may be included, and an effect control command in which the value of the hold storage number is set as the EXT data may be transmitted.

  Further, for example, when designating the same first pending storage number, the effect control command specifying addition or subtraction of the first pending storage number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and making the EXT data different. You may do so. For example, when common mode data "C0 (H)" is used to specify subtraction of the first pending storage number, command C000 (H) is sent, and addition of the first pending storage number is specified A command C 001 (H) may be sent to Furthermore, when designating the second pending storage number, the MODE data is made different, and when designating subtraction of the second pending storage number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted. When the addition is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening) is executed Be done. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, or the second start winning opening 14 If the second start opening switch 14a for turning on is turned on, that is, if the start winning combination to the first start winning opening 13 or the start winning combination to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing processing Execute (steps S311 and S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, one of the steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. Specifically, while initializing a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening), etc., the solenoids 21a and 21b are driven to set the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. Leave open. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming establishment of closing conditions of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening, and the like are performed. If the closing conditions of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are satisfied, and there is still a remaining round, control is performed to close the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening, and the predetermined time is set. After the lapse, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. Also, when all rounds have been completed, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are controlled to be closed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S307. Update to the value (7 in this example).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the first large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls having entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21a is driven to open the first special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is also processing to start a small hit game.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. A process is performed to check whether the opening condition or closing condition of the first big winning opening is established. If the closing condition is satisfied while the first big winning opening is open, control is performed to close the first big winning opening. Further, if the opening condition is satisfied while the first big winning opening is closed, control is performed to open the first big winning opening. When the opening of all the big winning openings is ended, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 (decimal) in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S211). If the 1st starting opening switch 13a is not an ON state, it will transfer to step S217. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S217.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number for big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, (1) It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. For example, in the variation pattern setting process described later, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts the value from the variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), or the variation pattern The value may be directly extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 14, in the first suspension storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first suspension storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S217). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S218). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S219) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S220). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area of the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14) (step S221). . In the process of step S221, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number for big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  FIG.15 and FIG.16 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 or not (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage number buffer. Then, it is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and each storage area in the first pending storage number buffer Shift the content of When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "first", the CPU 56 is a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55 Each random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time saving state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set and the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set. Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the background designation command is transmitted each time for each change, but, for example, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed from the time of the previous change at the start of the change, Only when the state changes, a background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of times of transmission of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, the microcomputer for effect control is in the order of background designation command, fluctuation pattern command, display result designation command, and pending storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. It will be sent to 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage count subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in the steps S215 and S221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first suspension storage buffer and the second suspension storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (refer to FIG. 7) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing to decide to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is configured to be higher than in the non-probability change state (normal game state and time saving state) ing. Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 7A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time jackpot judgment table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 7A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When the gaming state or the time saving state, the processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at normal times. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 7A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit or sudden big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is reset at the timing.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 7B and 7C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 7B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "the second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 7C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8A. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8B.

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" and "a sudden definite big hit" are determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer, and determines the big hit type. . Moreover, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high. In other words, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the game value is high (when the opening time of the big winning opening per one time is compared with the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed) There is a high probability of 29 seconds, and the probability of selecting a big hit or a probability big hit is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “3”, “7”, “9” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be "normal big hit", and "7" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be "probable variation big hit". If you decide to be "suddenly oddly big hit", decide "9" as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S80). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types according to the jackpot type. Is selected (step S81). Then, the process proceeds to step S89.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S82). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S83). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S89.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S84). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state (including when the probability changing state is entered), and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a definite big hit, or a sudden big hit, and it is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined that the time count has been digested or a big hit, it is a special symbol. It is reset at the timing of ending the fluctuation display and displaying the stop symbol. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S84), the CPU 56 is a table used to determine the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern type for outliers for probability change / time reduction is determined A table is selected (step S85). Then, the process proceeds to step S89.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S84), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S86). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S87). Then, the process proceeds to step S89.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern for shortening as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. The type determination table is selected (step S88). Then, the process proceeds to step S89.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processes of steps S84 to S88, the shortening-out variation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state (including the case where it is the definite variation state), the variation pattern type determination table for probability change / time reduction is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined in the process of step S89 described later, and when the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined, the process of step S91 The fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed when the gaming state is the short time state (including the case of the probability changing state) or when the total number of pending storages is three or more. .

  In this embodiment, although the case where the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the time saving state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories are different tables is shown, A common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for fluctuation.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is the time saving state, when the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation is performed You may not do this. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S84, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, for normal use The variation pattern type determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S81, S83, S85, S87 or S88. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S89). In addition, when it is configured not to extract random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 performs the variation pattern type determination for generating the random pattern type determination random number (random 2). The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S 89, a hit variation pattern determination table, and an out-of-range variation pattern determination table. One of them is selected (step S90). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S91). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the microcomputer for effect control 100 (step S92). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S93).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S94). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S95).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S84 to S88 and S89 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 10) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S101). If not set, the process proceeds to step S107.

  If the jackpot flag is set, and if the type of the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S102 and S103). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not.

  Further, when the type of the big hit is a definite positive big hit suddenly, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (steps S104 and S105). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03" or not.

  Then, when it is neither the definite variation big hit nor the sudden variation big hit (in other words, it is usually the big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 2 designation command (step SS106).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S101), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S107). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S108). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S107), that is, when the small hit flag is out, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a display result 1 designation command (step S109).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S110).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the storage storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Note that whether or not the pending storage number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction specification command has been sent when sending the pending storage number subtraction specification command in step S122 described later. The storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag may be set, and it may be checked in step S121 whether the pending storage number subtraction specification command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing or the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. Just do it.

  Next, if the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been sent, the CPU 56 performs control to send the pending storage number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first storage reserve number subtraction designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second storage reserve number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, resets the probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation state and the time saving flag indicating that it is a short time status (step S132). If it is set, the time reduction counter is also reset.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is normally a jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is a definite variation big hit, send a big hit start 2 designated command. If the type of the jackpot is a sudden oddity big hit, send a small hit / sudden definite big hit start specification command. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is usually a big hit, a definite big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) .

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) in the big winning opening open before timer (step S134). The big winning opening open pre-opening timer is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S134, the time required from the time when the variable display is stopped to the time the first round is started (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and the big hit symbol is The time corresponding to the time for performing fanfare effect from the stop display to the start of the first round) is set as the timer before the opening of the special winning opening. Further, for the first and subsequent rounds, an interval time between the rounds (a device for performing an interval effect between rounds on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100) is set as the big winning opening opening pre-opening timer.

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes the value of the round number counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game to 0 (step S136).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S130, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the time saving state is 0 (step S141). . If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (in this case, the time saving state is controlled based on the fact that the big hit has been made normally and the time saving counter is set), the CPU 56 The value is decremented by one (step S142). Then, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the time saving flag (step S144).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suspiciously positive change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big winning opening pre-opening timer (step S147). In the case of a small hit, at the start of the small hit game, in step S147, the time required for the small hit game to be started after the fluctuation display is stopped is set in the timer before the big winning opening is opened. .

  In this embodiment, as described above, the opening control of the big winning opening is performed in the same manner in appearance in the case of the sudden big hit and the small hit suddenly (see FIG. 9B). Suddenly, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S150).

  Next, the release pattern data used for the release control of the big winning opening in the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of open pattern data used for open control of a large winning opening in a big hit game or a small hit game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 21, the opening control of the big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit, a value (big winning opening designated value) for designating a big winning opening to be released every round, an opening time, a closing time and an end code are set. The open pattern data that has been sent is used.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a big hit or a probability variation big hit, a value specifying the first big winning opening is set in the first round and the second round as a large winning opening designated value for opening. In addition, a value specifying the second winning opening is set in the third round as a special winning opening specified value for opening, and thereafter, a value specifying the first winning opening and a second winning opening are specified alternately. The value to be set is set. For example, a special winning opening designation value "1" is set as a value for designating the first special winning opening, and a special winning opening designation value "2" is set as a value for specifying the second special winning opening.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, the open time is uniformly set to 29 seconds (corresponding to the open time T1 shown in FIG. 9A).

  As shown in FIG. 21, the closing time is set to 3 seconds or 1 second in the case of a big hit or a positive big hit normally. Specifically, 3 seconds is set as the closing time after the opening of the first big winning opening in the first round is finished. In this case, when the first round is ended in the special winning opening open process described later, one second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), so the first large winning opening of the first round is opened. The total closing time until the opening of the first big winning opening in the second round is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds.

  In addition, after the opening of the first big winning opening after the second round, 3 seconds is set as the closing time. In this case, when the round is terminated in the special winning opening open process described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), and thus the opening of the first large winning opening of the round is ended. Then, the total closing time until the opening of the second winning opening of the next round starts is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In addition, after the opening of the second big winning opening after the second round, 1 second is set as the closing time. In this case, when the round is ended in the special winning opening open process described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), and thus the opening of the second large winning opening of the round is ended. Then, the total closing time until the opening of the first winning opening of the next round starts is 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21, 1 second is set as the closing time in the final round (15th round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the opening of the big winning opening in the final round The big hit game may be ended immediately after the end.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21, in the last record of the release pattern data of each round, an end code indicating that it is the final data of the release pattern data is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, the opening control of the big winning opening in the big hit game based on the sudden change big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), in the case of sudden positive variation, open pattern data is used in which the designated special winning opening designated for open, open time, close time and end code are set for each round. .

  As shown in FIG. 22 (A), in the case of a definite positive big hit, a value specifying the first large winning opening in both the first round and the second round as a large winning opening specified value for opening (for example, “1” ) Is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), when it is a definite positive big hit suddenly, the open time is uniformly set to 1 second (corresponding to the open time T2 shown in FIG. 9 (B)). Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the closing time is uniformly set to 5 seconds in the case of a sudden positive big hit. In this case, when the first round is ended in the special winning opening open process described later, one second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), so the first large winning opening of the first round is opened. The total closing time until the opening of the first big winning opening of the next second round is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), the closing time is set to 5 seconds in the final round (the second round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the winning hole in the final round The big hit game may be ended as soon as the opening of the game ends.

  Although the example shown in FIG. 22 (A) shows the case where 5 seconds is set as the closing time in the open pattern data, it is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, for example, shorter than 1 second, 2 seconds, etc. The closing time may be set, or a longer closing time such as 10 seconds or 20 seconds may be set.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22A, an end code is set in the last record of the release pattern data of each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22 (B), the opening control of the large winning opening in the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIG. 22B, in the case of a small hit, open pattern data in which all open times and closed times in the small hit game and an end code are set is used. In this embodiment, in the case of a small hit, control is performed so that only the opening control of the first large winning opening is uniformly executed without using the large winning opening designated value.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), in the case of a small hit, the open time is uniformly set to 1 second (corresponding to the open time T2 shown in FIG. 9 (B)), and open for small hit. Two open times are set in the pattern data. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), in the case of a small hit, the closing time between the first and second opening times is set to 6 seconds, and the closing time after the second last opening time Is set to 5 seconds. As described above, when it suddenly becomes a big hit, it is the closing time from the end of the opening of the first big winning opening of the first round to the start of the opening of the first big winning opening of the second round Since the total is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds, the appearance opening time and closing time of the case of a sudden big hit and the small hit are the same.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), 5 seconds is set as the closing time after the last opening of the first winning opening has been completed, but the opening of the last opening of the first winning opening is set. It is also possible not to set the closing time after finishing the small hit game immediately after ending the opening of the last first large winning opening.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, an end code is set in the last record of the release pattern data.

  In addition, since it is to show whether the sudden change big hit or the small hit is suddenly controlled to the positive change state or not, the big hit if it is during the big hit game or the small hit game based on the positive change big hit suddenly It is desirable to suppress the winning of the game ball to the winning opening as much as possible. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of a definite big hit or a small hit, the opening time of the big winning opening is shortened to 1 second, and the next big winning opening is opened after the opening of the big winning opening. The closing time until it is 6 seconds is slightly longer. By lengthening the closing time between the opening and closing of the big winning opening like this, in this embodiment, the winning opening is achieved by aiming the timing of the opening of the big winning opening and firing the game ball. It is prevented as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, by providing a closing time in addition to the opening time during the round, the closing time of the winning opening (for example, the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9). And although the case where closure time T4 was made to differ was shown, it is not restricted only to such an aspect. For example, the opening time is set only during the round, and the closing time of the winning opening is made different by setting the closing time as the interval period after the round (for example, the closing time T3 or the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9). ) May be made different.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening open pre-processing (step S305) executed before each round in the big hit game. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special winning opening opening pre-timer by 1 (step S1401). When the special winning opening open before timer times out (when the value of the special winning opening before opening is 0) (step S1402), the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S1403). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0. The CPU 56 also adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step S1405).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a pointer at the beginning of the release pattern data according to the jackpot type and the current round (step S1406). Note that the jackpot type can be specifically determined by confirming which of "01" to "03" is the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. Also, the current round can be determined by checking the value of the round number counter.

  For example, when controlling the big hit game based on the big hit or probability variation big hit normally, when the first round is started, "01" or "02" is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is " By setting the pointer at the beginning of the opening pattern data of the first round for the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit shown in FIG. The processing will be executed in order from. In addition, when starting the round after the second round, it is possible that "01" or "02" is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is any of "2" to "15". By setting the pointer at the head of the open pattern data of any of the second round to the fifteenth round for the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit shown in FIG. Processing will be executed sequentially from the data.

  Also, for example, in the case of controlling the big hit game based on the definite oddity big hit suddenly, when the first round is started, "03" is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is "1". By setting the pointer at the beginning of the first round of open pattern data for the sudden random variation big hit shown in FIG. 22 (A) based on the following, processing sequentially from the data of the first record of the set open pattern data Will be executed. In addition, when the second round is started, “03” is set in the big hit type buffer and the value of the round number counter is “2”, as shown in FIG. By setting the pointer at the top of the release pattern data of the second round, the processing is sequentially executed from the data of the top record of the set release pattern data.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out and sets a special winning opening designation value to be released in the release pattern data pointed by the pointer (step S1407). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S1408), reads the opening time set next to the special winning opening designated value in the opening pattern data pointed by the pointer, and opens the special winning opening or The open / close time timer for measuring the closing time is set (step S1409).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the open special prize winning opening to an open state (step S1410). Specifically, when the value (for example, “1”) specifying the first large winning opening is set as the large winning opening specified value in step S1407, the solenoid 21a is driven to set the first large winning opening. Control to open state. In addition, when the value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd big winning a prize mouth is set as a big winning a prize mouth designated value in step S1407, it drives solenoid 21b and makes 2nd big prize winning a prize opening state Control.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the value of the current round number counter to EXT data, and performs control to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1411).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step S306) (step S1412).

  FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening open process (step S306). In the special winning opening open process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a detection signal from the count switch corresponding to the opening special winning opening has been input (step S1451). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) specifying the first large winning opening is set as the large winning opening specified value in step S1407 of the special winning opening open processing, the first count switch 23a Check if the detection signal from is input. In addition, when the value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd large winning a prize opening as a special winning a prize opening specified value is set in step S1407 of special winning a prize opening opening processing, detection from the 2nd count switch 23b Check if you have input a signal. Then, when the count switch corresponding to the open special winning opening is turned on, that is, when the gaming ball that has won the special winning opening is detected (Y in step S1451), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1452). Then, when the value of the winning number counter after the addition becomes 10 (step S1453), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1460.

  If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the open / close time timer (step S1454), and confirms whether the open / close time timer has timed out (step S1455). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the process ends. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S1456), and confirms whether or not the value in the release pattern data pointed by the pointer is a value indicating the end code ( Step S1457). If the value indicates the end code, the process proceeds to step S1460.

  If the value in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer is not a value indicating the end code (ie, if it is a value indicating the closed time), the CPU 56 reads the closed time in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer, The timer is set (step S1458).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening in a closed state (step S1459). Specifically, when the value (for example, “1”) for designating the first large winning opening is set as the large winning opening specified value in step S1407 of the special winning opening open processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. It stops and controls the 1st big winning a prize mouth in a closed state. In addition, when the value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd large winning a prize opening as a special winning a prize opening specified value is set in step S1407 of special winning a prize opening opening processing, stopping the drive of solenoid 21b Control the second big winning opening in the closed state.

  When the process proceeds to step S1460, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the CPU 56 first sets the current value of the round number counter to EXT data, and performs control to transmit a special winning opening open specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1460).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the present big hit game is suddenly based on a definite big hit (step S1461). In addition, it is confirmed by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03", specifically, whether it is something based on the definite variation big hit suddenly It can be determined.

  If the current big hit game is not based on the sudden change big hit (ie, it is usually based on the big hit or the positive change big hit), the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the round number counter is 15 ( Step S1462). If the value of the round number counter is 15, that is, if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to step S1466. If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (ie, if there are remaining rounds), the process moves to step S1464.

  If the present big hit game is suddenly based on a definite big hit, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S1463). If the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, if the final round has ended), the process moves to step S1466. If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (ie, if there are remaining rounds), the process moves to step S1464.

  If there is a remaining round (N in step S1462 or N in step S1463), the CPU 56 causes the timer before the opening of the special winning opening to open the time before the start of the round (for example, in the effect display device 9 A value (one second in this example) corresponding to the time to notify (corresponding to a period performing interval effect) is set (step S1464).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S1465).

  If the final round has been completed (Y in step S1462 or Y in step S1463), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S1466).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is a big hit, it sends a big hit end 1 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit, it sends a big hit end 2 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit suddenly, a small hit / suddenly Send a definite variation big hit end specification command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of the big hit is a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit (step S166). In addition, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is specifically any of “02” to “03” whether or not it is a definite variation big hit or a sudden definite variation big hit or not It can be determined by confirming whether it is not. If it is a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state (step S167), and also sets the time saving flag to shift the gaming status to the time reduction status (step S168) ). Then, the process proceeds to step S171.

  If neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit (that is, usually a big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time-shortening flag to shift the gaming state to the time-saving state (step S169). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter for counting the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the time reduction state (step S170). Then, the process proceeds to step S171.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing small hit opening pre-processing (step S308) executed in the small hit game. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening open pre-timer by 1 (step S2470). When the special winning opening front timer has timed out (the value of the special winning opening front timer is 0) (step S2471), the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S2472). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a pointer at the beginning of the open pattern data for small hit (step S2474). Next, the CPU 56 reads the open time in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the open / close time timer (step S2475).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big winning opening to an open state (step S2476). Specifically, the solenoid 21a is driven to control the first big winning opening to an open state. Further, the CPU 56 sets a big winning opening open flag indicating that the big winning opening is open (step S2477).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S309) (step S2478).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the small hit open process (step S309). In the small hit open process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the open / close time timer (step S2481), and checks whether the open / close time timer has timed out (step S2482). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the process ends. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S2483), and confirms whether or not the value in the release pattern data pointed by the pointer is a value indicating the end code ( Step S2484). If the value indicates the end code, the process proceeds to step S2492.

  If the value in the release pattern data pointed to by the pointer is not a value indicating an end code (ie, if it is a value indicating an open time or a close time), the CPU 56 determines whether the big winning opening open flag is set. (Step S2485). If the special winning opening open flag is not set (that is, if the first large winning opening is closed), the CPU 56 reads the open time in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets the open / close time timer. (Step S2486).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big winning opening to an open state (step S2487). Specifically, the solenoid 21a is driven to control the first big winning opening to an open state. Further, the CPU 56 sets the big winning opening open flag (step S2488).

  If the special winning opening open flag is set (that is, if the first large winning opening is open), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets the open / close time timer. (Step S2489).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the first big winning opening in the closed state (step S2490). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21a is stopped to control the first big winning opening to the open state. Further, the CPU 56 resets the big winning opening open flag (step S2491).

  If the end code is obtained at step S2487, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting end process (step S310) (step S2492).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (step S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hitting end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hitting end display timer is set (step S2160), and if the small hit ending display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2164. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S2161), and control to transmit a small hit / suspiciously positive variation big hit end designation command is performed (step S2162). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) (step S2163). finish.

  In step S2164, the value of the small hitting end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2165), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S2166).

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the setting of the start flag, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as the variable winning means, the first variable winning means (in the present example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a) and the second variable winning means (in the present example) And a second special variable winning ball device 20b). In addition, the first specific gaming state (in this example, a normal big hit or a probability variation based on a big hit) is changed to the first state (in the present example, the open state) the variable winning means in the first period (in the present example, 29 seconds). And the second specified gaming state (the game state is controlled differently from the normal gaming state after changing the variable winning means to the first state for the second period (one second in this example) shorter than the first period. In this example, the special game state in which the game state before changing the variable winning means to the first state after changing the variable winning means to the first state for the second period after suddenly changing the variable winning means to the first state) (In this example, it can be controlled to the small hit gaming state). Then, when controlling to the second specific gaming state and controlling to the special gaming state, any one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means (in the present embodiment, the first variable winning means) When changing the special variable winning prize ball device 20a) to the first state for the second period and controlling to the first specific gaming state, the variable winning of any one of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means After the means (in this example, the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a) is changed to the first state for the first period, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are changed to the first state according to a predetermined order. (In this example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are alternately controlled to the open state). Therefore, since the change aspect of the variable winning means changes after the first period in the first specific gaming state, in the gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable winning means, it is possible to draw attention to the change aspect of the variable winning means The interest to the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the first big winning opening is controlled to be open for 29 seconds over two rounds in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, in the third to fifteenth rounds, the first big winning opening and Although the case of controlling the second large winning opening alternately to the open state is shown, it is not always necessary to control the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening to the open state according to a predetermined order. It does not have to be controlled to the open state. For example, after the third round, open in order from the first winning opening → first winning opening → second winning opening → first winning opening → first winning opening → second winning opening · · · It may be controlled to be in the state, as long as it controls the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening in the open state in accordance with some determined order. Also, even in the case where the special winning opening is opened in such an irregular order, as shown in this embodiment, the second large winning opening on the downstream side is closed after the closing. The time to open the side of the first big winning opening may be shortened.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means differ in the ease of winning of the game balls. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b is more likely to win a large prize as compared with the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a. Then, when controlling to the second specific gaming state and controlling to the special gaming state, the variable winning means that is more difficult to win the gaming ball is changed to the first state for the second period. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state and the special gaming state, it is difficult for the game ball to win in the variable winning means, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the second special winning prize ball device 20b is made larger than the first special variable winning ball device 20a to make it easy to win the second big winning prize opening. How to vary the easiness of winning of the big winning opening is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, the game balls are easily guided by the path from the game ball fired from the ball striking device to the first big winning opening via the game area 7 and the path from the second big winning opening. It may be configured to be different (for example, a path is formed so that the gaming ball is easily guided to the opening of one of the big winning opening). In this case, for example, it is easy to win a prize in the first big prize mouth and the second big prize mouth by making the positions of the big prize mouths and the length of the route, and the arrangement of the features and nails which become obstacles different. The difference is to make it different. Further, for example, by making the sizes of the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a and the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b the same size, the one of the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a disposed on the upstream side You may make it easy to win a prize. Also, for example, even if one big winning opening is smaller than the other big winning opening, a path is formed or a position is arranged so that the game ball can be easily guided. It may be configured to be easier to win than the special winning opening of.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable winning means is provided at the upstream position where the gaming balls flow down, and the second variable winning means is provided at the downstream position where the gaming balls flow down. And, when changing the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state according to the predetermined order, the first variable winning means is changed to the second state, and then the second variable winning means is in the first state The first variable winning means is changed to the first state after the second variable winning means is changed to the second state than the period (in this example, the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 9A) before changing to The first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are controlled so as to shorten the period (in the present example, the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9) until it is caused. Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball easy to win in the variable winning means, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In the embodiment shown above, even when the abnormal winning to the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is detected, the abnormal notification LED 24a, 24b can be used to notify of the abnormal Good. Hereinafter, a modified example in the case of notifying an abnormal winning to the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a process example of a winning notification process when notifying an abnormal winning to the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. In the modification shown in FIG. 31, in the winning a prize notification process, the CPU 56 first reads the switch on buffer set in the switch process (step S21) (step S2121). Next, the CPU 56 reads the value of the special symbol process flag (step S2122), and confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S2123).

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second count switch 23b is in the on state based on the switch-on buffer read in step S2121 (step S2124). If the second count switch 23b is in the ON state, an initial abnormal notification completion flag indicating that the first abnormal winning at the second large winning opening has already been notified after power-on of the gaming machine is set. Whether or not it is checked (step S2125). If the first abnormal notification completion flag is not set (that is, if the abnormal winning to the second large winning opening has not yet been notified even once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine), the CPU 56 generates an abnormal notification LED 24b. Is controlled (step S2126). On the other hand, if the first abnormal notification completion flag is set (that is, if the first abnormal winning to the second large winning opening has already been notified after the power is turned on to the gaming machine), the CPU 56 notifies the abnormal Control is performed to turn on the LED 24a (step S2127). Then, if it is not set, the CPU 56 sets an initial abnormal notification completion flag (step S2128).

  If the second count switch 23b is not in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms whether the first count switch 23a is in the on state based on the switch on buffer read in step S2121 (step S2129) . If the first count switch 23a is in the on state, the CPU 56 performs control to turn on the abnormality notification LED 24a (step S2130).

  The fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (that is, any of 0 to 4) in step S2123 means that in the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. This means that one of the processes (step S304) is ready to be executed. That is, it is a state in which neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state is controlled, and the opening control of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is not performed. Nevertheless, the fact that it is judged as Y in the steps S2124 and S2129 and the winning of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is detected means that the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is detected. It indicates that there may be something wrong or wrong. Therefore, when the CPU 56 detects the ON state of the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b in steps S2124 and S2129 if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in step S2123, the first process is performed. It is determined that the abnormal winning to the special winning opening or the second large winning opening has occurred, and control is performed to turn on the abnormal notification LED 24a or the abnormal notification LED 24b.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag in step S2123 is 5 or more (that is, any of 5 to 10) means that the special winning opening process is performed (step S305) in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. This means that one of the small hit end processes (step S310) is being executed. That is, it is a period in which the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is controlled, and the opening control of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening can be performed, and the game to the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening There may be a ball prize. Therefore, when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more in step S2123, the CPU 56 ends the winning notification process as it is.

  In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 31, after lighting LED24a, 24b for alerting | reporting abnormality and starting abnormality alerting | reporting by step S2126, S2127, S2130, abnormality alerting | reporting is carried out based on having passed predetermined period, for example. You should finish the In this case, for example, a timer may be set when abnormality notification is started, and the abnormality notification LEDs 24a and 24b may be turned off based on the time-out of the timer to end the abnormality notification. Also, for example, after the notification of the abnormality is started, the notification of the abnormality may be ended based on the fact that the error release button or the like is pressed by the game clerk or the like.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 31, the abnormal winning of the game ball on the first variable winning means (in this example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a) is detected, and the second variable winning means (this example) In the case of detecting the abnormal winning of the gaming ball on the second special variable winning winning ball device 20b), the abnormal winning is notified in a different notification mode. Specifically, when an abnormal winning on the first special variable winning ball device 20a (first big winning opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24a is turned on. When an abnormal winning on the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b (second big winning opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24b is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to recognize to which variable winning means the abnormal winning has occurred.

  Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 31, when the abnormal winning on the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a (first big winning opening) is detected, the abnormality notifying LED 24a is turned on, while the game machine is turned on. When an abnormal winning to the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b (second big winning opening) is first detected after the power is turned on, the abnormal notification (in this example, the abnormal notification LED 24b is lit) is performed in a different notification mode. For example, when carrying out an error inspection at the time of factory shipment of a gaming machine, etc., even if both the abnormal winning to the first large winning opening and the abnormal winning to the second large winning opening are generated simultaneously, the first large While being able to distinguish whether it is an abnormal prize to the winning opening or an abnormal winning to the second big winning opening, an abnormal winning to the first big winning opening and an abnormal winning to the second big winning opening respectively It can be checked that it can be detected normally. On the other hand, in the detection of the second or subsequent abnormal prize, the same abnormal notification LED 24a is turned on even when any abnormal prize is detected in the big winning opening, so when a gaming clerk discovers an abnormal prize It is sufficient to check only the error notification LED 24a, and it is possible to easily find an abnormal winning.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 31, when the big hit is not being played (when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5), it is immediately abnormal when the on state of the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b is detected. Although the case of notifying is shown, the number of detections of the ON state of the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b is counted, for example, not limited to such an aspect, and the detected number reaches a predetermined threshold value. The abnormality may be notified on condition of.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, even during a big hit game (even if the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more), the game ball on the big winning opening not for opening among the two big winning openings Even when the player wins a predetermined threshold or more, it may be determined as an abnormal winning and notified of an abnormality. In this case, after the closing of the large winning opening to be opened, in consideration of the presence of the game ball detected by the count switch after a delay, it is judged abnormal when in the big hit game (the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more) The threshold used for may be a value larger than the threshold used for abnormality determination when the big hit is not in progress (the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5).

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, when the abnormal winning to the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b (second big winning opening) is first detected after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the abnormal notification LED 24b is lit. However, the method of notification of the abnormal winning is not limited to such a mode, for example, the second special variable winning ball device 20b (second large) after the power is turned on the gaming machine, for example When an abnormal winning on the winning opening) is detected, both the error notifying LED 24a and the error notifying LED 24b may be turned on.

  Moreover, although the case where abnormality alerting | reporting was carried out by making LED24 a, 24 b for abnormality alerting | reporting turn on was shown in the modification shown in FIG. 31, the aspect of abnormality alerting is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command indicating that the abnormal winning is detected to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is based on the reception of the command. Alternatively, the abnormality display screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9, the frame LED 28 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined notification pattern, or a predetermined notification sound may be output from the speaker 27. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may externally output an external output signal indicating that the abnormal winning is detected to a hall computer or the like.

  Moreover, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, although the case where the alerting | reporting aspect of abnormal winning a prize was made to differ by using two LED24a, 24b for abnormal reporting, alerting | reporting of abnormal winning using only one LED for abnormality alerting | reporting The modes may be different. For example, when the first abnormal winning to the second large winning opening is detected after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the abnormal notification LED 24a is blinked, and the abnormal winning to the second large winning opening after the second time If it is detected, the same abnormality notification LED 24a may be turned on.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 31, for example, the first abnormal notification completed flag is stored in the backup RAM, and after the notification mode of the abnormal winning to the second big winning opening is made different once, the next time The notification mode of the abnormal winning to the second large winning opening may be the same as the notification of the abnormal winning to the first large winning opening until the initialization is performed.

  Further, although the modification shown in FIG. 31 shows a case where the notification mode of the abnormal winning to the second big winning opening is changed only once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is not limited to only once. The notification mode of the abnormal winning to the second big winning opening of a predetermined number of times after the power is turned on may be made different. For example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the abnormal notification LED 24b may be turned on up to two times when an abnormal winning on the second big winning opening is detected.

  Also, in the embodiment shown above, a case is shown where the big winning opening is opened only once per round in the big hit gaming state, but it may be possible to open the big winning opening multiple times per round. . Hereinafter, a modification in the case of being able to open a large winning a prize opening a plurality of times per round in the big hit game state will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a process (step S306) in the process of opening the big winning opening when the big winning opening can be opened a plurality of times per round in the big hit gaming state. In the modified example shown in FIG. 32, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see FIG. 23), when step S1410 is executed to control the opening target big winning opening to the open state, the CPU 56 is in the opening of the big winning opening. We shall set the flag.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 32, the processes of steps S1451 to S1457 are the same as the processes shown in FIG. If the value in the release pattern data pointed by the pointer in step S1457 is not a value indicating the end code (that is, if it is a value indicating the release time or the closure time), the CPU 56 sets the special winning opening open flag. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S1457A). If the special winning opening open flag is not set (that is, if the opening target large winning opening is closed), the CPU 56 reads the open time in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets the open / close time timer to The setting is made (step S1457B).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the open special winning opening to be open (step S1457C). Specifically, when a value (for example, “1”) specifying the first large winning opening is set as the large winning opening specified value in step S1407 of the special winning opening open processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. Control the first big winning opening to the open state. In addition, when the value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd large winning a prize opening as a special winning a prize opening designated value is set with step S1407 of special winning a prize opening opening processing, the solenoid 21b is driven and the 2nd Control the big winning opening to the open state. In addition, the CPU 56 sets the big winning opening open flag (step S1457D).

  If the special winning opening open flag is set (that is, if the opening target large winning opening is open), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets the opening / closing time timer to It sets (step S1458).

  Next, the CPU 56 controls the open special winning opening in a closed state (step S1459). Specifically, when the value (for example, “1”) for designating the first large winning opening is set as the large winning opening specified value in step S1407 of the special winning opening open processing, the solenoid 21a is driven. It stops and controls the 1st big winning a prize mouth in a closed state. In addition, when the value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd large winning a prize opening as a special winning a prize opening specified value is set in step S1407 of special winning a prize opening opening processing, stopping the drive of solenoid 21b Control the second big winning opening in the closed state. Further, the CPU 56 resets the big winning opening open flag (step S1459A).

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 32, the processes after step S1460 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence 1 Although one variation pattern command is transmitted, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. 3). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine which pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  The present invention performs a predetermined game by firing game media in the game area, and controls the game to a specific game state in which a round game advantageous to the player is executed multiple times when the game result is a specific game result. The present invention is suitably applied to gaming machines.

  Next, modifications of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit and the small hit for each big hit type will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing an opening pattern of the special winning opening. The opening pattern of the special winning opening shown in FIG. 33 is a modification of the opening pattern of the special winning opening shown in FIG. Among them, FIG. 33A shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit (that is, the big hit of 15 rounds). Further, FIG. 33 (B) shows the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of a definite positive big hit (that is, a big hit of two rounds) or a small hit.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33A, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit will be described. In this modification, when being controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the first big winning opening is controlled to an open state in the first round, and the second round Then, in the order that the second big winning opening is controlled to the open state and then the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the third round, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately opened. Controlled by the state. Also, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the big winning opening per round was controlled to T1 time (in this example, 29 seconds) open state After that, it is controlled to be closed for a predetermined time.

  When controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit or probability variation big hit, the time controlled to the closed state after finishing the opening of the big winning opening is after the opening of the first big winning opening and the second large It differs from after the opening of the winning opening. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 33A, after the opening of the first big winning opening is finished, the closing time until the second winning opening is opened in the next round is T3 hours (in this example, , 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds as described later (see FIG. 34.), while the opening of the second large winning opening is finished, until the first large winning opening is opened in the next round The closing time of T is T4 (in this example, 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds as will be described later; see FIG. 34). And in this modification, as shown in Drawing 33 (A), closing time T3 is set up longer than closing time T4.

  The reason why T3> T4 is set as described above is as follows. In this modification, since the first large winning opening is disposed above the second large winning opening, the game ball reaches the second large winning opening from the first large winning opening. There is a slight time difference, and for example, even if the timing when the game ball reaches the first big winning opening is the closing timing of the first big winning opening, it is the second before the game ball reaches the second big winning opening (2) Opening of the big winning opening may be started, and it may be possible to win the second big winning opening. Therefore, even if the closing time T3 from the closing of the first large winning opening to the start of the opening of the second large winning opening is somewhat long, the substantial closing time is not so long. On the other hand, since the second large winning opening is located below the first large winning opening, when the opening of the second large winning opening is ended, the opening of the first large winning opening is completely started. If it becomes impossible to win and the closing time T4 from the closing of the second big winning opening to the start of the opening of the first big winning opening is too long, the substantial closing time will be long. Therefore, in this modification, by setting the closing time T3 to be longer than the closing time T4, the game ball can be easily made to play in the big winning opening, and the interest to the game is improved.

  In addition, the game ball passes near the opening of the first large winning opening without reaching the first large winning opening provided on the upstream side, and then reaches near the opening of the second large winning opening downstream. It is desirable that the closing time T3 be shorter than the TX time. In addition, for example, it is possible to fire 100 game balls continuously in 60 seconds, and the time interval (fire interval) of game ball firing when firing game balls continuously is 60 seconds / 100 = 0.6 seconds In this case, it is desirable that the closing time T4 be shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the TX time from the firing interval of 0.6 seconds.

  In this modification, the closing time T3 is controlled to be longer than the closing time T4, but the closing time T3 and the closing time T4 may be the same time. For example, although it is necessary to set the closing time T4 to be somewhat short for the above reasons, it is not necessary to secure a long time for the closing time T3, so it is set to be as short as the closing time T4. May be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (B), the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the sudden variation big hit and the small hit will be described. In this modification, when being controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a sudden probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the first round, and the second in the second round 2 large winning a prize mouth is controlled to open state, although it is 2 rounds, 1st large winning a prize mouth and 2nd large winning a prize mouth are controlled to open state alternately. Also, when controlled to the small hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the first big winning opening is opened in the first opening in the same manner as the big hit gaming state based on the sudden change big hit suddenly In the second opening, the second big winning opening is controlled to the opening state, and although it is two opening, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately controlled to the opening state. Ru. It should be noted that when controlled to the small hit gaming state, unlike the big hit gaming state, there is no concept of a round, but in the example shown in FIG. 33 (B), one big winning opening is opened for convenience of illustration. It expresses as 2R opening of the second big winning a prize mouth as 2R.

  In addition, when it is controlled to the big hit game state which is suddenly based on the definite strange big hit or when it is controlled to the small hit game state, as shown in Figure 33 (B), the 1st large winning a prize mouth per T2 time (this example In the case, control the open state for 1 second). And in this modification, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A) and (B), the open time T2 in the sudden big hit or small hit is usually shorter than the open time T1 in the big hit or the positive big hit (T1> T2 Is set to).

  In addition, in this modification, the closing time T5 from the closing of the first large winning opening in the big hit game and the small hitting game based on the definite big change big hit suddenly starts the opening of the second big winning opening in the second round, As described later, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds. On the other hand, the closing time T3 from the closing of the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit to the start of the opening of the second big winning opening in the next round will be described later. 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (see FIG. 34), and the closing time T4 from the closing of the second large winning opening to the start of the opening of the first large winning opening in the next round is as described later. 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the closing time T5 (in this example, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds) in the sudden big hit or small hit is longer as compared with any of the closing time T3 and the closing time T4. Therefore, while making the disadvantage period (closing time of the big winning opening) relatively short in a big hit game based on a big hit or a definite variation big hit, the disadvantage period is made relatively long in a sudden big hit or small hit, In a gaming machine having a large winning opening, it is possible to effectively control the disadvantage period and to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit or a definite big hit, a round in which the big winning opening is opened for a long time of 29 seconds is executed over 15 rounds, and it is easy for the game ball to win the big winning opening. From this, the disadvantage period (the closing time of the big winning opening) is made relatively short so that the gaming ball can be more easily won in the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the case of sudden big hit or small hit, the purpose is to make it appear as if the gaming state has suddenly changed (for example, suddenly changed to a positive change state), and so on Since it is not assumed that the game ball is won and the winning ball is given, the opening time of the big winning opening is short as one second and the number of opening times is as small as two times. Therefore, in the case of a sudden big hit or a small hit suddenly, the disadvantage period is also made relatively long, so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to be won in the big winning opening. As such, in this modification, the interest to the game is improved by effectively controlling the disadvantageous period according to the type of the big hit and the like.

  In FIG. 33 (B), the closing time from when the first opening of the first large winning opening in the sudden big hit or small hitting ends to the start of the opening of the second large winning opening in the second in particular Although not mentioned, in this modification, as described later, the closing time from the end of the opening of the first big winning opening to the start of the opening of the second big winning opening for the second time is 6 It is said to be seconds.

  In this modification, the small hit is also controlled to open the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening alternately in the same manner as the sudden big hit, but for the small hitting, Only one of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be controlled to be open. For example, in the small hit gaming state, both of the opening of the first large winning opening and the opening of the second large winning opening may be controlled to open the first large winning opening.

  The open pattern data used for the open control of the big winning opening during the big hit game and the small hit game corresponding to the above-mentioned modification will be described. FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing an example of open pattern data used for open control of a large winning opening in a big hit game or a small hit game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 34, the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the big hit or the probability variation big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit, a value (big winning opening designated value) for designating a big winning opening to be released every round, an opening time, a closing time and an end code are set. The open pattern data that has been sent is used.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, a value specifying the first big winning opening is set in the first round as the large winning opening designated value for opening, and the second large in the second round A value specifying the winning opening is set, and in the third round, a value specifying the first winning opening and a second winning opening are specified alternately according to the order in which the value specifying the first winning opening is set. A value is set. For example, a special winning opening designation value "1" is set as a value for designating the first special winning opening, and a special winning opening designation value "2" is set as a value for specifying the second special winning opening.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, the open time is uniformly set to 29 seconds (corresponding to the open time T1 shown in FIG. 33 (A)).

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability change big hit, 3 seconds is set as the closing time after the opening of the first large winning opening is finished. In this case, when the round is terminated in the special winning opening open process described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), and thus the opening of the first large winning opening of the round is ended. Then, the total closing time until the opening of the second big winning opening of the next round is 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T3 shown in FIG. 33A). Become.

  In addition, one second is set as the closing time after the opening of the second big winning opening is finished. In this case, when the round is ended in the special winning opening open process described later, 1 second is set as the interval period between the rounds (see step S1464), and thus the opening of the second large winning opening of the round is ended. Then, the total closing time until the opening of the first winning opening of the next round starts is 1 second + 1 second = 2 seconds (corresponding to the closing time T4 shown in FIG. 9A). Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, 1 second is set as the closing time in the final round (the 15th round), but the closing time is not set in the final round, and the opening of the winning opening in the final round The big hit game may be ended immediately after the end.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 34, in the final record of the release pattern data of each round, an end code indicating that it is the final data of the release pattern data is set.

The opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the sudden definite variation big hit corresponding to the above-mentioned modification, the big winning opening specified value and opening time and closing time and ending of opening target end every round shown in FIG. 22 (A) The illustration is omitted because the code is substantially the same as the set open pattern data.

  However, a different point from FIG. 22 (A) is that, when it is a probability variation big hit suddenly, a value (for example, “1”) which designates the first big winning opening in the first round as a large winning opening designated value for opening. It is a point which is set, and a value (for example, "2") which designates the 2nd big winning opening is set in the 2nd round. Specifically, after the opening of the first big winning opening in the first round is completed, the total closing time until the opening of the second winning opening in the second round is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 It will be seconds.

  The opening control of the large winning opening in the small hit game corresponding to the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), in the case of a small hit, all open time and closed time in the small hit game Since it and the end code are the same as the set open pattern data, the illustration is omitted. In this modification, in the case of a small hit, the first large winning opening is controlled to be opened in the first opening, and the second large winning opening in the second opening without using the large winning opening designated value. Is controlled to open. As described above, when it suddenly becomes a big hit, it is the closing time from the end of the opening of the first big winning opening of the first round to the start of the opening of the second big winning opening of the second round Since the total is 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds, the appearance opening time and closing time of the case of a sudden big hit and the small hit are the same.

  It should be noted that, corresponding to the above-mentioned modification, in step S2486 shown in FIG. 28, if the big winning opening open flag is not set (that is, during the closing of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening) The CPU 56 reads the open time in the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and sets it in the open / close time timer.

  In step S2487, the CPU 56 controls the second big winning opening to an open state. Specifically, the solenoid 21b is driven to control the second big winning opening to an open state. Further, in step S2488, the CPU 56 sets the big winning opening open flag.

  Furthermore, in step S2489, if the special winning opening open flag is set (that is, if the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is open), the CPU 56 displays the open pattern data pointed to by the pointer. Read out the closing time of and set the open / close time timer.

  In step S2490, CPU 56 controls the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening to the closed state. Specifically, if the opening of the first large winning opening is to be ended, the driving of the solenoid 21a is stopped to control the first large winning opening to an open state. In addition, when the second opening of the second large winning opening is to be ended, the drive of the solenoid 21b is stopped to control the second large winning opening to the open state.

  As described above, according to this modification, as the variable winning means, the first variable winning means (in the present example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a) and the second variable winning means (in the present example) 2) A special variable winning ball device 20b) is provided. Also, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are arranged in a predetermined order (in this example, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b are alternately opened). It is controllable to the specific gaming state (in this example, big hit gaming state, small hitting gaming state) which is changed to the state, and as the specific gaming state, the variable winning means is put in the first state (in this example, open state) The first specific gaming state (in this example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit) to be changed for one period (in this example, 29 seconds) and the variable winning means in the first state is shorter than the first period It can be controlled to a second specific gaming state (in the present example, a big hit gaming state based on a sudden probability variation big hit, a small hitting gaming state) which is changed for 2 periods (1 second in this example). And, when controlling to the second specified gaming state, compared to the case where it is controlled to the first specified gaming state, either one of the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means Control is performed such that the disadvantageous period from changing to the second state to changing the other variable winning means to the first state becomes long. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the closing time from when the first winning opening in the big hit game based on the big hit or probability variation big hit is closed to the opening of the second big winning opening in the next round T3 (in this example, 3 seconds + 1 second = 4 seconds) and closing time T4 (in this example, 1) from the closing of the second winning opening to the start of opening of the first winning opening in the next round The closing time T5 (from the closing of the first big winning opening in the big hit game based on the definite variation big hit) to the opening of the second big winning opening in the second round from any of second +1 second = 2 seconds) In this example, 5 seconds + 1 second = 6 seconds) is longer. Therefore, the disadvantage period is relatively shortened in the first specific gaming state, and the disadvantage period is relatively extended in the second specific gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable winning means, the disadvantageous period is It is possible to control effectively and to improve the interest to the game.

  In this modification, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately controlled to the open state, but according to a predetermined sequence, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening The control may be any control as long as the control is in the open state, and the control may not necessarily be control in the open state alternately. For example, one that controls in the open state in order in the cycle of the first large winning opening → the first large winning opening → the second large winning opening → the first large winning opening → the first large winning opening → the second large winning opening ... It may be any one as long as it controls the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening in the open state in accordance with a predetermined order. Also, even in the case where the special winning opening is opened in such an irregular order, as shown in this modification, the second large winning opening on the downstream side is closed and then the upstream side. The time taken to open the first big winning opening may be shortened.

  Further, according to this modification, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means differ in the ease of winning of the game balls. Specifically, in this modification, the second special variable winning prize ball device 20b is more likely to win a large prize compared to the first special variable winning prize ball device 20a. And, in the case of controlling to the second specific gaming state, it may be configured to change the variable winning means of the game ball which is hard to win the game to the first state for the second period. For example, in the small hitting gaming state of the second specific gaming state, the gaming control microcomputer 560 executes steps S308 to S310 using the opening pattern data for the small hitting shown in FIG. 22 (B). Alternatively, both the opening of the first large winning opening and the opening of the second large winning opening may open the first large winning opening which is difficult to win. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the game ball to win the variable winning means in the second specific game state, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest for the game can be improved.

  With regard to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that the processing (S31 in FIG. 5) of outputting information (data) regarding the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit 64 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been performed. The information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by such S31 may include a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won and the number of winnings.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening (first special variable winning ball device 20a, second special variable winning ball device 20b), and winning opening There are several types of winning openings like. And, the winning of the game ball to these winning openings, the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 23b, and a winning detection switch such as a winning opening switch And a detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 560, based on the detection signal inputted from the winning detection switch, the number (winning number) of gaming balls won in each winning opening during a predetermined period is counted and stored. It is possible, and by performing such processing, it stores the winning combination information which can specify the winning opening and the number of winnings in which the game ball has won during the predetermined period. Then, in the game control microcomputer 560, based on such winning information, a winning information signal capable of specifying the winning opening and the number of winnings in each of the predetermined periods, each time a predetermined period elapses. Is outputted from the information output circuit 64 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of prizes stored in the game control microcomputer 560 and specified by the prize information signal that can identify the prize opening in which the game balls have won and the number of prizes is, for example, every 10 minutes, such as every 10 minutes Information on the number of winnings (output for each predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required for the occurrence of one big hit gaming state each time (output each time a big hit gaming state occurs), each day Information on the number of winnings from the time the power is turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information on the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by the player specifying information such as gaming card information etc. In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening in which the gaming ball has won and the winning number, the winning opening and the winning number (one), which are output each time the gaming ball wins in any of the winning openings It may be a winning information signal that can identify.

  Also, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to conduct an operation test with a testing device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a part of the output terminals of the main substrate 31. The connection component may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 560 to the outside through the connection portion.

  As described above, since a winning information signal capable of specifying the winning opening in which the gaming ball has won and the number of winnings is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning opening in which the gaming ball is winning outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to recognize winning combination information that can identify the number of winnings and the number of winnings.

Second Embodiment
As a second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having a game control such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment as an example of the game control is configured as a pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine) with enclosed circulation type. An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, the card unit, and the system for managing them described in the following second embodiment may be applied to any of the gaming machine and the card unit described in the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine using a gaming machine in which a player plays a game and a gaming value owned by a player specified by a recording medium connected to the gaming machine and accepted. Game system including a game apparatus enabling game play, and a game owned by a player using a game owned value specified by a recording medium connected and accepted by a game machine played by a player A game device that enables a game to be played on a game machine using a game-playing device that enables game play and a game-owned value specified by a recording medium connected and accepted by a game machine played by a player The present invention relates to a game control device that controls a device.

  Conventionally, as authentication information for mutual authentication, the SID of the CU communication control unit is stored in the ROM of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage, and the SID of the main control unit is stored in the CU communication control unit at the time of CU manufacturing It is known that the control unit downloads and stores the SID of the CU communication control unit from the key management server as authentication information (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100763).

  There is also known a gaming machine control board configured to monitor, through another control chip, an unauthorized action on a control chip mounted on one game machine (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-89701). .

  However, among the information transmitted and received at the time of mutual authentication, the storage method of information that is particularly important for security is not described, and it can not be said that security is sufficiently considered.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is a gaming system capable of further improving security by appropriately storing particularly important information in relation to security. A game device and a game control device.

(1) In the present invention, a game machine (enclosed circulation type pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a slot machine without medals (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player, and a record connected to and received by the game machine A gaming system comprising: a gaming device (CU3F, a call lamp device, etc.) that enables playing on the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by a player specified by a medium;
The gaming device is
Includes information transmitting means (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information;
The gaming machine is
Storage means capable of storing a user program (FIG. 86: payout control storage unit 171 cF);
Operation processing means capable of reading out the user program from the storage means and executing the read out user program (FIG. 86: the payout control circuit 171aF reads out and executes the user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF) ,
Communication means for receiving the predetermined information (FIG. 86: communication control circuit 171bF);
The arithmetic processing means stores the predetermined information received by the communication means in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means without notifying the user program (the payout control circuit 171aF notifies the user program of the predetermined information) Store in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF)), gaming system.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

(2) In the above (1),
The arithmetic processing means uses the predetermined information stored in the storage area to determine whether or not it is possible to return from the incommunicable state (the payout control circuit 171aF can not communicate using the “store code”. Whether or not it is possible to recover from the

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to determine whether or not it is possible to recover from the incommunicable state using predetermined information that can prevent the outflow.

(3) In the above (2),
The arithmetic processing means updates or erases the predetermined information stored in the storage area when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the payout control circuit 171aF is configured so that the P-table 2F responds to the card insertion response It updates when transmitting to CU3 F. The payout control circuit 171 a F erases when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2 F is issued.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information stored in the storage area is updated or deleted only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the predetermined information is not updated or deleted without permission. In addition, since processing from storage of predetermined information to erasure is performed only within the arithmetic processing means, it is possible to prevent outflow to the outside.

(4) In any of the above (1) to (3),
The gaming device is
Counting processing means for counting the gaming points as holding points based on the counting request from the gaming machine which grants predetermined gaming points by the occurrence of winnings (FIG. 49: CU3F is state information including information of counting request = ON) When the response is received, it further includes the requested number of balls added to the number of balls).
The gaming machine is
History information storage means for storing counting history information of the counting process executed by the counting process means (FIG. 50: P stand 2F counts from the P stand 2F side from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state) A history of the number of gaming balls paid out to the CU 3 F side as the requested number of balls is stored as a counting history.

  According to the above configuration, since the counting history information is stored on the gaming machine side, by referring to the counting history information on the gaming device side at the time of recovery, it is possible to reflect the past counting history on the gaming device it can. In addition, since the counting balls are lost when the gaming machine is out of order when returning the counting balls from the gaming machine to the gaming machine, the counting history is stored on the gaming machine side for maintenance It is also a measure.

(5) In the above (4),
The communication means transmits the counting history information of the counting process for a predetermined number of times stored in the history information storage means based on the counting history request from the gaming device when returning from the incommunicable state. (The communication control circuit 171bF transmits counting histories for two past times (counting history 1 and counting history 2) to CU3F),
The gaming device is
It further includes history information receiving means (communication control IC 325aF of CU3F) for receiving counting history information of the counting process for the predetermined number of times in the past.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to refer to the counting history retroactively up to a predetermined number of times in the past. Thereby, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved.

(6) In the above (4) or (5),
The predetermined information transmitted by the information transmission means includes store information (store code) and device specifying information (SC board ID) capable of specifying a game control device included in the game device.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to consider the movement of the gaming apparatus to another store, and the change of the combination of the gaming apparatus and the gaming machine in the store. This makes it possible to prevent problems such as taking over count history data between different stores.

(7) In any of the above (4) to (6),
The information transmission means transmits, to the gaming machine, count request reception information (count information ON state information response) indicating reception of the count request and time information (count reception time) at which the count request is received. ,
The history information storage means stores the time information in association with the counting history information corresponding to the counting request (stores the counting reception time in the counting history 1).

  According to the above configuration, since the counting reception time is stored in association with the counting history, it is possible to grasp which counting history corresponds to which counting request.

(8) The present invention is specified by a received recording medium connected to a gaming machine (encapsulated circulation type pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a slot machine without medals (S stand 2SF)) in which a game is played by a player A gaming device (CU3F, call lamp device, etc.) that enables playing on the gaming machine using the gaming value owned by the
Information transmitting means (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information;
The information transmission means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 86: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, and is stored in the storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A gaming apparatus which transmits the predetermined information stored therein to the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

(9) The present invention is specified by a received recording medium connected to a gaming machine (encapsulated circulation type pachinko machine (P stand 2F), a slot machine without medals (S stand 2SF)) in which a player plays a game. A game control apparatus (FIG. 39: CU control section 323F) for controlling a game apparatus (CU3F, a call lamp apparatus, etc.) that enables the player to play a game using the game value owned by the player.
Information transmitting means (FIG. 86: communication control IC 325aF) for transmitting predetermined information;
The information transmission means is not notified to the user program executed by the arithmetic processing means (FIG. 86: payout control circuit 171aF) of the gaming machine, and is stored in the storage area (register in the payout control circuit 171aF) of the arithmetic processing means. A game control apparatus, which transmits the predetermined information stored therein to the game machine.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined information is stored only in the storage area of the arithmetic processing means, and is not notified to the user program and is not stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to improve security because it is possible to prevent the outflow of predetermined information due to access to the storage means.

(10-1) A gaming machine (P unit 2F) including a first control unit (main control unit 161F) and a second control unit (payout control unit 171F) that communicate with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is
A user program area (main control storage unit 161 cF, payout control storage unit 171 cF) capable of storing user programs;
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F and 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the incommunicable state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a recovery process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the recovery process Of the completion of the user program (SF 292 in FIG. 90: recovery communication completion register 618F and recovery request / completion register 718F are written with a flag indicating recovery completion). Restart (SF 293 in FIG. 90: Send a signal for starting the process of the user program, or cancel the process of the user program which has been stopped by the stopping means and restart the process of the user program).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the incommunicable state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information not transmitted due to the incompetence by the execution of the user program. In order to transmit the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced.

(10-2) In the above (10-1),
Both the first control means (main control unit 161F) and the second control means (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control means and the second control means include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing can be appropriately resumed in both the first control means and the second control means. be able to.

(10-3) In the above (10-1) or (10-2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payment control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF),
When the communication control circuit transmits the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information updated according to a predetermined update pattern to confirm arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 93: to the payout control unit 171F) Send a power-on notification command including the serial number (main control serial number = n + 1) sent last time),
When the communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means recovers from the incommunicable state, it retransmits the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time (FIG. 93: power supply for command of power on notification) Send a response of input and reception),
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit receives the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the incommunicable state and the arrival confirmation information received before the inability to communicate. Are not in a predetermined relationship (FIG. 93: main control serial number = n + 1 and payout control serial number = n do not match), based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit in the recovery process. The information update process (FIG. 93: execute recovery process) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the incommunicable state and the arrival confirmation information received before becoming incommunicable do not have a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return processing. Since the process of updating the information based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the burden of communication between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(10-4) In the above (10-1) to (10-3),
The information storage unit includes a non-volatile storage area (for example, transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) and a volatile storage area (for example, registers other than transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87). , And a register other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, the information storage unit has the non-volatile storage area and the volatile storage area, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data required in the recovery process when resuming communication.

(10-5) In the above (10-1) to (10-4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set an effective period in which the predetermined information can be written in the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner is terminated (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting) By the register 719cF, after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is broken, the effective time for which the data of the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written in the data reception register 713F is set. ).

  According to the above configuration, since the communication control circuit can set an effective period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written to the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner is ended, the authentication with the communication partner is broken. It is possible to reliably store information that is needed after that. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been caught and dropped between nails and the like in the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is broken due to a power off or disconnection, etc. By setting a writable effective period in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information on the winning of the floating balls.

(10-6) A game board (play board 26F) including a first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means is
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (the payout control unit 171F) included in the play space (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
An information transmission unit (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the incommunicable state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes recovery processing for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the recovery processing. Under the condition (SF 292 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618 F), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is resumed (SF 293 in FIG. 90: user program) A signal for starting the process of (1) is transmitted, or the process of the user program which has been stopped is canceled by the stopping means to resume the process of the user program.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the incommunicable state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information not transmitted due to the incompetence by the execution of the user program. In order to transmit the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced.

(10-7) A game frame (front frame 5F) including a second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F) There,
The second control means is
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
An information transmission unit (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the incommunicable state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes recovery processing for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the recovery processing. Under the condition (SF 292 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is resumed (SF 293 in FIG. 90: user A signal for starting the processing of the program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program which has been stopped by the stopping means is canceled to resume the processing of the user program.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the incommunicable state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information not transmitted due to the incompetence by the execution of the user program. In order to transmit the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced.

(11-1) A gaming machine (P unit 2F) including a first control unit (main control unit 161F) and a second control unit (payout control unit 171F) that communicate with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is
A user program area (main control storage unit 161 cF, payout control storage unit 171 cF) capable of storing user programs;
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means (encryption communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for encrypting the information stored in the information storage unit;
And enciphered information transmission means (encryption communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting the enciphered information encrypted by the enciphering means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means decrypts the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 171bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF) including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit, and transmits the encryption by the other decryption unit Since the information is decrypted, the process of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the security deterioration can be prevented from leaking the contents of the encrypted information. it can.

(11-2) In the above (11-1),
Both the first control means (main control unit 161F) and the second control means (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control means and the second control means include the user program area and the communication control circuit, both of the first control means and the second control means perform the processing of encrypted communication. In addition to reducing the security, it is possible to prevent security from being leaked due to the content of the encrypted information.

(11-3) In the above (11-1) or (11-2),
The communication control circuit generates an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on (for example, the encryption key and the decryption key are generated according to an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 90) The process of performing encrypted communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 90, encrypted communication can be performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process. Therefore, the process of encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the process can be appropriately resumed in at least one of the first control means and the second control means. .

(11-4) In the above (11-1) to (11-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set an effective period in which the predetermined information can be written in the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner is terminated (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting) By the register 719cF, after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is broken, the effective time for which the data of the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written in the data reception register 713F is set. ).

  According to the above configuration, since the communication control circuit can set an effective period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written to the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner is ended, the authentication with the communication partner is broken. It is possible to reliably store information that is needed after that. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been caught and dropped between nails and the like in the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is broken due to a power off or disconnection, etc. By setting a writable effective period in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information on the winning of the floating balls.

(11-5) A game board (game board 26F) including a first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means is
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (the payout control unit 171F) included in the play space (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means (encryption communication function of communication control circuit 161bF) for encrypting the information stored in the information storage unit;
The second control including the decryption means for decrypting the encryption information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) And encrypted information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) to be transmitted to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the incommunicable state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information not transmitted due to the incompetence by the execution of the user program. In order to transmit the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced.

(11-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) including a second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F) There,
The second control means is
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by execution of the user program;
The communication control circuit
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means (encryption communication function of communication control circuit 171bF) for encrypting the information stored in the information storage unit;
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encryption information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) And means for transmitting encrypted information (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the incommunicable state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information not transmitted due to the incompetence by the execution of the user program. In order to transmit the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced.

(12-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P unit 2F) for giving predetermined gaming points by the occurrence of a prize, and the gaming machine so as to be communicable, and using the valuable value owned by the player A gaming system (CU3F) that enables gaming on a game machine, comprising:
The gaming machine is
Gaming point storage means (FIG. 40: gaming ball number counter) for storing the gaming points;
Counting the gaming points stored in the gaming point storage means to the points based on an operation for counting the gaming points at a predetermined point (for example, pressing the “Count” button shown in FIG. 48) Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming machine (FIG. 51: When there is a payout request for a counting ball at the start of counting, the P unit 2F sends a status information response command including information on count request = ON) to CU3F Send to) and
The gaming device is
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting means for counting the gaming points to the points (FIG. 51: CU3F is requested when it receives a status information response including information of counting request = ON) Add the number of counting balls to the number of balls)),
Recording medium reception means (FIG. 35: card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a player-owned valuable value (FIG. 35);
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F for processing the points counted by the counting means so as to be identifiable by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means Store the number of balls in the card),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F returns a card storing the number of balls held);
Removal-waiting state notifying means (FIG. 51: CU3F is ready for card return preparation when the card can be removed) for notifying the gaming machine that it is waiting for removal of the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means And sends information on P card 2F ON state OFF and card removal waiting ON.

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is in the removal waiting state, so the gaming machine removes the recording medium to the player It is possible to perform notification to prompt the user to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention for preventing theft due to forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P unit 2F) that imparts predetermined gaming points by the occurrence of a prize, and uses the valuable value of the player to play a game on the gaming machine A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Based on the counting request from the gaming machine, counting processing means for counting the gaming points as holding points (FIG. 51: CU3F receives the status information response including the information of counting request = ON, the requested counting ball Add the number to the number of balls.),
Recording medium reception means (FIG. 35: card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a player-owned valuable value (FIG. 35);
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F for processing the points counted by the counting means so as to be identifiable by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means Store the number of balls in the card),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 51: CU3F returns a card storing the number of balls held);
Removal-waiting state notifying means (FIG. 51: CU3F is ready for card return preparation when the card can be removed) for notifying the gaming machine that it is waiting for removal of the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means Information on status OFF and card removal waiting ON is notified to the P base 2F.

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is in the removal waiting state, so the gaming machine removes the recording medium to the player It is possible to perform notification to prompt the user to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention for preventing theft due to forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming apparatus (CU3F) that enables a player to play a game using a valuable value owned by a player, and provides a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize (a gaming machine ( P stand 2F),
Gaming point storage means (FIG. 40: gaming ball number counter) for storing the gaming points;
Counting the gaming points stored in the gaming point storage means to the points based on an operation for counting the gaming points at a predetermined point (for example, pressing the “Count” button shown in FIG. 48) Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming machine (FIG. 51: When there is a payout request for a counting ball at the start of counting, the P unit 2F sends a status information response command including information on count request = ON) to CU3F Send to
In the case where the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are identifiably processed by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, waiting for removal of the recording medium The notification that it is a state can be received from the gaming machine (FIG. 51: When the P card 2F becomes a card extractable state, the notification of information on card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON is given from CU3F Receive).

  According to the above configuration, since the notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in the removal waiting state is received from the gaming apparatus, the notification that the gaming machine urges the player to remove the recording medium It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention for preventing theft due to forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(12-4) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming apparatus includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 35) for notifying that the recording medium is in the removal waiting state.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the gaming apparatus is in the removal waiting state of the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent the recording medium from being left unchecked.

(12-5) In the above (12-1) to (12-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 35) for notifying that it is in a removal waiting state of the recording medium based on a notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify that the game machine is in the removal waiting state of the recording medium, it is possible to prevent the recording medium from being left unchecked.

(12-6) In the above (12-1) or (12-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the device connected to the gaming apparatus or the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on a P platform) that the recording medium is in a removal waiting state. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the removal of the recording medium by notifying other than the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus that the recording medium is in the removal waiting state.

(12-7) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P unit 2F) for giving predetermined gaming points by the occurrence of a prize, and the gaming machine so as to be communicable, and using the valuable value owned by the player A gaming system (CU3F) that enables gaming on a game machine, comprising:
The gaming device is
Recording medium reception means (FIG. 35: card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a player-owned valuable value (FIG. 35);
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, a game place specifying information notifying means (not shown) for notifying the gaming machine of game place specifying information capable of specifying a game place where the game apparatus is installed (FIG. 43) : When the card is received at the card insertion / ejection slot 309F, the CU 3 F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325 F to the P base 2F.
The gaming machine is
A game arcade specification information storage module (FIG. 43: P-table 2F stores the “store code” included in the insertion notification command) for storing the game arcade identification information notified by the game arcade identification information notification module. ,
After recovery from the incommunicable state where the gaming machine and the gaming apparatus can not communicate, when the communication is recovered, the gaming place identification information newly notified by the gaming place identification information notification means, and the gaming place identification When the recovery request including the "store code" is transmitted from the CU3F to the game arcade specification information comparison module (Fig. 52: P unit 2F) to be compared with the game arcade specification information stored in the information storage module, the "store code" It is determined whether or not the "store code" stored as "" matches.
A game prohibition means (the P stand 2F stores the “store code from CU3F,” which prohibits the continuation of the game when the game arcade identification information is judged to be unmatched by the game arcade identification information comparison means. If the "store code" does not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above-described configuration, when the newly notified game arcade identification information and the game arcade identification information stored in the game arcade identification information storage means do not coincide with each other, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent the fraud that moves the store in the stored state.

(12-8) In the above (12-7),
The gaming device is
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, the security board 325F shown in FIG. 38) included in the game device when the recording medium reception means receives the recording medium and the communication is restored. Device identification information notification means for notifying the gaming machine of identification information (SC substrate ID) (FIG. 43: When a card is accepted at the card insertion / ejection slot 309F, CU3F is added “SC substrate ID” by security substrate 325F Further includes sending a card insertion notification command including P to the P base 2F),
The gaming machine is
Device identification information storage means (FIG. 43: P-table 2 F stores “SC substrate ID” included in insertion notification command) storing the device identification information notified by the device identification information notification means;
Device identification information comparison means (P 2F for comparing the device identification information newly notified by the device identification information notification means with the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means when the communication is restored Further includes comparing “SC substrate ID” from CU 3 F with stored “SC substrate ID”.
The game prohibiting means prohibits the continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information does not match (in the case of a mismatch, prohibits the continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly specified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. It is possible to prevent injustice in which the gaming machine is moved in a state.

(12-9) In the above (12-7) or the above (12-8),
The gaming machine is
A game place identification information reading means (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passing path of P stand 2F which reads the above-mentioned game arcade specification information added to game media used for a game, and the sensor concerned is provided in a game ball It further includes certain identification information (such as markings on the surface).
The game place specification information comparison means includes the game place specification information added to the game medium read by the game place specification information read means, and the game place specification information stored in the game place specification information storage means. Compare (it is judged whether or not it matches with the identification information of the game ball of the own store according to the read identification information, and in the case of non-coincidence, bit 0 of “incorrect detection state 3” of status information response is set to “1” ).

  According to the above configuration, if the game arcade identification information added to the game media read by the game arcade identification information reading means does not match the game arcade identification information stored in the game arcade identification information storage means, the game media It is possible to notify that the game ball of the other store is mixed in the.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter, simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of Pachinko Machine>
First, the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as gaming machines, pachinko machines or P units) may be abbreviated as an example of a gaming machine on each gaming island (not shown) disposed in plurality in the gaming arcade (hall). ) 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3F of an example of a gaming apparatus is installed on the predetermined side of the P base 2F in a one-to-one correspondence with the P base 2F. There is. Although a card unit will be described below as an example of a gaming apparatus according to the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and connection to a P platform 2F is carried out to report a big hit or abnormality, collection of gaming information such as the number of winnings, etc. It may be a calling lamp device or the like.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F to drive the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 38) to make the enclosed ball 1 shot. It is configured to be able to play a game by driving into the game area 27F on the front of the game board 26F. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and while the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the player's hand touches the touch sensor, and the hand of the player Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the bat firing force is adjusted in accordance with the amount of pivotal operation of the bat operating handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  The launch strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter also referred to simply as launch strength T) can be adjusted according to the amount of rotational operation of the bat operating handle 25F (hereinafter referred to simply as the amount of handle operation), and the handle operation amount is increased. The launch strength T increases in accordance with. Therefore, the player can adjust the emission intensity T so that the pachinko ball passes through the area that the player aims at by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P platform 2F shown in FIG. 35 is a so-called first type pachinko gaming machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. Further, in the game area 27F, there are provided a plurality of types of winning openings through which pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 35, one large winning opening (variable winning ball device) 271F, three ordinary winning openings 272F, 273F, 274F and three starting winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (eg, open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (eg, closed state) disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F is provided with a variable display portion capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (patterns), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls winning in the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, all eyes), it becomes a big hit state, and the big winning opening 271F is opened.

  In addition, the display result of the variable display device 278F is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of odd variation symbols such as 777) of the combination (all eyes) of the big hit symbol As a result, a probability fluctuation state (probability state) occurs in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  The pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27F are paid to any winning opening or are collected to the out port 154F without being won. The pachinko balls that have won a prize in one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out port 154F are reduced again to the hitting position through the collection path in P platform 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area 27F.

  The P stand 2F engages the display 54F extending from the CU 3F with the connecting surface 54aF provided on the front face of the P stand 2F by installing the CU 3F in the side position. Therefore, the indicator 54F is provided in the downward position of the game area 27F in P stand 2F. The display 54F is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and displays, to the player, various effect images interlocked with the display of the points, the card remaining amount, or the variable display device 278F. In addition, the display 54F is engaged with the P base 2F by connecting a connection terminal (not shown) provided on the back surface to a connection terminal 54bF provided on the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F. As described above, in the configuration in which the display 54F of the CU 3F is fitted to the connection surface 54aF of the P base 2F, the CU 3F and the P base 2F can be connected more strongly, and fraud can be prevented. Further, by making it impossible to release the connection lock with the display 54F without opening the glass door 6F or the lower door provided with the bat operating handle 25F, it is possible to further prevent fraud. In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the display 54F is not limited to the structure integrally formed with the CU 3 F and fitted to the connection surface 54 a F of the P base 2 F, but formed independently of the CU 3 F and on the front surface of the P base 2 F It may be configured to be attached.

  In addition, a game ball number indicator for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper position of the connection surface 54aF of the P-base 2F. The game ball number indicator 29F is configured of a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The number-of-playing balls described later, the error number of the generated error, etc. are displayed by the number-of-playing-balls indicator 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F is not limited to the 7-segment LED display, and may be constituted by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or another display.

  Further, at the left position of the game ball number display 29F in the P-table 2F, a count button 28F for counting from the game ball to the ball is provided. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time when the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that regardless of the pressing duration time, counting from gaming balls to balls may be performed by a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) by pressing once, or when counting button 28F is pressed once. In addition, regardless of the pressing time (whether or not a long press), all of the gaming balls currently owned by the player may be counted. Further, the counting speed is further improved when performing a card return operation, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the count button 28F is provided on the P base 2F side, the operability of the player sitting in front of the P base 2F can be improved as compared with the case where the count button 28F is provided on the CU3F side. . Further, the P-table 2F is provided with a speaker 270F for outputting music data to be reproduced according to the effect displayed on the variable display device 278F at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27F. The positions and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 35, and the positions and the number may be changed as needed.

  The P platform 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into the game board 26F and the other front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, at the time of new game replacement, it is sufficient for the game arcade to replace only the game board 26F.

  As described above, the P platform 2F is configured as an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine that performs gaming control such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and basic gaming control and effect control are the pachinko pachinko machines described above. The same control as the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, control such as probability change control based on hold storage information) is performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU 3 F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35 continuously. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade Accept a membership card which is a game recording medium issued to the player. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The CU3F which has received those cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining amount of cards, the number of balls held, the number of balls stored, etc.) of the player owned by the record information of the card into "data of game balls". . In the P platform 2F, ballistic ball games equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of the game balls are made possible. That is, "data of game balls" is data indicating the number of remaining shootable balls. In the following description, "data of game ball" will be simply referred to as "game ball" as well as balls and balls.

  On the front side of the CU 3 F, a bill insertion slot 302 F for inserting a bill, a card insertion / ejection slot 309 F for inserting a membership card and a visitor card, and the like are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and the information recorded in the card is read.

  Displayed on the front side of CU3F, when a display 312F and a membership card are received, it is specified by a membership card ID (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID) recorded in the membership card and a membership card ID A replay button 319F for implementing replay game using the number of balls is provided.

  The display unit 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as the remaining amount of the card or simply the remaining amount) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. The surface is formed of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated, when the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, a part of the number of balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls, and converted into game balls It becomes possible to play the game by P stand 2F based on that. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer etc., a part of the balls is withdrawn and it becomes a game ball It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the ball and the ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the ball is preferentially withdrawn. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball withdrawal button for withdrawing balls may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to storing balls.

  Here, a "reserved ball" is a ball which has been acquired in the day before and is deposited in a hole, and becomes a game ball by the withdrawal of the stored ball. In addition, the balls are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game arcade.

  The "balls" is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by the ball-out. Further, the number of balls possessed is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card, and the number of balls not yet deposited in the game arcade It is. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  A "playing ball" is a ball that can be launched by a gaming machine. The game ball number data is generated in exchange for debiting prepaid card balances, balls, or balls, as described above.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between "balls" and "balls" is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not being.

  In the present embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but is stored in a server installed in the game arcade such as a hall management computer in association with the member card number, and the corresponding ball is searched based on the member card number It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hole server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, balls are recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the balls may be stored in the hole server 801F in association with the card numbers. When storing the hole server 801F in association with the card number, data which can specify the time stored in the hole server 801F may be written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on the card (member's card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the balls in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server is stored, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable to make it a timing such as causing it to be stored or collectively stored when returning the card.

  In addition, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the ball having been stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a ball in the hole server 801F, and the day the player receives the card return When you insert a card in the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the balls for the day that were once stored as balls are stored again in that CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of balls, and the game is played It may be possible.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302F is taken in by a money discriminator (not shown) to identify its authenticity or bill type.

  On the front side of the CU 3 F, an IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320 F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321 F, and a card return button 322 F are further provided. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a staff member of the game arcade, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs it. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (a conversion operation to a game ball) for deducting the remaining amount recorded in the inserted card and using it for the game by the P-table 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of confirmed game balls at the end of the game in the inserted card (number of balls transferred at the time of card insertion-number of converted balls to game balls + count) It is an operation button for storing and discharging the number of balls held by the operation).

  Next, referring to FIG. 36, with respect to the frame-like outer frame 4F, referring to FIG. 36, the front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5F and the glass door 6F open and close with the left edge as the swing center. It is possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are provided in the vicinity of the end edge (free end side) of the front frame 5F opposite to the swinging center. The engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6aF and 6bF of the outer frame 4F. By pressing the open front frame 5F against the outer frame 4F, the engagement projections 6aF, 6bF ride over the engagement receiving pieces 7aF, 7bF, and in a state of riding over the engagement reception pieces 7aF, 7bF, the engagement projections 6aF, 6bF move downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

  Then, a staff member of the game arcade inserts a key into the key hole 10F shown in FIG. 35 and performs unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), whereby the pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aF against the biasing force of the spring 6bF is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6aF and 6bF with the engagement receiving pieces 7aF and 7bF is released, the lock release state is established, and the front frame 5F is released.

  Furthermore, the front frame 5F is also provided with an engagement projection 8F for the glass door 6F, and an engagement hole 9F is provided in the portion of the glass door 6F facing the engagement projection 8F. The engagement projection 8F is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement projection 8F is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9F by pressing the open glass door 6F against the front frame 5F. By overtaking, the engaging projection 8F is pushed down by the biasing force of the spring, and the engaging projection 8F and the engaging hole 9F are engaged and become in a locked state. In this state, the staff of the game arcade inserts a key into the key hole 10F shown in FIG. 35 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging projection 8F is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. As a result, the engagement between the engagement projection 8F and the engagement hole 9F is released, the lock release state is established, and the glass door 6F is opened.

  A front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4F in the lower portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected that the front frame 5F is open. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12F is provided at a contact portion with the glass door 6F in the upper portion of the front frame 5F, and it is detected by the glass door open detection switch 12F that the glass door 6F is opened.

  The number of times the glass door open detection switch 12F and the front frame open detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counting counter (not shown). The counting counter is equipped with CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. and can be operated by the backup power even when the power supply to P stand 2F is interrupted, and the number of open detections of glass door 6F and front frame 5F even when the power is turned off at night And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power supply is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in P platform 2F.

  A main control board 16F is provided on the back surface of the game board 26F (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6F). Since the back of the outer frame 4F is closed, the main control board 16F can be detached from the game board 26F by opening the front frame 5F and removing the game board 26F from the front frame 5F. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16F from the game board 26F or to replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, it is necessary to open the front frame 5F. The work can always be detected. Therefore, if the main control board 16F is removed illegally from the game board 26F, or if the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F is replaced illegally, it can be detected by the front frame opening detection switch 13F.

  Furthermore, a payout control board 17F is provided on the back of the front frame 5F. The dispensing control board 17F also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5F after the front frame 5F is first opened. Therefore, if the delivery control board 17F is removed illegally from the back surface of the front frame 5F or the semiconductor chip provided on the delivery control board 17F is replaced illegally, it can be detected by the front frame open detection switch 13F.

  Next, the configuration for installing the game board 26F in the front frame 5F will be described. FIG. 37 is a view showing a state before and after the game board 26F is attached to the front frame 5F. As shown in FIG. 37, attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF are provided on the back of the front frame 5F so as to be openable and closable about hinges 35aF and 35bF, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34aF, 34bF are U-shaped and have a bottom corresponding to the game board 26F. By pushing the game board 26F against the front frame 5F in the arrow direction of FIG. 37 (b), the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF, 34bF as shown in FIG. 37 (a). When the game board 26F is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34aF, 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33F provided on the front frame 5F side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F are floating connectors having flexibility against positional displacement.

  Also, when the game board 26F is installed in the front frame 5F, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the concave drawer connector 33F, whereby the main control board 16F on the game board 26F side and the payout control board on the front frame 5F side 17F will be connected. Furthermore, since the game board 26F is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F have flexibility against a certain degree of positional deviation, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer are fixed. These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33F. Even if the game board 26F is installed on the front frame 5F only by the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F without providing the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF, the convex drawer connector 32F and the concave drawer connector 33F Since the flexible connector itself is a floating connector, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26F and the front frame 5F. Here, the convex drawer connector 32F is connected to the main control board 16F via the internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26F, and the concave drawer connector 33F is the payout shown in FIG. 36 via the signal cable 36F. It is connected to the control board 17F.

<Configuration of Card Unit and Pachinko Machine>
FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration of CU 3 F and P base 2 F. With reference to FIG. 38, an outline of control circuits of the CU 3 F and the P base 2 F will be described.

  The CU 3 F is provided with a CU control unit 323 F configured by a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F and includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area of the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 39) that performs security management. The CU control unit 323F is connected to a security substrate (SC substrate) 325F for performing communication with the payout control substrate 17F of the P platform 2F while securing security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security substrate 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a substrate different from the security substrate 325F. A connection (not shown) to the P base 2F side is provided in the CU 3 F, and a connection (not shown) to the CU 3 F side is provided in the P base 2 F. These connection parts are configured by, for example, a connector or the like.

  The security substrate 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control substrate 17F on the P base 2F side are communicably connected via the connector and the connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Furthermore, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring addition request information of the game ball notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P platform 2F. It notifies the server 800F (see FIG. 39). Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as substrate control information.

  In the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and the type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. Further, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives an infrared ray emitted from a remote controller possessed by a game arcade clerk, the CU control unit 323F receives a light reception signal. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input, and the CU control unit 323F writes in the inserted card to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card record information includes the card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the end of the game.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the balls held by the player when the player plays a game. The CU control unit 323F outputs data such as the remaining amount or the number of gaming balls to the display control unit 350F, and the display control unit 350F converts the data into display data. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the display 312F provided on the front of the CU 3F and the display 54F disposed on the front of the P base 2F as shown in FIG. The display data transmitted to the display 54F is first input to the relay board 14F. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display 312F and the display 54F. When the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. In addition, the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3F, and may be a configuration provided in the P base 2F to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P control unit 2F includes a main control board 16F for controlling the progress of the game of the P control 2F, a payout control board 17F for managing and storing gaming balls, and drive control of the firing motor 18F based on the commands of the payout control board 17F. The emission control substrate 31F, the variable display device 278F, and the effect control substrate 15F for controlling the display of the variable display device 278F based on the command transmitted from the main control substrate 16F are provided.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. On the main control board 16F is mounted a microcomputer for game control which is a main control section 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. The gaming machine control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided. The main control unit 161F is connected to a prize sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  When a ball is won in each start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F, the main control section 161F draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further includes a small hit) / out, and stores the random number. This is called pending storage. The maximum value of the number of pending storages is, for example, “4”. When the variable display device 278F is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one pending storage and performs a jackpot determination based on the pending storage and derives a display result from the variable start Determine the variable display time from one to multiple types. Also, when a big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not to cause a probability change. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the big hit determination (including whether or not to make a positive change) and information on the variable display time as a command to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F.

  Specify the variable start command that indicates the start of variable display, the display result command (big hit / miss) that indicates the result of variable display, and the variable display pattern in the commands related to variable display that are transmitted from main control unit 161F to effect control unit 151F A possible variable display time command, a variable stop command indicating a timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the command transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the effect control unit 151F includes a command capable of specifying the progress of the big hit during the big hit, a command indicating the generation of a new hold storage, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There is a command to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies the variable display result and the variable display time based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern (presence or absence of reach, type of reach) In addition, it decides the production pattern of the notice production about the big hit and the reach. The effect control unit 151F performs display control of the variable display device 278F in accordance with the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F of CU3F. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display and the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display interlocking with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. It is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the P-table 2F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the side of the P base 2F is directly connected to the relay board 14F on the side of the P base 2F without the intervention of the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame 5F. The payout control board 17F is mounted with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs for operating the CPU, control data, and the like, and a RAM (functions as a work area of the CPU). An Random Access Memory (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, etc. are provided.

  A launch ball detection switch 903F, an out-ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 33AF, a count button 28F, and a radio wave sensor 173F are electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting fraudulent acts that transmit radio waves illegally and mainly keep the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF constantly on. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F through an input port (not shown) of the payout control substrate 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the firing of the game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is constantly turned on by an unauthorized radio wave, the number of game balls is not reduced even if the ball is fired. The radio wave sensor 173F detects fraud due to such radio waves.

  From the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbol determinations, big hit information, manufacturer specific Big hit information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. It is information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of winning balls (number of payout balls when the game ball enters the winning opening), P When the power supply of the stand 2F is turned on, it is transmitted to the payout control board 17F. The round information is information on the number of rounds at the time of a big hit, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the P base 2F is powered on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to perform operation control on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of pachinko balls that have won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. The payout control board 17F that receives this detection signal performs control to add the number of balls to be awarded to one of the winning balls to the number of gaming balls and the number of additional balls.

  The start-up winning opening winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball is won in any of the starting-up winning openings. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination frequency is information of a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning on each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each maker and maker unique jackpot information indicating a jackpot unique to a maker. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as, for example, 15 round jackpots, and includes probability change information when a definite change occurs in association with the large hit, and in conjunction with the large hit When a short time state (a control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the short time information is included. The maker-specific jackpot is, for example, a jackpot state adopted only by a certain gaming machine maker, such as a sudden change.

  A health check command and a prize ball count acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The winning ball number reception command is a command indicating that the number of additional balls has been received.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which the out-of-ball detection signal is input, subtracts and updates the number of playing balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F) as described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33AF, as described later, the number of added balls and the number of gaming balls are added and updated, and the number of playing balls is subtracted and updated. A launch ball detection signal is input from the launch ball detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which the shot ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of playing balls.

  The security substrate 325F of CU3F and the payout control substrate 17F of the P base 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security substrate 325F to the payout control substrate 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are sent from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F as described later.

  In the front frame 5F, in addition to the payout control substrate 17F, a launch control substrate 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number indicator 29F are provided. Although the game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, the front plate 5F may be attached to the front plate 5F as provided on the front side of a normal pachinko gaming machine from which balls are dispensed. It may be provided in a rotatable manner. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control section 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of gaming balls currently owned by the player on the number-of-games indicator 29F.

  A launch control signal and a launch permission signal are output from the payout control board 17F to the launch control board 31F. The launch control board 31F having received the signal outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18F of the launcher. As a result, the pachinko balls are shot to the game area 27F. The launch control board 31F emits a launch motor excitation output and drives the launch motor 18F when an input signal of a touch ring for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19F detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18F. For example, the emission intensity sensor 19F detects, as the emission intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electric resistance value according to the steering wheel operation amount into a digital value. In the following, as an example, the firing intensity T will be described as changing from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of handle operation. The detection result of the emission intensity sensor 19F is output to the payout control substrates 17F and CU3F via the emission control substrate 31F.

  A display 54F and a relay board 14F extended from the CU 3F are provided on the front surface of the P platform 2F. The display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F through the relay board 14F. Furthermore, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  Based on the display control signal from the effect control substrate 15F or the display control unit 350F, the relay substrate 14F outputs the display control signal from one of the effect control substrate 15F and the display control unit 350F to the display unit 54F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54F extended from the CU3F provided on the front surface of the P base 2F can be controlled by the CU3F side, but instead, the display 54F on the P base 2F side can be used instead The display control board may be provided on the P-table 2F side so that the display 54F is provided on the P-table 2F side and the display control can be performed on the P-table 2F side. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54F based on the command of the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for deleting gaming machine information and game information stored in the RAM of the P unit 2F, and is operated initially by the store clerk operating the switch after the P unit is in an error state. It is possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by the store clerk, for example, after the card is discharged.

<Circulation route of pachinko balls>
Here, referring to FIGS. 35 and 38, the circulation path of the pachinko ball in P platform 2F is outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball supplied to the launch position is bounced by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17F (see FIG. 38) provided with the payout control portion 171F, and the payout control portion 171F subtracts “1” from the number of gaming balls based on the detection. Do.

  Out of the balls driven into the game area 27F, the out ball entering the out port 154F (see FIG. 35) flows down the out ball flow down path and is detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided on the way . The foul ball flows down through the far ball return path, and is detected by a far ball detection switch 33AF provided on the way.

  All winning balls that have won in the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected at the back of the gaming machine and guided to the recovery ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and far balls are also guided to the recovery ball passage path. A launch ball detection switch 903F is provided on the recovery ball passage path. For this reason, all of the winning balls, out balls and far balls are detected by the launch ball detection switch 903F. In other words, the launch ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the hit pachinko balls. When the number of detections of this switch and the number of bullets of the pachinko ball shot by the shooting motor 18F become equal, it can be determined that all the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the launch ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated, and when the number of differences is not 0, the balls thrown into the game area 27F have been collected. It is judged that it is not. By performing this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27F is rolling or there is no floating ball which is not caught and dropped between the nails of the game area or the like.

<Notification processing of abnormality that occurred in card unit and pachinko gaming machine>
FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 39, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security substrate 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control substrate 16F, notification is performed in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another one that is illegally manufactured, or malfunction or failure due to noise or the like may occur. It also includes an off-line state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 39 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. Also, the key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs on the security substrate 325F of CU3F, the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control unit 323F and the security substrate 325F described above. The mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key, in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security substrate 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b at the stage of manufacturing the security chip 325b of the security substrate 325F. In addition, after CU3F is carried into the game arcade, when connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. Ru.

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hole server 801F to that effect, and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of CU3F. The CU control unit 323F causes the display control unit 350F to perform control to display the occurrence of an abnormality on the display unit 312F, and turns on or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) to perform abnormality notification. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. The security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F by a parallel signal via the PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16F performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and sends a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hole server 801F to that effect.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the CU control section 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control section 171F via the PIF circuit 326F to that effect, and when the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control section 171F, Is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and notification destinations of occurrence of abnormality by the security board 325F are different. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed at all, and no countermeasure against the abnormality is taken. Moreover, although the security board 325F has a communication control function, it does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, it is always notified that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality from the security board 325F via the PIF circuit 326F notifies the main control board 16F to that effect. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for reporting an abnormality as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the security board 325F detects that an abnormality occurs, and the CU control unit 323F is notified that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. It notifies the hole server 801 F that an abnormality has occurred. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has an abnormality, and upon receiving the notification, the control for notifying the abnormality occurrence is performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, the payout control board 17F detects it and notifies the main control board 16F of it, while when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16F, the same It detects and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As in the case of the security board 325F described above, when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred, the payout control board 17F also performs control for notifying an abnormality even when notifying the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. In order not to do so, the control unit or control board on the opposite side to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred is notified. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected with abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator, and have a function to perform abnormality notification control even if an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected with the abnormality notification means such as the abnormality notification lamp or the abnormality notification indicator, and even when abnormality is detected, the abnormality notification control is performed by itself. Although the function has not been described, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F may be provided with a function of notifying an abnormality to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission mode between the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side>
Next, FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing the main ones of various data stored in each of the CU 3 F side and the P base 2 F side and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 40, main ones of various data stored in each of the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P (pachinko gaming machine) 2F side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the variation of the number of gaming balls is calculated on the side of P platform 2F to store and manage the current number of latest gaming balls. The CU3F side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is based on the information transmitted from the P-base 2F side. On the other hand, the CU3F side manages and stores balls with balls (number of balls with cards), the number of balls, and the remaining amount of cards (remaining amount).

  FIG. 40 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P base 2F side. First, the payout control board on the side of the P unit 2F when the power is turned on with the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F installed for the first time in the game arcade and electrically connected. 17F receives the main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16F and transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control board 17F itself (payout Send the control chip ID) to the CU3F side.

  On the CU 3 F side, the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the time when the CU3F side and the P base 2F side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P base 2F side, and the transmitted connection time on the P base 2F side Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU 3 F side are stored on the CU 3 F side and the P base 2 F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the P-table 2F to the CU3F.

  On the CU 3 F side, the transmitted data and the data already stored are collated to determine whether or not the same P-unit 2 F as in the previous time is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data at which communication between the CU3F side and the P base 2F side is started every time the power is raised is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P base 2F side, and the new connection is made Time data will be stored on the P-table 2F side.

  Both CU and P add a "serial number" to the telegram and transmit. Also, both the CU and the P store the "serial number" received from the other party. There are three types of "serial number": "normal serial number", "addition serial number" and "count serial number". "Normal serial number" indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” by the CU 3 F side (primary station side). However, at the time of retransmission, "normal serial number" is not counted up. The P base 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. In addition, when the continuity of a serial number is not materialized, it becomes a non-response. The “addition serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P platform 2F requests the CU 3 F to count the gaming balls.

  Only the CU3F has the right to update the serial number. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is sent back, the CU 3 F backs up the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When making an addition request, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, an addition serial number obtained by adding 1 to the addition serial number used for communication. When the P unit 2F accepts the request, it returns the same added serial number. When the request is rejected, the added serial number received last time (the added serial number -1 received this time) is returned. Only the P unit 2F has the added update right of the counting serial number. When making a counting request, the P-unit 2F transmits, to the CU 3 F, a counting serial number obtained by adding 1 to the counting serial number used for communication. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting serial number. When rejecting the request, the received serial number (count serial number -1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding the “normal sequence number”, a configuration will be described in which the sequence number received by the CU 3 F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of P base 2F and CU3F counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received by P base 2F at the time of transmission, and the other is the received serial number May be transmitted as it is.

  Also, “addition serial number” and “count serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the processing of the addition request and the processing of the counting request, respectively. Below, when this "addition serial number" and "count serial number" are counted up, the structure which also counts up "normal serial number" is demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the "normal serial number" may not be counted up when the "addition serial number" and the "count serial number" are counted up. In addition, below, "normal serial number" is only called "serial number." Also, the "addition serial number" and the "count serial number" are collectively referred to as "request serial number".

  The latest game table information (game table information being counted) is transmitted from the P-table 2F side to the CU3F side. The latest gaming machine information is stored in the latest gaming machine information storage area of the RAM of the payout control section 171F (see FIG. 38) on the side of the P-table 2F. Specifically, the information on the addition ball number counter, the information on the subtraction ball number counter, and the information on the counting ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game stand information, and is transmitted from the P-table 2F side to the CU3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest gaming machine information.

  The information of these counters is collectively sent to the CU as a response. The addition ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of addition balls. The additional balls are the sum of "the number of prize balls × the number of prizes" and "the number of back balls". The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number of addition balls to be added to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is "the number of fired balls". That is, it is the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. The “number of balls to be subtracted” is not included in the “number of balls to be subtracted”. The counting ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from gaming balls to balls by counting operation”. Here, the "prize ball" is a ball that is paid out by the ball winning to the winning opening, and is a safe ball. "Balling ball" is a ball shot by a gaming machine, and if there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. A "back ball" is a ball from which a firing ball comes back without jumping onto the board. The “out-out passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out-port 154F, and the total number of out-out balls and safe balls means the number of out-out passing balls.

  For example, when a pachinko ball hit into the game area 27F is won and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, an adding ball to be added to the gaming ball based on the winning information The addition ball number counter counts the number, and the value (additional ball number) of the addition ball number counter is transmitted from the P-table 2F side to the CU 3 F side. Also, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of firing balls as the number of subtraction balls, based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko balls being shot into the game area 27F. The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P-table 2F side to the CU 3 F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (number of counting balls) from the P-table 2F to the CU3F.

  Each time the values of the addition ball number counter, subtraction ball number counter, and counting ball number counter are transmitted to the CU3F side on the P-table 2F side, those count values are stored in the previous game table information storage area (RAM of payout control section 171F After storing (rewriting) as backup data, etc., the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, and the counted ball number counter as latest game table information are cleared to 0 (except for the game ball number counter). In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the memory area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), the data of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of counting balls, which are game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. It is stored as data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the previous value of each counter that was not transmitted when the latest game table information was not transmitted from the P unit 2F side to the CU3F side. Is also intended to enable transmission. The number of game balls transmitted immediately before may be added to the previous game table information and stored.

  Further, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter according to the occurrence of winnings, the firing of balls, the occurrence of back balls, and the occurrence of counting balls (conversion from gaming balls to balls). The value of the updated game ball number counter is transmitted to the CU 3 F as the game ball number.

  On the CU3F side, in the total data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of balls held by the card (simply referred to as the number of balls held), the number of balls, the balance, the total number of balls added (total balls added), total subtraction The number of balls (total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of balls possessed by the card is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of paid out balls (the number of balls converted from the number of card held balls to the number of game balls) from the number of balls held at card insertion. That is, the number of balls possessed by the card is the number of balls possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter sent from the side of P platform 2F to update the number of balls. Further, based on the value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) sent from the P-table 2F side, the total subtraction ball number is subtracted to update the number of balls. Furthermore, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from P platform 2F, the card holding ball number is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 F can manage the latest information by updating the total additional balls number, the total subtractive ball number, and the card possession number by the latest gaming machine information transmitted one by one from the P platform 2 F. It becomes possible.

  As illustrated, the CU 3 F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives the count value of the game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P platform 2 F side. The CU 3 F updates the area for storing the game balls in the following procedure. That is, CU3F is stored based on the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls), the value of the subtraction ball number counter (number of subtraction balls), and the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P base side The number of playing balls is updated, and it is determined whether the count value of the number-of-playing ball counter transmitted from the P-unit side at the same timing matches the number of updated playing balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control is made to shift to an error state.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the error notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, the hall management An error notification may be made by a computer or a hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification is provided to urge an artificial response by the clerk.

  In addition, instead of shifting to the error state and stopping the game, the number of gaming balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P-base 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of gaming balls managed on the CU 3 F side and the number of gaming balls stored on the P base 2 F side.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls is consistent with the number of game balls managed and stored on the P base 2F side. Can be performed (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the P-table 2F does not match the number of gaming balls stored on the CU 3F side due to injustice or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU3F side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and the memory on the P-table 2F side are stored by the hall server 801F or the hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of playing balls may be received, and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 40, CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of balls possessed by the card and the number of balls stored, a storage area for storing the remaining amount of the card of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (number of added balls Storage area for storing the total number of subtraction balls (total number of subtraction balls) and balls at the time of card insertion. CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) is a memory for storing the balls in response to an input requesting use of the balls (for example, a pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on CU3F (when there is no ball)) Subtract a predetermined number of storage balls from the area.

  CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) is an input requesting use of balls (for example, pressing input of replay button 319F provided on CU 3 F when there is a ball (when ball is present)) A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area storing balls in accordance with. Furthermore, CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 38) subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the remaining card amount in accordance with an input requesting use of the remaining card amount (for example, pressing input of ball lending button 321F).

  When the player performs an operation to use for the game by debiting the value from the game-owned value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls held) owned by the player, the number of balls for the withdrawal is the number of game balls The number of added balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P-table 2F side. In response to that, on the P platform 2F side, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to receive a so-called wagon service order or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, it is limited to receive wagon service with game balls, and can only receive wagon service with balls. This is an image that prohibits, in a conventional enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine in which each counter has been installed, manually grasping the ball remaining in the plate before counting and using it for the wagon service.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, the player is urged to perform the counting operation if the number of balls is less than the number of balls corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service. It is done. At that time, when the player executes a counting operation, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P-table 2F side to the CU3F side. On the CU 3 F side, in response to that, the number of game balls is subtracted, and the number of card balls is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 F and the P base 2 F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A telegram used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (telegram) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, divisional transmission of telegrams is not performed. Also, when sending messages continuously, leave an interval of 1 millisecond or more.

  Transmission data of one frame includes a data length, a normal serial number, an adding serial number, a counting serial number, a command, and a data portion. The “data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). "Command" is a command code of a message. The "data part" is data of a telegram.

<Commands and responses sent and received between CU and P>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko gaming machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 41 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the names of transmission information and their outlines.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from P platform 2F. In response to the recovery request, P base 2F transmits a response named recovery response to CU3F. The response of this recovery response is to notify the CU 3 F of recovery information.

  The command of recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P 2 F after the CU 3 F completes the authentication. The command of the recovery request requests recovery information from the CU 3 F to the P unit 2 F, and the CU 3 F first transmits the same command after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission serial number", and "previous final transmission count serial number". The "serial number" is a sequence number (1 to 255). The "command" is a command code of the recovery request, and is indicated by binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  The "previous final transmission serial number" is a serial number of the command of the status information request transmitted last to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. When the “last transmission serial number last time” is “0”, it indicates that there is no stored serial number. The “last transmission serial number last time” is a serial number stored as the last transmission serial number (serial number) on the P base 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received in the CU3F when transmitting status information response in the P platform 2F. It is.

  The “previous final transmission counting serial number” is a counting serial number of the response of the status information request transmitted last to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection time. The "previous final transmission counting serial number" indicates that there is no stored serial number in the case of "0". Note that “previous final transmission count serial number” is a serial number stored as the last transmission count serial number for P base 2F and CU3F on the count serial number when receiving status information response in CU3F when transmitting status information response in P platform 2F .

  "Store code" and "SC substrate ID" notified from the security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later in the recovery process (number of counting balls) of P table 2F, and "store code" held by P table 2F And the coincidence judgment with "SC board | substrate ID" is performed, and when it corresponds, the following processes are performed. In the case of non-coincidence, the count request ball number = 0 is set in the subtraction register to notify the user program.

  P unit 2F refers to the “previous final transmission counting sequence number” notified from CU3F, and sets the counting request ball number = 0 in the subtraction register when CU3F has not performed counting processing for the counting request. Notify the user program executed on P platform 2F. If CU3F has already performed counting processing, the number of counting request balls notified to CU3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by P unit 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. If the "store code" notified from the security board 325F does not match the "store code" stored in the P base 2F, the store program mismatch is notified to the user program via the register. When the P-unit 2F receives a recovery request command from the CU 3F, the P-unit 2F notifies the user program via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is to respond to the CU 3 F the recovery information held by the P-unit 2 F. The recovery information includes "serial number", "command", "last transmitted serial number", "last inserted card ID", "previous card insertion time", "last transmitted addition serial number", "ball unit price", "gaming information" It includes storage status, "previous game platform information" and "previous game information". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “previous final transmission sequence number” is the data of the sequence number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 F at the previous connection, and is “0” when there is no sequence number held. The "previous insertion card ID" is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and in the case of "0", there is no card being inserted. The payout control unit 171F of the P-base 2F stores and holds the card ID being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3F.

  The "previous card insertion time" is data of the insertion time of the card which was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is "0", there is no card being inserted. This data also has year information as two digits YY, month information as two digits MM, day information as two digits DD, time information as two digits hh, minute information as two digits mm, and second information as two digits ss. It is. The “previous final transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the state information response transmitted last to the CU 3 F at the previous connection time, and when “0”, the addition serial number is not present. The “ball unit price” is a ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per ball playing in the P platform 2F. The "game information storage presence / absence" is "0x00" when game information is not stored, and "0x01" when game information is stored.

  The “previous game platform information” is the game platform information notified to the CU 3 F last time, and includes information on “number of gaming balls”, “game ball information”, “number of requested counting balls” and “counting serial number”. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 F last time. The “playing ball information” is the playing ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls notified to the CU 3 F last time, the number of out-port passing balls, the total number of balls, and the like. The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. The “counting serial number” is the counting serial number notified to the CU 3 F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information notified to the CU 3 F last time, and includes information on “number of game information”, “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 F last time. In addition, it is a variable length by n = 0-22. “Game information 1” is game information 1 notified to CU 3 F last time. “Game information n” is game information n notified to CU 3 F last time. The game information n includes, for example, the type information and the game award ball information notified to the CU 3 F last time.

  Note that “previous final transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the previous final transmission addition serial number on both the CU 3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is received in the P base 2F when transmitting the status information request in CU3F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of P platform 2F, the "store code" and "SC substrate ID" notified from security board 325F in the counting history sequence described later, and the "store code" held in P platform 2F A match determination with “SC substrate ID” is performed, and if “store code” does not match, recovery data is processed as nothing. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, store “presence or absence of storing gaming information”: Yes: Set “previous number of gaming balls” to “previous number of gaming balls”, “preceding ball number of counting balls” last time The recovery data held by the P-unit 2F is set to the “count serial number”, the previous “number of game information”, and the previous “game information 1 to n”. When there is no recovery data of gaming information, or when the last transmission serial number is 0 last time, store "presence of game information storage" to no storage "0x00", last "game ball information", last "count request ball number", last time The "counting serial number" and the previous "number of game information" are set to ALL "0". However, the game ball number sets the game ball number notified last time. If all the store codes held by P unit 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  If it is determined that the "store code" notified from the security board 325F does not match the store code held by the P base 2F, it is processed as no card. That is, ALL “0” is set for “previous insertion card ID” and “previous card insertion time”.

  P unit 2F stores the serial number at the time of response to the status information request as the last transmission serial number last time. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security board 325F do not match the information held in the P unit, the last transmission serial number is notified as "0" last time. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security board 325F are compared with the information held in the P unit, in the case of coincidence, the stored last transmission serial number is notified.

  When transmitting the status information response, the P-unit 2F stores the counting serial number as the previous last transmission counting serial number. If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the SC 325bF do not match the information stored in the P unit, the last transmission count serial number of the previous time is notified as "0". If the "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" notified from the security substrate 325F are compared with the information held in the P unit, in the case of a match, the stored last transmitted transmission serial number is notified.

  In addition, if the processing of the “previous final transmission serial number” notified by the P platform 2F has not been performed, the CU 3 F performs recovery processing using the previous game table information. When the processing of “last transmission serial number last time” is performed, the CU 3 F performs recovery processing using only the previous game table information. However, recovery of the number of balls is not performed.

  In addition, when the recovery process can not be performed due to a mismatch in communication partner (for example, replacement of CU3F or P platform 2F, etc.), it is conceivable to perform manual correction by POS based on the display information of P platform 2F. For example, it is conceivable to display the display information of P platform 2F using the liquid crystal display screen of variable display device 278F. Alternatively, it is also conceivable to further provide a display controlled by the payout control unit 171F with respect to the P-table 2F, and to display information for hand correction on the display. In addition, POS is a prize management system, and performs prize exchange and management of prizes. In addition, POS is not limited to those performing prize exchange and management of prizes, and records sales information of goods every time they sell goods in a store, and uses the total result as inventory management and marketing material at general point of sale It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the P-unit 2F of addition recovery information. In response to the recovery request 2, the P-unit 2 F transmits a response named recovery response 2 to the CU 3 F. The response of the recovery response 2 is to notify the processing result of the addition recovery information to the CU 3 F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P base 2F, and includes data of "serial number", "command", "previous final transmission addition serial number" and "additional ball number" There is. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when it is determined that the additional ball recovery processing needs to be performed in P platform 2F and CU 3 F is present. CU3F compares the “previous final transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery response received from P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition serial number” stored by itself, and in the case of a match, the additional ball recovery It is determined that there is no need for processing, and in the case of incoincidence, it is determined that there is a need for additional ball recovery processing. When it is determined that the additional ball recovery processing is necessary, the recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “previous final transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the state information request last transmitted to the P base 2F at the previous connection, and the “additional ball number” is the game ball It is data of the number of addition balls.

  Next, the recovery process of the P-unit 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of P platform 2F, when P platform 2F has not performed the process of “last transmission serial number notified by CU3F based on recovery request 2”, it refers to the number of additional balls and is used as a game ball It is a process of performing addition to this.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is to notify the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3 F by the P 2 F, and includes “serial number”, “command” and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is “0x00” for the recovery result process OK, and “0x01” for the recovery result process NG. When the P-table 2F can not receive the number of added balls, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When performing recovery processing (number of added balls) of P stand 2F, if P stand 2F has not performed the process of “previous final transmission addition serial number” notified from CU 3 F, it is processed as “recovery result” in CU 3 F , And the number of addition balls notified from the CU 3 F is set in the addition register to notify the user program. If the number of added balls = 0 notified from the CU3F, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified of the processing OK response to the CU3F. However, when the CU status of the status information request, which will be described later, is the gaming ball addition request (Bit = 1) and the gaming machine status 1 responds with the gaming ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the status information response, the CU3F “Recovery”. As a result, the process NG is returned, the number of added balls = 0 is set in the addition register, and the user program is notified.

  If the "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from CU3F is the same as the "previous final transmission addition serial number" held by the chip of P base 2F, set the number of additional balls = 0 in the addition register, It notifies the user program, and sends a processing NG as a "recovery result" to CU3F. If "previous final transmission addition serial number" notified from CU3F = 0, regardless of the addition ball number notified from CU3F, the addition ball number = 0 is set in the addition register, the user program is notified, and the CU3F is notified Reply processing OK.

  Also, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, the timing when the recovery completion flag is set), the "last transmission addition sequence number notified last time" notified from CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “last transmission addition sequence number of the last time” held by the P base 2F chip is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery processing is completed.

<< 5. Communication start request, 6. Communication start response >>
A command of communication start request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the communication start request is to request the P unit 2F to start communication. In response to the communication start request, a response to the communication start response is sent from P unit 2F to CU 3F. The response to this communication start response is to respond to the CU 3 F as to the start of communication.

  The command of the communication start request is to notify the P unit 2F that communication has normally started. The P-unit 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The command of communication start request includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. Note that CU3F sets the counting sequence number to "0" (initial value) after the communication start request, and sets the counting sequence number to "0" (initial value) after the P base 2F also receives the communication start request.

  The response to the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 F that communication has normally started, and the CU 3 F clears the recovery information. The response to the communication start response includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

<< 7. Communication termination request, 8. Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the communication end request is for requesting the P unit 2 F to end the communication. In response to the communication end request, a response of the communication end response is transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is to return the communication end to the CU 3 F.

  The command of communication end request is to notify the P unit 2 F that communication has normally ended, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 F that the communication has normally ended, and the CU 3 F and the P-unit 2 F stop the communication after this notification and wait for the restart. The response of the communication end response includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A command of status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the status information request is for requesting the status of CU3F to P platform 2F. The CU 3 F uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2 F. Further, the command of the state information request includes the number of added balls from the side of the CU 3 F to the side of the P base 2 F shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes "serial number", "command", "CU status", "number of additional balls", "addition serial number", "count serial number", "ball unit price" and "count reception time" Contains the data of. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The "CU state" indicates the state of CU3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is "1", and that the card is not inserted when "0". That is, Bit 0 represents a state in which a card (general card / membership card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, the general card is inserted by depositing on a stock card (general 0 yen 0 ball card) stocked in advance in the card stock unit of CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0,” the card unit is being closed. That is, the bit 1 notifies the P-unit 2F of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3F. The timing at which the card unit opening is notified is, for example, when the opening is completed. The timing at which the card unit is closed is notified, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P platform 2F notifies the CU3F of all held gaming balls as the number of counting balls in a state information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is shown, and when “0”, the card preparation except for card return preparation is shown. The CU 3 F notifies the “Payment for card return preparation” to the P unit 2 F for a predetermined time (10 seconds) by setting this bit at each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, if the status information request that the bit in preparation for card return is ON is received, whether the P stand 2F has operated the counting button once or operated multiple times? All the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3 F by the state information response as the count ball number regardless of the operation duration time regardless of the operation duration time.

  When Bit 3 is "1", the game ball addition request is shown, and when it is "0", no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit 3 requests addition (number of added balls) of the game balls at the time of operation of ball lending, ball bearing payout, and storage ball dispensing.

  When Bit 4 is "1", count ball reception completion, "0" shows count ball non-reception respectively. Bit 4 notifies P stand 2F that the receipt has been completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm the delivery of the response "number of balls" of the status information response. When P ball 2F receives count ball reception completion, it checks whether the counting serial number is the same as P cell 2F, and notifies the CU 3 F without subtracting the number of game balls if the serial numbers do not match.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, “0” indicates completion of card removal, while waiting for card removal. The Bit 5 notifies the P unit 2 F that it is waiting for card removal from the CU 3 F. Note that Bit6 to Bit7 are unused.

  The “number of additional balls” is the number of additional balls of the game ball, and the data of the number of additional balls is valid only when Bit 3 of the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is a sequence number for addition (0 to 255), and when the game ball addition request is made, the sequence number is updated (+1) and notified. The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the counting serial number received at the time of counting request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting serial number can not be established, the counting will not be received.

  The “ball unit price” is a ball unit price (0.01 yen to 99.99 yen) per ball of a game ball to be played in P platform 2F. The ball unit price notified from CU3F to P platform 2F is stored, for example, in the RAM of payout control substrate 17F of P platform 2F. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the P-table 2F notifies the ball unit price stored in the RAM to the CU 3F by the state information response. Specifically, when recovery information for recovering from the incommunicable state is requested from the CU3F to the P base 2F (a recovery request command is transmitted from the CU3F), the P base 2F generates a response to the recovery response. Set the unit price and send it to CU3F. That is, the ball unit price is not output to the outside except notifying CU3F at the time of recovery response. The ball unit price stored in the P platform 2F is set in the response of the recovery response when the recovery request command is sent from the CU 3 F, and sent to the CU 3 F. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the ball unit price of the game ball played on the P platform 2F before recovery, and to resume and play the game with an appropriate game value to the player after recovery. In addition, by not outputting the ball unit price stored in P unit 2F to the outside except notifying CU3F at the time of recovery response, security is ensured so that the ball unit price is not changed illegally. Furthermore, the ball unit price stored in the P platform 2F prohibits the new ball unit price from being overwritten when the P platform 2F holds the number of game balls. Even when P stand 2F holds the number of game balls, it allows overwriting of the ball unit price stored in P stand 2F, converts the number of held game balls into the overwritten ball unit price, and displays it May be updated.

  The “count reception time” is information for notifying the P base 2 F of the time when the CU 3 F receives the count request from the P base 2 F, and the Bit 4 in the CU state (play count of ball count reception response) is “1” It is effective only when it is completed. It should be noted that the information of “counted reception time” is notified to P platform 2F, but is processed only within the CPU of payout control section 171F and is not notified to the user program and is stored in an externally accessible RAM etc. Absent. Therefore, the information on the “counted reception time” is deleted in the CPU of the payout control unit 171F, so security can be ensured.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from P base 2F to CU 3F. The response of the status information response is to notify the CU 3 F of the information and status of the P base 2 F. The response of the state information response includes the latest gaming machine information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information response includes "serial number", "command", "number of game balls", "number of fired balls", "number of balls passed outro", "total ball number", "count request ball" Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “firing strength”, “play game state”, “corruption detection information” and “gaming information” are included. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculation of addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” is calculated by using the “total prize ball number”, the “number of fired balls” and the “number of counting balls” described later by the CU 3 F and the number of game balls held by the CU 3 F. After that, the CU 3 F checks whether the calculated number of gaming balls of the CU 3 F matches the number of gaming balls of the P 2 F.

  The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (when there are a plurality of fired balls at the time of transmission, they are added up). However, if there is a back ball number, the back ball number is subtracted. That is, the "number of fired balls" (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 F does not subtract the number of game balls. In addition, CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  The “out-out passage passing ball count” is the number of balls that have passed through the out-out port 154F (when there are a plurality of passing balls at the time of transmission, they are summed up).

  The “total prize ball number” is the sum of the prize ball numbers of the prize ball information 1-n. The winning ball information 1-n is, for example, the number of winning balls for each winning opening type such as a starting opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening). The “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition required ball number” transmitted from the CU 3 F. In addition, CU3F adds the data of the total award ball number to the number of game balls held. When the data of the total award ball number is received without holding the card, the CU 3 F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “number of counting balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of gaming balls held by the CU 3 F and added to the number of balls possessed by the card. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtracting balls transmitted from P platform 2F to CU 3F. In addition, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 F does not subtract the number of game balls. In addition, CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening status changes from opening to closing, the gaming balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is in the opening state, the game ball is counted by the operation of the counting button 28F and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening status changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F, and set as the number of counting balls.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number at the time of counting request.

The “launch intensity” is information on the launch intensity of the game ball.
The “play game status” indicates the status of the P platform 2F when a command of status information request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P platform 2 F, and “play game status 1”, “play game status 2”, and “play game status 2” The game state 3 "and the" game error state "information is included.

  Bit 0 of "play game state 1" indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When "0", the game is permitted, and when "1", the game is prohibited. Bit 1 indicates whether the fan (player) is playing (balls are firing) or not, and when it is 0 ′ ′, it is in standby (when the fans are not firing balls), when it is “1”. The game is in progress (the fan is firing a ball) However, there is a game ball, and the game is in progress with the firing handle (ball hitting operation handle 25F) touched (the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence or absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When "0", there are no game balls, and when "1", there are no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are determined while the firing of the balls is stopped. That is, it indicates whether all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it excludes the firing stop of the ball by the firing stop switch (also called a single shot switch). When the game is "0", the game is not completed (all balls are undecided), and when "1", the game is completed (all balls are fixed). In addition, if it is not possible to confirm completion of the game for 15 seconds or more after stopping the firing of the ball, the P-table 2F times out, and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are determined while the firing of the balls is stopped. When "0", the game ball is not determined (all balls are in the undetermined state), and when "1", the game balls are determined (the state in which all the balls are determined). Here, after stopping the firing of the ball, if it is not possible to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball, for example, for 15 seconds or more, the P platform 2F times out and decides the game ball. Further, when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared, the P platform 2F is set in a state where the whereabouts of the game ball is fixed (game ball fixed).

  Bit 4 indicates the presence / absence of the counting request of the game ball (the pressing of the counting button). When "0", there is no request, and when "1", there is a demand for payout of the counting ball at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P-unit transmits a status information response of the counting request ON to the CU 3 F, and confirms whether the counting request is received. When it is "1", it is a counting request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, and when it is “0”, addition is OK, and when it is “1”, it is addition NG. When the P base 2 F responds with an addition NG, it notifies without updating the addition serial number. Bit 6 indicates the pressed state of the firing stop switch, and is "0" when the release state is released, and "1" when the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is a spare.

  Bit 0 of "game console state 2" represents a big hit 1 of the big hit information (all big hits) and sets "1" in all the big hits. Bit 1 represents the big hit 2 (big hit + small hit) of the big hit information, and sets “1” in all the big hit middle and small hit. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (the big hit of the delivery size), and sets “1” to the big hit of the large delivery balls. Bit 3 represents the big hit 4 of the big hit information (the big hit of the small dropout ball), and sets “1” to the big hit of the small small dropout ball. Bit 4 represents the big hit 5 of the big hit information (big hit in the out ball), and the out ball sets "1" in the middle big hit. Bit5 to Bit7 are spares.

  Bit 0 of "play game state 3" represents a big hit of the game state information + time drop, and "1" is set for the big hit and time drop. Bit 1 indicates that the game state information is in the process of being changed, and "1" is set in the case of being changed. Bit 2 indicates the time of the game state information, and "1" is set during the time. Bit 3 indicates that the gaming state information is fluctuating, and "1" is set during fluctuating. Bit4 to Bit7 are spares.

  The “play game error state” indicates an error code being generated in the P platform 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that no error occurs when Bit0 to Bit5 are all "0". Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents "payout control" when it is "0" and main control when it is "1". Bit 7 indicates an error output method, and when it is “0”, only an alert is given, and when it is “1”, an alert to the hole server 801 F is output.

  The "corruption detection information" is information detected by the P-unit 2F when the command of the status information request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P-unit 2F, "incorrectness detection state 1", "incorrectness detection state 2" , And “information of fraud detection information 1” to “cheating detection information 4” and “addition serial number”.

  The "corruption detection state 1" is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of the "incorrectness detection state 1" indicates that it is improper detection information of radio wave sensor detection when "1". Bit 1 indicates that the magnetic sensor is not detected as positive detection information when it is "1". Bit 2 indicates that it is fraud detection information of fraudulent prize detection when "1". Bit3 to Bit7 are spares.

  The “corruption detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of the "incorrect detection state 2" indicates that it is the open detection information of the glass plate when "1". Bit 1 indicates that it is fraud detection information for opening the frame when "1". Bit 2 indicates that it is fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when "1". Bit 3 indicates that it is fraudulent detection information of proximity sensor abnormality when "1". Bit 4 indicates that it is the fraud detection information of the prize ball god detection when "1". Here, "Goto" is an injustice in which a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine acquires balls in an illegal manner. Bit 5 indicates that it is the fraud detection information of compound goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 indicates that it is fraud detection information of fraudulent addition detection when "1". Bit 7 indicates that it is fraud detection information of nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  The “corruption detection information 1” is data indicating information on the prize ball sensor god detection (the number of winning combination misalignment balls). The "corruption detection information 1" is valid when Bit 4 of the "corruption detection state 2" is "1". The “corruption detection information 2” is data indicating information on combined sensor god detection (firing / out mismatched ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when a mismatch between the number of fired balls and the number of out balls (the number of out-port passing balls) is detected. The “corruption detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “corruption detection state 2” is “1”. The "corruption detection information 3" is data indicating information on fraudulent addition detection (the number of fraudulent addition balls). The "corruption detection information 3" is valid when Bit 6 of the "corruption detection state 2" is "1". The "corruption detection information 4" is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “corruption detection information 4” is valid when Bit 7 of the “corruption detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of "incorrectness detection information 4" is information indicating whether nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 4 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 4 when it is "1". Bit 6 is information indicating whether nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 3 when it is "1". Bit 5 is information indicating whether the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 2 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 2 when it is "1". Bit 4 is information indicating whether the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 1 is occurring, and represents "normal" when it is "0" and abnormality 1 when it is "1". Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of times the main body frame has been opened. When the number is "0", no opening is made, and "1" to "15" are the number of times the opening is made. The number of times of release is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  "Addition serial number" is a sequence number for addition, and notifies the serial number received upon addition request as it is. However, when the continuity of the addition serial number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “corruption detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of the "corruption detection state 3" indicates that it is the fraud detection information of other shop game ball detection when "1". Bit 5 of the "corruption detection state 3" indicates that the card unit to which the P-unit 2F was connected in the past was a development CU 3 DF when "1" (CU connection for development). Bit 6 of "corruption detection state 3" indicates that the card unit to which P unit 2F was connected in the past was "game board development jig 3 EF" when "1" (game board development jig connection) . Bit 7 of "incorrectness detection state 3" indicates that the gaming machine connected when "1" is the gaming machine simulator 2AF (gaming machine simulator connection). Bit 1 to Bit 4 are spares. It should be noted that in the other store game ball detection, for example, a sensor is provided on a collection ball passage path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, and It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of non-coincidence, the game ball of another store is mixed with the game ball, and bit 0 of the "corruption detection state 3" is set to "1", and the CU3F is notified.

  "Game information" is information of P base 2F when a command of status information request is transmitted from CU3F to P base 2F, "Number of game information", "Type information 1" to "Type information n" And “count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “The number of game information” is the number (n) of type information and count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. In the type information, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are data type information and indicate the data type of game information. When "0", no information, when "1", start opening, when "2", big winning opening, In the case of "3", the winning opening, in the case of "4" the number of symbol stops, in the case of "5" a big hit, in the case of "6" it is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information and indicate the data number for each data type of game information, and "0" indicates no information, and "1" to "15" indicate the respective data numbers. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of "5", the data number is "1" when it is "1", "2" when "2" is small, "3" when "24", "4" to "6" It is spare time. When the data type is a small hit of "6", the data number is a small hit when "1", and it is a spare when "2" to "15".

  “Count information 1” to “count information n” respectively indicate game count information 1 to game count information n.

  Here, when the data type is a starting opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are information on the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls for winning each time for game information type information A number is shown, and when "1" to "15", data of the number of balls is displayed. Further, Bit0 to Bit3 are information on the number of winnings, and the number of winnings (total) is shown for each type information of the gaming machine information, and when "1" to "15", data on the number of winnings are respectively shown. In the count information, when the data type is symbol stop frequency, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to "0", and Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop frequency, and when "1" to "15", the symbol stop frequency Represents In the count information, if the data type is a big hit or a small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to "0", Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and "1" to "15" indicates the number of hits. Is represented.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes the “emission intensity signal”, the “passing area signal”, the “during variation signal”, and the “handle touch signal”.

  The “emission intensity signal” indicates the emission intensity T which is the detection result of the above-described emission intensity sensor 19F. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that changes from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering wheel operation. If the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between P unit 2F and CU3F is shorter than the firing interval for pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), the firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball become. Alternatively, the emission intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it was actually emitted.

  The “passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the passband signal is any of the passband signals A1 to A8. The emission intensity T at the time when each passage area signal is detected is linked to each passage area signal.

  The "during change signal" indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F is changed as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the bat operating handle 25F.

<< 11. 12. Card insertion notice, Card insertion response >>
A command for card insertion notification is sent from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the card insertion notification is to notify the P base 2F of the card insertion. In response to the card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3F. The response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received to the CU 3 F.

  When the card is inserted, the card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P platform 2F, “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC substrate ID” are included. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted in the CU 3 F, and is used in association with a game ball held by the P base 2 F. "Card insertion time" is the time when the IC card is inserted into the CU3F's card insertion / ejection slot 309F (see FIG. 35), year information is 2 digits YY, month information is 2 digits MM, day information is 2 digits DD, time information is represented by 2 digits hh, minute information is represented by 2 digits mm, and second information is represented by 2 digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by P stand 2F is a ball on the day or a past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 F is installed, and is used to be associated with the game ball held by the P unit 2 F. It is also used to determine whether CU3F has been moved to a store. CU3F stores the store code in which it is installed. The store code is added to the information from the security board 325F and notified to the P unit. The “SC substrate ID” is an SC substrate ID for identifying the CU 3 F, and is used to determine whether the CU 3 F has been replaced. The SC substrate ID is added to the information from the security substrate 325F and notified to the P base 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P-base 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time. The "store code" and the "SC substrate ID" are deleted in the payout control circuit without notifying the user program side.

  The response to the card insertion response is to notify the CU 3 F that the card insertion notification has been received normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P base 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, whether a membership card or a general card is inserted into the CU3F card insertion / ejection slot 309F, or payment is made to a general 0 yen ball card, a card insertion notice is sent to the P platform 2F as a card insertion notification. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P-base 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when the card insertion notification command is received and the state information request including the information of the state of CU3F being the card insertion state (bit 0 of CU state = 1) is received (judged as the card insertion state by P unit 2F) In the case, the P-base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as card ID and card insertion time. Further, when the card return button 322F of the CU3F is pressed, a card return notification is given to the P-table 2F, and the P-table 2F clears information such as the card ID and card insertion time that has been backed up. The condition for canceling the card insertion state is when the P-table 2F receives a card return notification command.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
The command of the card return notification is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command for the card return notification is to notify the P platform 2F of the card return. In response to the card return notification, a response of the card return response is sent from P platform 2F to CU3F. The response of the card return response is to return the card return to the CU 3 F.

  The command of the card return notification is to notify the card return to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3 F transmits the notification when the "card return" button is pressed. The card return notice includes data of "serial number" and "command". Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The response of the card return response is to transmit a response of the card return notification to the CU 3 F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. Since "serial number", "command", "card ID" and "card insertion time" are the same as those described above, the description will not be repeated. In the case of a card return response, CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card, or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. Perform processing such as prohibiting writing on the card with balls.

  Here, the operation of P platform 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of the card insertion notification, when the member card insertion, the general card insertion, or the deposit to the general 0 yen ball card is performed in the CU 3 F, the P-base 2 F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. At the time of the card return notification, when the user presses the “card return” button in the CU 3 F, the P-unit 2 F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the communication test request is to notify the test data to the P-unit 2F. In response to the communication test request, a response of a communication test response is sent from P unit 2F to CU3F. The response of this card return response is to return test data to CU3F.

  The command of the communication test request is to notify the test data to the P-unit 2F. The test data to be notified to the P-unit 2F is not encrypted. The command of the communication test request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. The “test data” is data for test to be notified to the P platform 2F and is any data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 F of test data. The test data to be notified to the CU3F is not encrypted either. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the CU 3 F and is arbitrary data.

<< 17. Counting history request, 18. Counting history response >>
A command of counting history request is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. The command of the counting history request is for requesting the counting history from P platform 2F. In response to the counting history request, a response of the counting history response is transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this count history response is to notify the count history to the CU 3 F.

  The command of the counting history request is for requesting the counting history with respect to the P unit 2F, and the CU 3 F transmits to the P unit 2 F in the counting history sequence after the authentication sequence. The counting history request includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “store code”, and “SC substrate ID”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 F is installed, and is used to be associated with the game ball held by the P unit 2 F. The store code is added to the information from the security board 325F and notified to the P unit. The “SC substrate ID” is an SC substrate ID for identifying the CU 3 F, and is used to determine whether the CU 3 F has been replaced. The SC substrate ID is added to the information from the security substrate 325F and notified to the P base 2F.

  The detection process of the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID will be described. The SC substrate ID includes an identification code and a shipping maker code. The P unit recognizes the connected unit (commercial CU3F, development unit, etc.) by detecting the shipping maker code included in the SC substrate ID.

  Specifically, the case of detecting whether or not the unit P to be connected is a connection device other than a commercial CU 3 F (specifically, a development unit or a game board development jig) will be described. If the game history when these development units and game board development jigs not used for commercial use are connected is taken over by the unit (CU3F) used for commercial use connected after that, the game ball granted at the time of development Can cause games to be played at the time of commercial use. Therefore, in order to avoid the problem, the P-unit 2F detects whether or not a development unit or game board development jig is connected when connected to the unit, and stores the result in the recovery register.

  When the P unit 2F is connected to the unit, the shipment maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request and the counting history request are performed to detect whether or not the development unit or gaming board development jig is connected when connected to the unit. The shipping maker code of the later SC substrate ID is compared. First, if the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "none", regardless of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, the development unit and the game board development jig are detected do not do. Even when the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request matches the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, it is not detected as a development unit or a game board development jig.

  However, if the upper byte matches and the lower byte differs between the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request and the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request, the development unit is detected. Also, if the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is the code of the commercial unit, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request is a code other than the game board development jig Also detect the development unit. The upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is the commercial unit code, and the upper byte of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID after the counting history request is the game board development jig code, the game board Detect as development jig.

  The P unit 2F stores the detection that the development unit is connected by setting Bit 4 of the recovery register to "1", and the detection that the game board development jig is connected is a recovery register. Is stored by setting "Bit 5" to "1".

  Also, if the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "none", the shipping maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is a unit newly connected after recovery processing is performed. Overwrite the shipment maker code of SC substrate ID. If the shipping maker code of the SC board ID before the counting history request is "presence", the shipping maker code of the SC board ID stored in the P base 2F is subjected to the recovery process if there is no gaming ball to be recovered. After that, the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID of the unit newly connected is overwritten. However, the shipping maker code of the SC board ID stored in P platform 2F is the shipping maker code of the SC board ID of the unit newly connected after recovery processing is performed if there is a gaming ball to be subjected to recovery processing. Do not overwrite. The prohibition state of the overwrite of the shipping maker code of the SC board ID is canceled by clearing the RAM of the P-base 2F (in particular, clearing the number of game balls). By prohibiting the overwrite of the shipping maker code of the SC substrate ID when there is the number of gaming balls, the number of gaming balls given by the development unit is recovered as the number of gaming balls that can be played by the commercial unit connected thereafter Can be prevented.

  The response of the counting history response is to notify the counting history to the CU3F, and the P table 2F receives the counting history request command and transmits the information of the counting history stored in the P table 2F to the CU3F . The counting history response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “counting history result”, “counting history 1” and “counting history 2”. Since "serial number" and "command" are the same as described above, the description will not be repeated.

  The “counting history result” is information indicating whether or not counting history is stored in the P table 2F by the counting history process in the P table 2F. Here, the counting history is a history of the number of gaming balls paid out from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F as the counting request ball count from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. “Card ID” of “Counter Receipt Response” (counting response ON) from CU3F, and the cumulative number of counting balls paid out until the counting request OFF state. It also contains information on numbers. In addition, in the P platform 2F, the history for the past two times (the history of the number of gaming balls in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state is regarded as one) is held.

  In the counting history result, “0x00” indicates no history, “0x01” indicates a history (counting history 1 information is present), and “0x02” indicates a history (counting history 2 information is present).

  “Counting history 1” is the latest history (final counting) of the past two times, and information of “card ID”, “counting reception time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “number of gaming balls” Contains. The “card ID” is identification information of the card inserted in the CU 3 F at the time of counting request. The “count reception time” is the time when the CU 3 F has received the number of game balls requested to be counted from the P platform 2F. The "cumulative counting ball number" is the total number of counting balls counted in the period from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls held in the P platform 2F at the end of the counting.

  “Counting history 2” is the old history (counting before the last counting) of the past two times, “card ID”, “count receiving time”, “cumulative counting ball number”, and “game ball” Contains the information of the number. The information of "card ID", "count reception time", "cumulative count ball number" and "game ball number" is the same type of information as the information included in "count history 1", and the detailed description will not be repeated. .

  Next, conditions for outputting the count history data held by P table 2F to CU 3 F will be described. When the P store 2F matches the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” held by the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” included in the count history request command received from the CU 3 F in the count history sequence, The response of the counting history response includes “counting history result”, “counting history 1” and “counting history 2” and outputs to CU 3 F. In addition, if the “store code” included in the count history request command received from CU3F matches “store code” stored in P stand 2F, the count history response even if the “SC substrate ID” is different. "Counting history result", "Counting history 1" and "Counting history 2" are included in the response to the output to CU3F. This considers changing the combination of P stand 2F and CU3F in a store, and it is unfavorable even if it takes over the count history data memorized in P stand 2F to another CU3F if it is in the same store Not to give

  However, if the P store 2F is different from the "store code" stored in the "store code" included in the count history request command received from the CU 3F, the count history is also obtained even if the "SC substrate ID" matches. The response of the response includes "Counting history result", "Counting history 1" and "Counting history 2" and prohibits outputting to CU3F. This is a disadvantage to another store if it is transferred to another store even if it is the same CU3F, even if it connects to the P base 2F holding the same "SC substrate ID" and inherits the counting history data It is because there is a possibility of giving

  Of course, if P unit 2F is connected to the game board development jig or development unit instead of CU3F, or if it is not connected to any unit, output counting history data stored in P unit 2F. There is no. By limiting the output of the count history data, the security of the gaming system including the P platform 2F and the P platform 2F is enhanced.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of a command and a response between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 F (primary station) to the P base 2 F (secondary station), and the P base 2 F responds to the command and sends a response back to the CU 3 F. That is, the transmission of the operation message is a command / response method in which the CU3F is a primary station and the P base 2F is a secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command from CU3F to P platform 2F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, or 0.2 seconds. In addition, the period from the transmission of the response from P unit 2F to CU 3F to the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both the command and the response are transmitted between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P-table 2F, since 100 pachinko balls are hit in the game area 27F in one minute by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received during one shot of the ball.

  Therefore, from P platform 2F to CU 3F, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of gaming balls are transmitted one after another at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the balls. As a result, the P platform 2F can finely notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this, for example, the transmission interval is the interval of firing time of P platform 2F. It is also conceivable to match it with

<< CU communication line disconnection detection >>
Next, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU 3 F side will be described. If a response can not be received within 200 ms after the CU 3 F transmits a command to the P-unit 2 F, the same command is transmitted to the P-unit 2 F again. Furthermore, if a response can not be received within 200 ms after that, a second retransmission of transmitting the same command to the P-unit 2F is performed. The same command is resent to P unit 2F up to 14 times. If a response can not be received from the P-unit 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds, and determines that the “communication is disconnected”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 F and the connector of the P base 2 F are separated, the disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power failure of the P base 2 F. The CU 3 F does not count up the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< P line side communication line disconnection detection >>
A process when communication disconnection is detected on the side of the P-unit 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P platform 2 F, and in response to the command, the P platform 2 F returns a response to the CU 3 F. Thereafter, when the command from the CU 3 F is not transmitted to the P platform 2 F for 3 seconds, the P platform 2 F determines that the communication is disconnected, and stops the driving of the firing motor 18 F to stop the game. The cause of the communication interruption may be disconnection of the connector of CU3F and the connector of P base 2F, disconnection of connection wiring, or power interruption of CU3F.

  It should be noted that the command to detect communication disconnection on P unit 2F side, response to recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command / response.

<< Power on >>
Next, the process of the connection sequence when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 42 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU 3 F and the P base 2 F has ended normally. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU 3 F is turned off in the standby state in which the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where one day of business is finished in the game arcade, the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, turn on the power. When the power is turned on, in the P-unit 2F, the firing motor 18F is stopped to stop the game and then communication is started. Thereafter, the authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3F. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission serial number and the previous last transmission counting serial number to the P-unit 2 F, and requests recovery information to the P-unit 2 F. The P-unit 2F executes count recovery processing with reference to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU 3F. Specifically, P unit 2F refers to the last transmission counting serial number in the previous time and assumes that there is no counting request when CU3F has not performed counting processing, and counting when CU3F has already performed counting processing The game balls are determined by subtracting the number of counting balls from the number of previous game balls.

  After execution of the count recovery process, the P-unit 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up in the P-unit 2F (specifically, the payout control substrate 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes the last transmission serial number of the last time, the card ID in the last insertion, the last card insertion time, the last transmission addition serial number of the last time, the last game table information, and the like.

  In CU3F that has received the recovery response, when the processing of the last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information has not been executed, CU3F addition recovery processing is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery processing, the CU 3 F transmits the recovery request 2 to the P base 2 F with respect to the P base 2 F, and transmits recovery data to the P base 2 F. The recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of added balls.

  The P unit 2F that has received it executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and sends the result as a response back to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). When the P-table 2F can not receive the number of added balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the integrity of each other's data between the CU3F and the P unit 2F, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also when a problem occurs and is recovered, To be executed.

  The CU 3 F counts up the serial number each time it transmits a command such as a recovery request. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P-unit 2F receives a command with the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 F re-sends the command. The CU 3 F transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when the response of the same serial number is notified from the P-unit 2 F. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P-unit 2F notifies the received serial number to the CU 3 F as it is. The P unit 2 F backs up the serial number when transmitting the response.

  After the end of the authentication sequence, the CU 3 F sets the serial number to “1” and transmits a recovery request command to the P-base 2F. The P-base 2F returns the received serial number "1" as it is to the CU 3F as a response of the recovery response. Furthermore, the CU 3 F sets the serial number to “2” and transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P base 2 F. The P-unit 2F sends back the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 F as it is with the received serial number "2".

  After that, the CU 3 F counts up the serial number and transmits a communication start request command to the P-base 2 F as “3”. When the CU 3 F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is decremented by one (−1) and “2”. In P stand 2F, it receives that and clears recovery data. Then, the P-unit 2F sends back a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 F while keeping the received serial number "3". After this, transmission and reception of the command of the state information request and the response of the state information response are performed between the CU 3 F and the P base 2 F.

  The CU 3 F counts up the serial number and transmits a status information request command to the P-base 2 F as “4”. The command of the status information request includes information on the ball unit price. By the ball unit price being transmitted to the P platform 2F, the P platform 2F can recognize whether the game ball is playing a game with 1 ball 4 yen or playing a game with 1 ball 1 yen . In addition, since the command of the status information request is transmitted at a cycle of 200 ms as described above, it is possible to transmit information of the ball unit price up to three times to the P platform 2F during the cycle of 600 ms that the game ball is firing is there. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the ball unit price for each one of the game balls played in P platform 2F. If it becomes possible to manage the ball unit price for each small number of game balls (for example, 1 ball unit), the player's request (for example, a desire to play the game slowly with a small amount, the number of remaining game balls in a short time) It is possible to provide a variety of games in accordance with the desire to consume The command of the state information request transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P platform 2 F described below also includes ball unit price information, but when the ball unit price information is not directly related to the content of the described sequence, no particular description is made.

  In response to that, the P-table 2F updates the gaming machine information, the gaming information, and the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the updated data for each transmission of the response of the state information response. Then, the P-base 2F sends back a response of the status information response to the CU 3 F while keeping the received serial number "4". Note that the response of the state information response does not include information on the ball unit price. This is to prevent illegally changing the information of the ball unit price currently being played in the P stand 2F and transmitting it to the CU 3 F, and the ball unit price of the game ball managed by the CU 3 F . Thereby, the security of the gaming system can be improved.

  In response to this, the CU 3 F updates the last transmission sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data each time a response of the status information response is received.

  After that, the CU3F counts up the serial number and transmits the command of the status information request to the P base 2F as "5", and the P base 2F CU3F the response of the state information response while keeping the received serial number "5" Reply to

<< Insert Card >>
The processing of the CU 3 F and P platform 2 F when the card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 F shown in FIG. 43 transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the card return preparation status = OFF to the P-base 2 F before card insertion. In response to that, the P platform 2F sends back to CU3F a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the gaming prohibition.

  After that, in the CU 3 F, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID etc.) recorded in the taken card. A card insertion process such as receiving the read information is performed. Note that the information (card ID and the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored as CU3F.

  The CU 3 F is in a state of inquiring card information for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the process of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate or not, whether it is a member card registered in the game arcade, or asking questions to the ball server, such as balls, balls, remaining amount of card, etc. This means that the process of displaying the information on the display 312F and displaying the information on the display 54F on the side of the P table 2F is being performed.

  Since CU3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that it is inquiring about the card inserted in the display 312F, state information request including serial number = n + 1, card return preparation state = OFF The command of is transmitted to P stand 2F. In response to that, in the P platform 2F, a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 1 and gaming prohibition is sent back to CU3F. The display control unit 350F of the CU 3F performs display control on the display 54F on the side of the P-table 2F, and displays that the card inquiry is in progress.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU3F stores the card ID of the card and the card insertion time in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and serial number = n + 2, card ID, card insertion time, store code And the card insertion notification command including the SC substrate ID to the P-base 2F. The store code and the SC substrate ID are information added to the command of the card insertion notification when the command passes the security substrate 325F. In P stand 2F, in response, it backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, shop code and SC board ID data to the RAM of payout control section 171F, etc., and response of card insertion response including serial number = n + 2 Reply to CU3F. Also in the CU 3 F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323 F.

  In response to this, CU3F sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 3 and card return preparation status = ON to P platform 2F, thereby notifying P platform 2 F of the status that the card is being inserted. . P stand 2F receives notification of the state in which the card is being inserted, permits the game, and transmits the response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to CU3F so that the state in which the game is permitted is CU3F Notify against

  While the card is inserted, CU3F transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 4 and card return preparation status = ON to P-base 2F, and P-base 2F responds to status information response including serial number = n + 4, gaming permission Reply to CU3F.

  Furthermore, the case where the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P platform 2 F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command for card insertion notification including the serial number = n + x, card ID, card insertion time, shop code, and SC board ID to the P base 2 F. When a card insertion notification command is sent during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID of the card being inserted and the card insertion time, and are stored in P platform 2F There is a high possibility that fraud has been made to intentionally change the card ID or card insertion time.

  Therefore, in the P-table 2F, the data of the card ID, the card insertion time, the shop code, and the SC board ID received in response to it are not backed up in the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. The determination as to whether or not the card is being inserted in P platform 2F can be easily determined based on the information of card return preparation state = ON included in the command of the state information request.

  Next, the P-table 2F sends back a response of a card insertion response including serial number = n + x to the CU 3 F without backing up the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Also in the CU 3 F, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command are not stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323 F. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as tampering with the card ID stored in the P platform 2F by intentionally transmitting the card ID to the P platform 2F during card insertion, thereby improving security. Can.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an insertion process performed by the CU 3 F when a card is inserted into the CU 3 F. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 44, CU3F executes each step of SF1 to SF7. In addition, P stand 2F executes SF8 to SF10 and SF12 to SF15. More specifically, the effect control board 15F provided on the P base 2F executes the deletion process of SF8 to SF10, SF12, SF13, and SF15, and the transmission process of SF14 and SF15 is provided by the effect control unit 151F. The effect control board 15F thus transmitted transmits to the payout control unit 171F, and the payout control unit 171F transmits to the CU 3F.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 1 whether or not interruption is in progress. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined based on whether or not the interruption operation is performed and the sequence of the game interruption is executed. If it is suspended, it is judged by SF2 whether or not the C-ID and type of the inserted card match the C-ID and type of the interrupted card, and if they do not match it is judged by SF5. Eject the inserted card and shift to standby mode. In FIG. 44, the illustration of the “type” is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card and the type match the C-ID and the type of the interrupted card, the player who has performed the interrupted operation returns to the gaming machine again to start the game. In order to be determined, the control proceeds to SF4, the interruption state is released, and the process of restarting the game is executed by SF6.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the interruption is not being performed by SF1, it is judged by SF3a whether or not the card is already inserted. Whether or not this insertion is in progress is determined based on whether or not the card reader provided in the card insertion / ejection slot 309F receives a card. If it is determined by the SF 3 a that the card is not being inserted, the process of storing the C-ID and the type of the inserted card and transmitting it to the P-table 2 F is performed by SF 3. In P stand 2F, the C-ID and the type are received, and the received C-ID and the type and the backup area (for example, backup data storage unit provided in effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 38) are stored. The C-ID and the type are compared (SF8). Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison results in accordance with SF9, and if not, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started playing, and this insertion processing subroutine program is ended. .

  If it is determined that the card is being inserted by the SF 3a, the SF 3 is used to prevent the C-ID and the type different from the C-ID and the type of the card being inserted from being overwritten and stored in the CU 3F or P platform 2F. Skip processing in.

  Thus, the player identification information storage unit (current player gaming history data storage unit) storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination unit (SF8, SF9) for performing the same determination process are the gaming machines. Display control means (effect control board 15F provided with effect control unit 151F), the communication means side (payment control unit 171F side) is not provided with the same determination processing function, and the display control is sufficient. A common communication means can be used between the gaming machine having the means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  As control contents of the modification, processing of SF15 and SF7 may be performed. After sending the game history data, the C-ID and the type stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) to the CU 3 F by the SF 15, the game history data is deleted. The CU 3 F receives it and transmits the received data to the hall server (upper server) 801. The hall server 801 F backs up and stores the received game history data, C-ID, and type.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that they match according to SF9, the process proceeds to SF12, and the game history data of the backup area (backup data storage) is stored in the current area (for example, backup data storage unit provided on effect control board 15F shown in FIG. 38). Then, the addition and update of the game history data is newly started from the game history data.

  In addition, you may process SF10, SF13, and SF14 as control content of a modification. If YES in SF9, the control proceeds to SF10, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the last card was discharged, and a predetermined time has elapsed according to SF10 which has not elapsed. If it is determined that the game history data, the C-ID, and the type of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, the SF 13 is performed. Also, after SF12, a notification that the players are the same is sent to the CU by SF14. As the control content of the modified example, the processing of SF10, SF13, SF14 and the processing of SF15, SF7 may all be performed.

  The conditions for overwriting (updating) the card ID and the insertion time will be described in more detail. As described above, the card ID and the insertion time are prohibited from being updated while the card is inserted. The relationship between the card insertion notification command and the CU state included in the state information request command will be described as a condition to prohibit the state with reference to the drawings. FIG. 45 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the relationship between a card insertion notification command, a CU state included in a state information request command, and a card insertion state.

  First, FIG. 45A shows an example in which the CU state included in the command of the status information request becomes the card insertion status (Bit 0 = “1”) before the P base 2 F receives the command of the card insertion notification. ing. State (1) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a card insertion waiting state, and the P card 2F does not receive a card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F When the card is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a card insertion preparation state, and although the P card 2F has not received a card insertion notification command, it is included in the status information request command transmitted from CU3F. This is the case where the selected CU state is card insertion (Bit 0 = “1”). Also in this case, since the CU 3 F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. The state (3) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is the card inserting state, and the P card 2F receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU3F is the card In the case of being inserted (Bit0 = “1”). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time on the assumption that the CU 3 F is inserting the card in the P-table 2F.

  Next, the state (4) shown in FIG. 45 (a) is the card return preparation state, and although the P card 2F has not received the card return notification command, it is included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F. This is the case where the selected CU state is not inserting a card (Bit 0 = "0"). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time on the assumption that the CU 3 F has not yet returned the card and the card is being inserted, because the P-table 2F is in the process of inserting the card. The state (5) shown in FIG. 45A is the card return state, and the P platform 2F receives the card return notification command, and the CU state included in the command of the state information request transmitted from the CU 3F is card insertion If not (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows an example in which the CU state included in the command of the state information request becomes the card inserting state (Bit0 = "1") after the P base 2F receives the card insertion notification command. State (1) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card insertion waiting state, and the P card 2F has not received a card insertion notification command, and the CU included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F When the card is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Next, the state (2) 'shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card insertion preparation state, and the P card 2F receives the card insertion notification command, but is included in the state information request command transmitted from CU3F. This is when the CU state is not in the process of inserting a card (Bit0 = “0”). Also in this case, since the CU 3 F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time. State (3) 'shown in FIG. 45 (b) is the card insertion state, and the P card 2F receives the card insertion notification command, and the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3F is When the card is being inserted (Bit0 = “1”). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time on the assumption that the CU 3 F is inserting the card in the P-table 2F.

  Next, the state (4) ′ shown in FIG. 45 (b) is the card return preparation state, and although the P card 2F has not received the card return notification command, the command of the state information request transmitted from CU3F This is the case where the included CU state is not in the process of inserting a card (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, it is prohibited to overwrite the card ID and the insertion time on the assumption that the card is being inserted because the CU 3 F has not yet returned the card. State (5) 'shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a card return state, and when the P card 2F receives a card return notification command, the CU state included in the state information request command transmitted from the CU 3 F is a card It is not inserted (Bit0 = “0”). In this case, since the CU 3F is not inserting the card, the P-table 2F can overwrite the card ID and the insertion time.

  Thus, by limiting the card ID and the condition for overwriting (updating) the insertion time, the card ID etc. is intentionally transmitted to the P base 2 F, and the card ID etc stored in the P base 2 F is falsified. Etc. can be prevented and security can be improved.

<< Prepaid Lending >>
Next, the process of lending the game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 46, the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a state information request including the serial number = n, the game ball addition request = OFF, and the addition serial number = m to the P base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. Thus, while the addition request is not generated, the addition serial number is not updated.

  Thereafter, the player performs the lending operation (ball lending operation) of pressing the “Lending” button once, and the CU 3 F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, ie, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (loaning button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3 F fixes prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of additional balls = 125. Thus, the balance consumption is decided by the CU 3 F alone when the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 54F that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the remaining amount and adding to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 F makes a request for addition of game balls to the P platform 2 F. Therefore, the CU 3 F transmits a command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P-unit 2F. The serial number is counted up to "n + 1", and the addition serial number is also counted up to "m + 1" in order to request addition of a game ball. The CU 3 F counts up the addition serial number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to that, the P platform 2F updates the number of gaming balls to the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of current gaming balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number last time to “m + 1”. Backup the data. Then, P platform 2F notifies CU3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the result of game ball addition = OK, so that the serial number = n + 1, the number of balls to be added = 175, the result of game ball addition = OK and the number serial number = m + 1 A response of the status information response including is sent back to CU3F. Since this is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is simply incremented to "m + 1" without being counted up.

  After that, CU3F transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P base 2F, and P base 2F has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and The response of the status information response including the added serial number = m + 1 is sent back to CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the state information request and the state information response count up the serial number but do not count up the serial number.

<< Carrying balls / removing balls (replay) >>
Next, processing for playing balls with balls and balls and playing again will be described. In FIG. 47, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of the state information request including the serial number = n, the game ball addition request = OFF, and the addition serial number = m to the P base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. Thus, while the addition request is not generated, the addition serial number is not updated.

  Thereafter, when the player depresses the ball withdrawal button or the replay button 319F in the state that balls or balls are present, the CU 3F confirms consumption of 125 balls from the balls or balls. As described above, the consumption of balls or balls is decided on the CU 3 F side alone when the operation of pressing the balls out button or the replay button 319 F is performed. In addition, when both balls and balls exist, ball consumption is prioritized.

  Instead of the control for preferentially consuming the balls, a ball replay button and a ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either ball spending or ball spending by selecting and operating the ball. You may do so. That is, the replay button is for storing the gaming ball (game points) from the storage balls (stored medals), and for playing the gaming balls (game points) from the balls (scores). It may be composed of two with a ball-bearing (point-holding) replay button.

  After determining the consumption from the balls or the balls, the CU 3 F notifies the P 2 F of an addition request for the number of additional balls = 125. Specifically, the CU 3 F displays that the addition processing of the game ball is in progress, and the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 and the addition serial number = m + 1 Send to P stand 2F. In order to request addition of game balls, the serial number is counted up to "n + 1" and the serial number is also counted up to "m + 1". Further, the CU 3 F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to that, the P platform 2F updates the number of gaming balls to the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of current gaming balls) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number last time to “m + 1”. Backup the data. Then, the P platform 2F sends back to CU3F a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of added balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the added serial number = m + 1. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, it remains "m + 1" without counting up the addition serial number.

  After that, CU3F transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P base 2F, and P base 2F has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and The response of the status information response including the added serial number = m + 1 is sent back to CU3F.

<< Playing Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, a normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 48 shows the case where the count button is pressed without detecting the card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return preparation state transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P unit 2 F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, in the following, the description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted.

  Further, in FIG. 48, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0”, and the initial number of game balls is “800”. There is.

  Here, while the operation of the counting button is detected, counting in units of 100 points continues, and an example in which the counting operation is finished when the operation of the counting button is not detected will be described.

  First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the card return preparation state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. In response to this, the P-table 2F sends back a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting request = OFF to CU3F.

  The serial number n + 1 is returned from the P-base 2F with respect to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3 F. The same counting serial number m is returned from the P base 2F to the counting serial number m transmitted from the CU 3 F. This is because the counting serial number is updated upon the occurrence of a counting request and is a special serial number that is terminated upon completion of counting.

  Thereafter, the player presses the count button 28F. In FIG. 48, immediately after the operation of pressing the counting button 28F once, the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 1, the card return preparation state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF is from CU3F. It is sent to P stand 2F.

  When detecting the operation of the count button 28F, the P-table 2F transmits, to the CU 3F, the status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request. However, at this stage, the P unit 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 1, the number of gaming balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a telegram indicating a counting request, the counting serial number is counted up to "m + 1". At this time, the P-unit 2F updates the last transmission count serial number last time, and backs up the updated data of the last transmission count serial number last updated and the count request state ON.

  The CU 3 F that has received the status information response with the serial number n + 1 adds the balls corresponding to the requested number of counting balls and updates the display of the balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits an instruction of counting display to the display control unit 350F. In response to the command, the display control unit 350F performs display control on the display 54F on the side of the P base 2F. As a result, on the display 54F, the game balls are counted and the number thereof is reduced, while the image display in which the balls are increased is performed.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform effect display such that the game balls are guided one by one to the respective counter and counted. As another example of this effect display, it may be a display in which data of the number of game balls is converted over time into data of the number of balls possessed. For example, data on the number of gaming balls and data on the number of balls are shown as a bar graph, and a bar graph of the number of balls is increased while decreasing the bar graph of the number of gaming balls. The display to move to the bar graph of may be repeated. Furthermore, as another example of effect display, data of the current number of gaming balls and data of the number of balls are digitally displayed as it is, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of gaming balls, or part of the number of gaming balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the lens to the number of balls possessed, and various display effects.

  Furthermore, the CU 3 F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, CU3F transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to P table 2F, and notifies that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P platform 2F that has received this status information request finally subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the number-of-games ball display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the counting request state of the P-unit 2F is turned off, since the pressing of the counting button is continued, the P-unit 2F transmits a second counting request to the CU 3 F. That is, the status information response of the serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to the CU 3 F. However, even at this stage, the P unit 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 2, the number of gaming balls = 700. Further, since this status information response is a telegram transmitted as a new count request, the count serial number is incremented to "m + 2", the last transmission count serial number is updated last time, and the last transmission count serial number updated last time Back up the data with counting request status ON.

  The CU 3 F that has received the status information response with the serial number n + 2 adds the balls corresponding to the required number of counting balls and updates the display of the balls to 200. Furthermore, the CU 3 F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 F transmits a status information request of serial number n + 3, counting serial number m + 2, and counting response = ON to P table 2F, and notifies that the requested counting has been completed.

  Upon receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the number of gaming balls indicator 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand has left the counting button, and the counting operation has ended. For this reason, the P-unit 2F notifies the CU 3 F of the completion of counting by the state information response of the number n + 3. That is, together with the current number of gaming balls = 600, the status information response of counting request = OFF and number of counting balls = 0 is transmitted to CU3F. In addition, since all counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting serial number included in the status information response is not updated as it is m + 2.

  The CU 3 F having received this status information response determines that the counting is completed. Although illustration is omitted, the CU 3 F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation status = OFF, count response = OFF to the P unit 2F.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the information state response notifying the number of counting balls is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, if the number of the game balls for the counting balls is being subtracted promptly on the P unit side. Instead, at the stage of transmitting an information status response notifying the number of counting balls and receiving a confirmation of receipt from the CU, the P unit subtracts the game balls.

<< game ball count (automatic count) >>
When the store is closed, if no card is inserted and game balls remain in the P platform 2F, the clerk turns around the P platform 2F with the game balls remaining and inserts a store card into each one to perform counting operation It is necessary to collect the remaining game balls, and the work at the time of closing the store is complicated. In addition, if it is the constitution of the game machine and the card unit where the physical game ball is paid out conventionally as in the past, the work at the time of closing the store is done only by collecting the remaining game balls and resetting the card unit. It can be done. However, in the configuration in which P platform 2F and CU3F mutually authenticate and communicate and manage gaming balls (playing points) as in this embodiment, the remaining gaming balls are recovered only by the operation of simply resetting the card unit. It is impossible to do the work at the time of closing a store. Then, with reference to FIG. 49, the automatic counting process of the game ball at the time of closing a store will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a sequence diagram for illustrating counting processing automatically performed when the game arcade is closed. First, CU3F is a state in which there are no stock cards since there are no balls in the card holding ball = 0 ball. On the other hand, P stand 2F recognizes that a card is not inserted in CU3F with game ball = 50 balls. Then, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the CU opening state = ON, the card insertion state = OFF, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. In response to this, the P-table 2F sends back to CU3F a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 50, counting serial number = m, counting ball number = 0, counting request = OFF.

  When it is determined that the store is closed in the game arcade in which CU3F and P unit 2F are installed, if it is determined that no card is inserted and game balls remain in P unit 2F, the processing described below is performed. It should be noted that the fact that no card is inserted can be determined from the information of card insertion status = OFF included in the command of status information request, and the fact that game balls remain in P platform 2F is the status information response It can be judged from the information of the number of game balls = 50 included in the response.

  The CU 3 F transmits a command for card insertion notification including the serial number = n + 1, the card ID = 0, and the card insertion time = 0 to the P-base 2F. That is, the P card 2F is notified that the card of card ID = 0, which is a virtual card, has been inserted into the card reader of CU3F at card insertion time = 0. As described above, since the virtual card is inserted into the CU 3 F, there is no need for the shop clerk to go around the P platform 2 F with the game balls remaining and insert the shop card into each one. In response to this, the P-base 2F recognizes that the card is inserted into the CU 3 F, and the following processing is executed. In response to this, the P-table 2F returns a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 1 to the CU3F.

  Next, the CU 3 F notifies the P-table 2 F of the CU opening state OFF. Specifically, a status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the CU opening status = OFF, the card return preparation status = ON, the counting serial number = m and the counting response = OFF is transmitted to the P-unit 2F.

  In addition, as for the closing setting in the game arcade, for example, the CU control unit 323F transmits the closing command to the effect that the store management computer installed in the game arcade or the hall server 801F closes the respective CU3F. It is done by judging the end of sales in Specifically, when a clerk operates the hall management computer or the hall server 801F to close the store, a closing command to close the store to each CU 3F is simultaneously delivered. The store closing time may be set and stored in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F, and control may be performed so that the store closing command is simultaneously distributed to the respective CUs 3F when the store closing time comes. As another method, a sales termination signal may be transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by remote control operation of sales termination by a store clerk, and the CU control unit 323F may determine the termination of sales in the game arcade. As still another method, each CU3F is provided with a clock function, and when it is the closing time (for example 10 o'clock), the time (for example 10:20) after a predetermined time (for example 20 minutes) of the closing time has passed When clocked by the function, each CU 3 F may control to transmit a status information request including CU opening status = OFF to the P base 2 F.

  In P platform 2F that received it, serial number = n + 2, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 50, "1" added to the received counting serial number m, updated counting number of m + 1, counting ball number = 50 and counting request = ON Send a state information response including the to the CU3F. That is, in order to request CU3F to count remaining gaming balls, P unit 2F notifies CU3F of information on the number of gaming balls = 50, counting acceptance request, and counting serial number counting up, and the last transmission count last time Back up the serial number update and count ball request status ON information.

  Upon receiving it, the CU3F adds the number of counting balls = 50 sent from the P-table 2F to the number of holding balls. Note that the number of counting balls = 50 added to the number of balls has not been determined, and the CU 3 F backs up the information of the last transmission counting serial number update last time while keeping the number of balls at the current position = 0. Then, the CU 3 F returns a response to the P-table 2 F in order to notify receipt of the counting ball. Specifically, a status information request including serial number = n + 3, CU opening status = OFF, card return preparation status = ON, counting serial number = m + 1, and counting response = ON is transmitted to P unit 2F. The counting balls received from the P-table 2F are stored in the storage unit (for example, RAM or the like) of the CU3F as the number of balls possessed by the card having card ID = 0 and card insertion time = 0, which is a virtual card.

  In P platform 2F having received it, the number of counting balls is subtracted from the number of gaming balls (number of gaming balls = 50−number of counting balls = 50), and display of the number of gaming balls = 0 is performed. Then, P platform 2F subtracts the number of counting balls from the number of gaming balls, and notifies that there is no remaining gaming ball (number of gaming balls = 0) that counting request is unnecessary (counting request state OFF). A state information response including: = n + 3, gaming ball number = 0, counting serial number = m + 1, counting ball number = 0 and counting request = OFF is sent to CU3F.

  If all the remaining game balls have been counted, processing is performed to return the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) inserted in CU3F. Specifically, the CU 3 F transmits a card return notification including the serial number = n + 4 to the P base 2 F in order to notify the P base 2 F that the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) has been returned. The P that has received this recognizes that the virtual card inserted in the CU 3 F is returned, and transmits to the CU 3 F a response of a card return response including serial number = n + 4, card ID = 0, and card insertion time = 0.

  Next, the CU 3 F notifies the P base 2 F that the CU state has become the card insertion state = OFF. Specifically, the CU 3 F transmits a status information request including the serial number = n + 5 and the card insertion status = OFF to the P-base 2F. In response to this, the P-table 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the number of counting balls = 0 to the CU 3F.

  Thus, in the case of the counting process at the time of closing the store in the game arcade, the counting process is automatically executed without the store clerk inserting a card and performing the pressing operation of the counting button 28F, and the remaining game balls All of the numbers can be collectively counted as the number of balls possessed by the virtual card (card ID = 0, card insertion time = 0) and stored in the storage means of CU3F. In addition, CU3F may transmit the number of balls with the number of remaining game balls counted to the hall server 801F together with identification information of P platform 2F or CU3F. In the hall server 801F, it is possible to return the balls to the player at a later date by storing the number of balls sent from the CU 3 F separately for each P platform 2 F or CU 3 F. Further, the CU 3 F may transmit the card ID inserted immediately before closing the store in association with the counted number of balls (remaining game balls) to the hole server 801 F. Since the remaining game balls are highly likely to be game balls of the player of the card ID inserted immediately before the store is closed, it is possible to reduce the task of identifying the owner of the counted number of balls, which will be counted later It is possible to more easily return the number of balls held to the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, the closing process when the card is not inserted and the game ball remains in the P platform 2F has been described, but the closing process when the card is inserted is described later The same processing as the processing of “card return)” (see FIG. 51) is executed. However, with regard to the counting process of the remaining game balls, the store clerk may perform the counting process by pressing the counting button 28F, or the counting process may be performed automatically according to the closing setting. In any case, when a card is inserted, the card is returned by closing processing and the card is in a removal waiting state, and the card needs to be collected by the clerk.

<< Counting history processing >>
Next, the process of the count history data stored in P platform 2F will be described. FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram for explaining the process of the count history data stored in P table 2F. In FIG. 50, the initial number of game balls is 600. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n (not shown), the counting serial number = m and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. In the P platform 2F, the player operates the count button 28F from the response of the status information response transmitted before receiving the command of the status information request until the response to the command of the status information request is transmitted. The counting process is started.

  Then, in the P platform 2F, the response of the state information response including the serial number = n (not shown), the number of gaming balls = 600, the counting serial number = m + 1, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counting request = ON is sent back to CU3F. Here, in the P platform 2F, since the counting request changes from the OFF state to the ON state, processing of the counting history is started. Specifically, the P platform 2F uses the history of the number of gaming balls paid out to the CU3F as the count request ball count from the P platform 2F side from the count request ON state to the count request OFF state as the count history for one time Remember. That is, when there are a plurality of counting requests, the history from the counting request ON state to the counting request OFF state as the first counting request is stored as the first counting history. After that, as the second counting request, the history from when the counting request is turned on to when the counting request is turned off is stored as the second counting history. Depending on the period during which the count button 28F is pressed, the response of the status information response including a plurality of count request ON states is from the count request ON state until the count request OFF state. It has been sent back to CU3F. Among the counting history to be stored, “card ID” at the time of counting request, “counting reception time” included in status information response from counting response ON from CU3F, count ball number paid out by counting request OFF state The information includes the cumulative number “cumulative counting ball number” and the “playing ball number” at the end of counting.

  Next, CU3F transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 1 (not shown), counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON to P unit 2F, and notifies that it has finished the requested counting. . At this stage, the number of counting balls = 100 is tentatively determined.

  Upon receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, collates the number of gaming balls, and if it is 500 balls, decides 100 balls that have been temporarily determined. . Then, the display of the game ball number indicator 29F is updated from 600 to 500. Furthermore, when the player continues the operation of the counting button 28F, the P platform 2F has serial number = n + 1 (not shown), number of gaming balls = 500, counting serial number = m + 2, number of counting balls = 100 and count request The response of the status information response including = ON is sent back to CU3F. Next, CU3F sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2 (not shown), counting serial number = m + 2 and counting response = ON to P 2F, and notifies that it has finished the requested counting. . At this stage, the number of counting balls = 100 is tentatively determined.

  Upon receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F subtracts the number of gaming balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, collates the number of gaming balls, and if it is 400 balls, decides 100 balls that have been temporarily determined. . Then, the display of the game ball number indicator 29F is updated from 600 to 500. After that, when the operation of the counting button 28F by the player is completed, the P platform 2F has serial number = n + 2 (not shown), gaming ball number = 400, counting serial number = m + 3, counting ball number = 100 and counting request Send a response of status information response including OFF to CU3F. When changing to the counting request OFF state, the P-table 2F stores 100 balls + 100 balls = 200 balls as the counting history 1 as the “cumulative counting ball number” in the counting history. In addition, the P platform 2F stores the number of gaming balls when changing to the counting request OFF state in the counting history 1 as the “number of gaming balls” at the end of the counting. Further, the P-table 2F stores the “count reception time” included in the status information response of the count response ON state from the CU 3F in the count history 1. When new history is stored in the counting history 1, if the counting history 1 already exists, the counting history 1 is stored as the counting history 2, and then the new history is stored in the counting history 1. . In addition, in P stand 2F, since the history for the past 2 times is held, it is stored as the counting history 1 and the counting history 2, but even if the history for the past 1 time or the history for the past 3 times or more is stored Good.

  As described above, it becomes possible to recover the number of gaming balls counted by storing the counting history, and by storing a plurality of past portions, the accuracy of the recovery processing can be improved.

<< game ball count (card return) >>
Next, the process of counting the game balls when returning the card will be described. FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 51, the number of balls possessing a card specified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) is zero, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, CU3F transmits a command of a status information request including serial number = n, CU open state = ON, card return preparation state = OFF, counting serial number = m, and counting response = OFF to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P-table 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the number of counting balls = 0 and the counting request = OFF to the CU3F.

  Thereafter, the player presses the "card return" button when stopping the game or moving to another game stand. However, when the player presses the "card return" button, it is determined that the number of gaming balls in P platform 2F is 800, and CU3F determines that the number of gaming balls in P platform 2F is not zero. In addition, CU3F, because the player has pressed the "card return" button, the card return preparation state = ON, the serial number = n + 1, CU opening state = ON, counting serial number = m and counting response = OFF Send a command to P unit 2F. In addition, CU3F notifies the notification of card return preparation state = ON to P stand 2F for 10 seconds. Further, since the number of gaming balls in P platform 2F is 800, and is not 0, CU3 F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on display 54 F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player depresses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game balls into balls. The P-table 2F determines that the counting operation of pressing the counting button 28F is the counting operation in the card return preparation state = ON, and processes counting collectively instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify CU3F of the counting acceptance request for the number of gaming balls 800 and the counting ball number 800 for counting the number of gaming balls 800 collectively, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 800, counting serial number = A response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is sent back to CU3F. However, at this stage, the P unit 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. Therefore, in the state information response of serial number n + 1, the number of gaming balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a telegram message of counting request, the P base 2 F counts up the counting serial number to “m + 1”, updates the last transmission transmission serial number last time, and updates the previous last transmission counting serial number updated Back up the data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU 3 F adds 800 counting balls to the ball holding number, and subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 playing balls to 0 balls. Also, the CU 3 F backs up the data of the last transmission count sequence number updated last time. Then, the CU 3 F notifies the count ball reception that the status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the CU opening state = ON, the card return preparation state = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1 and the counting response = ON is P platform 2F Send to

  In response to the response from CU 3 F, P stand 2 F subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 playing balls to display 0 playing balls on display 54 F or the like. Furthermore, P stand 2F has the game ball number 0 ball, in order to notify the completion of counting to CU 3 F, serial number = n + 2, game ball number 0, counting serial number = m + 1, counting ball number 0 and counting request = OFF To the CU3F. In addition, since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without counting up while keeping m + 1.

  In CU3F, before 10 seconds have passed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, during the card return preparation state, the count button 28F is pressed to collectively count the game balls as balls and the number of game balls Since it is 0 ball, card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3 F transmits a command of the card return notification including the serial number = n + 3 to the P-base 2F. In response to this, the P-base 2F sends back to the CU 3 F a response of a card return response including the card ID held at the payout control board 17F and serial number = n + 3, the card insertion time. After the card ID and the card insertion time are returned to the CU 3 F, the card ID and card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17 F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3 F determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card matches the card ID received from the P-unit 2 F, and returns the inserted card if they match, If they do not match, error processing is performed and a report is sent to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3 F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player has started the game by the deposit operation without inserting a card into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F, the cards stocked in the card stock unit provided in the CU3F (stock card) The ball number 800 is stored and the card is returned to the player. At the time of return of the inserted card or stock card, the CU 3 F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hole server 801 F, and the hole server 801 F associates the data of the number of balls with the card ID of the card. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 F can be removed from the card insertion / ejection slot 309 F, a part of the card is held in a protruding state from the card insertion / ejection slot 309 F (card removal enabled state). In CU3F, a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed is attached near the card insertion / ejection slot 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, it is determined that the card can be removed. In the case of the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal completion state.

  When the card return processing is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 F notifies the P unit 2 F of information on the card return preparation state OFF and the card removal waiting ON state. Therefore, CU3F sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 4, CU opening status = ON, card return preparation status = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = OFF to P unit 2F Send. In response to this, the P-platform 2F displays a message "Please remove card" on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In addition, the P-table 2F may turn on an LED or may output an audio message "Please remove card" with the speaker 270F to notify removal of the card. Furthermore, the P-table 2F transmits a command of state information response including the serial number = n + 4, the number of gaming balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, the number of counting balls = 0 and the count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejection slot 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits, to the P-table 2F, a command of state information request including waiting for card removal = ON. However, if the player removes the card from the card insertion / ejection slot 309F, the sensor attached near the card insertion / ejection slot 309F is turned off, so CU3F has a serial number = n + 5 and waiting for card extraction = OFF. The command of the status information request including the is transmitted to P platform 2F.

  In response to this, the P-platform 2F stops the display of "Please remove card" displayed on the variable display device 278F, and ends the notification of removal of the card. It should be noted that notification of card removal continues after notification of a status information request command including waiting for card removal = ON until reception of a status information request command including waiting for card removal = OFF. Furthermore, the P-table 2F transmits, to the CU 3 F, a command of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5.

  In addition, the sequence of the counting process of the game ball at the time of returning the card | curd demonstrated in FIG. 51 is not limited at the time of a card return, The same process can be applied also at simple leaving / eating break. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order for the player to finish the small use. A meal break is a game or the like where the game is interrupted for, for example, 30 minutes, which is longer than simple leaving, for example.

<< Abnormal sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, recovery processing of the number of gaming balls when the status information request has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection and there is no command of status information request from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine. In particular, there is a power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power of P stand 2F is turned off and then turned on again), the status information request has not arrived (the command has not arrived from CU3F to P stand 2F) And a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts match after recovery.

  Referring to FIG. 52, before a power failure occurs during the game, CU 3 F transmits a state information request including the serial number = n to P unit 2 F. In response to that, the P platform 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to CU3F in order to notify the game table information CU3F. . The P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, which is the previous game table information, to "n".

  The CU 3 F receives the status information response with serial number = n, updates the last transmission serial number last time to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information on the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, when a state information request including the serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F after the power OFF occurs in the P base 2 F during the game, since the P base 2 F is in the power OFF state Unable to receive status information request. After that, since no status information response is sent from the P-unit 2F, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. After the P platform 2F transmits the response of the status information response to the CU 3 F, the game continues on the P platform 2F until the power is turned off, and the gaming machine information changes, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, which becomes the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P-unit 2F is recovered and turned ON, and the P-unit 2F starts to operate. When P stand 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 F and P stand 2 F, and information including main chip ID and payout tip ID is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Ru. Does CU3F send the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800F via hall server 801F) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the last transmission sequence number = n to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. In P platform 2F that received it, first, P platform 2F backs up in the last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request last time = n and inside P platform 2F (specifically, delivery control board 17F) It is determined whether or not the transmission serial number = n matches. If they match, it can be judged that the status information response transmitted last from P unit 2F to CU3F before communication disconnection has reached CU3F, and in this case, it is included in the status information response The game information is also updated on the CU 3 F side based on the received game information. Therefore, in this case, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) to CU3F as gaming information storage absence (specifically, no previous game platform information absence). If the last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request = n and the last transmission sequence number of the last backup = n backed up in P base 2F (specifically, the delivery control substrate 17F) do not match, communication is disconnected Since it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P platform 2F to CU3F before has not reached CU3F, in such a case, gaming information is stored (specifically, the previous game information is stored) Returns a recovery response (serial number = 1, ball unit price) including gaming information as CU) to the CU3F. In addition, when transmitting the response of the recovery response to the CU 3 F, the P-table 2 F transmits the ball unit price and the ball unit price of the game ball played before the recovery processing to the CU 3 F. As a result, it is possible to play a game even after the recovery process with the unit price of the game ball played before the recovery process. Although the information of the ball unit price is also included in the response of the recovery response transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F to be described later, the information of the ball unit price is not particularly described if the information of the ball unit price is not directly related

  In FIG. 52, CU3F does not perform addition recovery processing because there is no game information storage included in the recovery response. Note that the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P platform 2F as a recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the first check process. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P unit 2 F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2 F. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In P stand 2F which received that, while notifying the CU3F with the state information response which is not notified game stand information (the number of game balls which is latest game stand information = 450, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36). Lastly update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. The CU 3 F receives the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the data. Note that the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

<< Counting history sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the process of reading out the counting history stored in P platform 2F to CU 3 F will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a process of reading the counting history stored in the P-unit 2F into the CU 3F. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of counting history request including serial number = n, store code and SC substrate ID to the P base 2 F. In the P stand 2F, the store code transmitted and stored from the CU 3 F by the card insertion notification command is compared with the store code transmitted from the CU 3 F by the counting history request command. When the store code matches as a result of comparison, the P-table 2F sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the response of the counting history response so that the data can be transmitted to the CU 3 F. Then, in P platform 2F, a response of a counting history response including serial number = n, counting history 1 and counting history 2 is sent back to CU3F.

  On the other hand, when the store code does not match as a result of comparison, the P-table 2F sets data in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU 3 F as no counting history. Although not shown, in P platform 2F, a response of a count history response including serial number = n and no count history is sent back to CU3F.

  As described above, the counting history sequence can recover the number of gaming balls counted by transmitting the counting history stored in the P platform 2F to the CU 3 F, and a plurality of past portions (counting history 1 and counting history) can be further processed. By transmitting 2) to CU3F, the accuracy of the recovery process can be improved. Note that the plurality of counting histories transmitted to the CU 3 F are not limited to two, and may be three or more counting histories.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, recovery processing of the number of gaming balls when the status information response has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and a response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, there is a power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power of P stand 2F is turned off and then turned on again), the status information response has not arrived (the command has not arrived from P stand 2F to CU3F) And a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication counterparts match after recovery.

  Referring to FIG. 54, after power failure occurs during the game, status information response including serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 from P unit 2F to CU If it is sent, the CU can not receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. Since no state information request from the CU 3 F is sent after that, the P unit 2 F detects that the communication line has been disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During these three seconds, the game continues on the P platform 2F, and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which become the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  On the other hand, in the CU 3 F, control is performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. At that time, the number of balls at the current point is stored in the card and discharged. In addition, when the number of balls can not be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the hole server 801F which receives the number of balls from the CU3F periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it as a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the stored data (number of balls held) of the player. After that, the power supply of CU3F is restored and turned ON, and CU3F starts to operate. When the CU 3 F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2 F to the CU 3 F. Does CU3F send the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800F via hall server 801F) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the last transmission sequence number = n−1 to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2F that received it, the last transmission sequence number of the received recovery request last time = n-1 and the last transmission sequence number on previous time backed up in P unit 2F (specifically, payout control board 17F) = n Compare and judge. As a result, since the two do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power failure has not reached CU3F. Therefore, the P platform 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including gaming information storage presence (specifically, previous game platform information presence) to the CU3F as having gaming information not notified to the CU3F. Do. That is, the game response information includes the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, in the recovery response and transmits it to the CU 3 F.

  The CU 3 F executes recovery processing based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the detection of the communication line disconnection, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. Therefore, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 F executes the first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response determines whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. It is checked. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). The CU 3 F transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P base 2 F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P base 2 F. In addition, CU3F processes last time game stand information received from P stand 2F, updates last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In P unit 2F that received it, unannounced gaming machine information (number of gaming balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls) included in the status information response that did not reach CU3F before the occurrence of power off The state information response is sent to the CU3F, and the last transmission sequence number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. The CU 3 F receives the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the data. Note that the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether or not the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response The CU control section 323F of the CU3F determines that the card is inserted, and the RAM of the CU control section 323F stores the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power failure occurs, and the insertion time of the stored card and recovery The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3 F may determine whether or not there is a match by comparing the card insertion time included in the response. In that case, it is determined that the two match, and if there is no added recovery, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request to the P-unit 2 F. The P unit 2F having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3F.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of a member's card identifying a player individual of a member but also the card ID of a visitor card used by a player who comes as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used by an unspecified player and does not identify a specific individual player. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who was playing the game before the occurrence of the power-off / communication circuit disconnection is the same player as the player who is about to play the game after recovery of the power-off. Although it can be specified whether or not it is possible, it is not possible to specify which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above-mentioned "player identification information" is not limited to the identification of a specific player individual, but the player who has played a game before the occurrence of the power off / communication circuit disconnection performs the game after the power off recovery. This is a broad concept including information that can be used to identify the identity of a player who is trying to move.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, another recovery process of the number of gaming balls when the status information response has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication circuit disconnection will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, communication circuit disconnection, and a response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of CU3F is turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not been reached (the command has not arrived from P 2F to CU 3F) The sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the communication partner does not match after recovery is shown. The power is also turned OFF / ON by, for example, failure of the CU3F, or manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by inserting or removing the CU3F from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 55, after power-off occurs during the game, status information response including serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 from P platform 2F to CU If it is sent, the CU can not receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. Since no state information request from the CU 3 F is sent after that, the P unit 2 F detects that the communication line has been disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F. During these three seconds, the game continues on the P platform 2F, and the gaming machine information changes, and the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which become the latest gaming machine information. On the other hand, the gaming machine information of the game ball number = 480, the addition ball number = 3, and the subtraction ball number = 23 which has already been transmitted becomes the previous game machine information.

  On the other hand, in the CU 3 F, control is performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. After that, the power supply of the CU3F is restored and turned ON, and the CU3F is further exchanged, and a new CU3F starts operation.

  When the CU 3 F operating before the CU replacement stores the number of balls held, the number of balls held may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and ejected. At that time, if the number of balls can not be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls received from CU3F periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) The player may be compensated for the loss based on the stored data (number of balls possessed) of the server 801F.

  When the replaced CU3F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Be done. Does CU3F send the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (key management server 800F via hall server 801F) and the main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered? Have them check whether they are not or not and reply the result. If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number 1 to the P 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. However, CU3F does not have the last transmission serial number last time because it has been replaced. In P stand 2F that received it, the last transmission sequence number of last time transmitted from CU3F after replacement = 0, and the last transmission sequence number of last time backed up in P stand 2F (specifically, delivery control board 17F) = n Compare and judge. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P-unit 2F is transmitted to the CU 3 F to perform recovery processing. Specifically, the P unit 2F returns the recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage existence to the CU 3 F as having game information in order to perform recovery processing on the replaced CU 3 F. In the recovery information notified to the CU3F in this recovery response, the last transmission serial number = n, the card ID of the card inserted, the card insertion time, the last transmission addition serial number as previous game information = m, and the last game information It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). The CU 3 F transmits a communication start request including the serial number 2 to the P base 2 F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P base 2 F. In addition, CU3F performs recovery processing (number of gaming balls = 480, total number of added balls = + 3, total number of subtracted balls = + 23) using the previous game table information received from P platform 2F, and the last transmission sequence number last time Update to back up the data, card ID and card insertion time. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In the P platform 2F that has received it, the unreported gaming machine information (number of gaming balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36) is notified to CU3F by a state information response. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3, the number of gaming balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 as the state information response. In response to the status information response including the unreported gaming machine information, the CU 3 F waits for the insertion of the card that was being inserted last time, or waits for the store clerk remote control operation (playing game counting). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3 F reads the ID of the inserted card by the card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored on the basis of the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, it becomes a wait for the store clerk's remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a command for card insertion notification including a store code, SC board ID and the like is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. In the P unit 2F, the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the last card insertion prior to communication disconnection are backed up in the RAM etc. of the payout control unit 171F, and the backed up data and CU3F are transmitted. The store code and the SC substrate ID are compared to determine whether they match. If the two match, the game can be resumed. Note that a command for card insertion notification including the store code and the SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F without waiting for the remote control operation. In the case of non-coincidence, error processing is performed such as, for example, invalidating the game ball count data of P platform 2F. Alternatively, instead of or in addition to this, an error notification may be made. Furthermore, control may be performed to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player. If the card inserted during the previous insertion is not inserted, the state of waiting for the store clerk remote control operation (playing ball counting) is continued.

  Note that the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value or not. Execute the process This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of added balls when the addition request has not been reached due to power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery matches when the addition request has not been reached (the command of the addition request from CU3F to P platform 2F has not been reached) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 56, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the addition serial number = m to the P-base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without being counted up while the counting number is m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU3F determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to the P base 2F, The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 F determines the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the re-play button, the P unit 2 F is powered off and the operation is stopped before the command of the state information request is received. Therefore, the P-unit 2F can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3F.

  Since the P unit 2 F is stopped, the CU 3 F can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 F detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2F, and the P-unit 2F starts operation. When P stand 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 F and P stand 2 F, and information including main chip ID and payout tip ID is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Ru. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. In the P-base 2F that has received it, based on the received command of the recovery request, recovery information backed up in the P-base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) is sent back as a response to the CU 3 F. Here, the last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted last time.

  In the CU 3 F that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number of the recovery information matches the stored last transmission addition serial number of the previous time. In the case of CU3F, when previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU3F being backed up is larger (new) than final transmission addition serial number = m of recovery data of P unit 2F (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the command of the previous state information request has not been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed.

  As a specific additive recovery process, recovery of the number of additive balls = 125 balls is requested to P platform 2F. Therefore, the CU 3 F transmits the recovery request 2 (number of added balls = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P-unit 2F.

  The P unit 2 F performs an addition process to the number of added balls included in the recovery request 2, updates the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time, and backs up the data. At this timing, the addition process that is not realized due to the power-off is realized, and the number of game balls is matched between the CU 3 F side and the P base 2 F side. Furthermore, in P unit 2F, the fact that the addition processing is OK is returned to CU 3 F as recovery response 2 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU 3 F that has received it clears the addition request state. In addition, CU control section 323F of CU3F which received recovery response 2, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game stand information which is transmitted from P base 2F as the aforementioned recovery response is appropriate value Execute the third check process to check the The third check process will be described later based on FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request to the P 2 F. The P unit 2F having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3F. Further, the CU 3 F transmits a status information request to the P base 2 F. In P stand 2F which received that, CU3F is notified of unnoticed game stand information (the number of game balls = 175) by a state information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of added balls when the added response has not been reached due to power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery matches in the addition response not reaching (the response of the addition response from P 2F to CU 3 F not reaching) due to power off and communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 57, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the addition serial number = m to the P-base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without being counted up while the counting number is m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU3F determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to the P base 2F, The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 F determines the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  After that, a power failure occurs in CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, P unit 2F can not detect that the operation of CU 3 F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in CU 3 F. In order for the P-unit 2F to detect a disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command can not be received from the CU 3 F for one second or more is required.

  Therefore, in P stand 2F, without knowing that the operation of CU3F is stopped, in response to the command of state information request of CU3F, serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 175, game ball addition result = OK and addition serial number The response of the status information response including = m + 1 is sent back to CU3F. However, the response of the state information response sent back to CU3F has not arrived at CU3F since the operation of CU3F is stopped. In addition, in the P platform 2F, the response of the status information response is sent back to the CU 3 F, the last transmission addition serial number is updated last time, and the updated data and the number of gaming balls = 175 are backed up.

  After that, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3 F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2 F to the CU 3 F. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1 to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. The P unit 2F that has received it returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control substrate 17F) as a response to CU3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response) (Previous final transmission serial number = n + 1, previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1). The recovery information includes the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last transmission additional serial number = m + 1.

  In the CU 3 F that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the card ID of the recovery information and the card insertion time match the stored card ID and card insertion time. In CU3F, when the card ID and the card insertion time match, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P unit 2 F and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU 3 F coincide with each other, Clears the add request state without requesting a process. In addition, the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the first check process. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a).

  In CU3F, the card ID and the card insertion time match, depending on whether the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P base 2 F matches the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU3F. The addition recovery processing determination as to whether or not the addition recovery processing is to be performed is performed. In addition recovery processing determination, when the card ID and the card insertion time match, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P base 2 F and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU 3 F coincide It is determined that the addition recovery process is not to be performed, and otherwise it is determined that the addition recovery process is to be performed.

  Basically, when it is determined that the addition recovery processing is not performed in the addition recovery processing determination, the CU 3 F does not transmit the command of the recovery request 2 to the P-unit 2 F. However, even if CU3F determines that addition recovery processing is not to be performed in the addition recovery processing determination, if the command of recovery request 2 is erroneously transmitted to P-unit 2F, recovery processing is performed, and it is assumed that There is a disadvantage of being changed to a different number of game balls.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when CU3F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P base 2F after the determination of the additional recovery processing determination, the P base 2F and the previous last transmission addition serial number included in the command of the recovery request 2 It is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in the P-unit 2F matches, and re-determination as to whether or not the addition recovery processing is to be performed.

  Specifically, the CU 3 F transmits the command of the recovery request 2 including the serial number = 2, the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1, and the number of added balls = 125 to the P-unit 2F. Since the P unit 2F that received it matches the previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 included in the command of the recovery request 2 of CU 3 F and the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in the P unit 2F, It is determined that recovery processing is not to be performed, and information on processing NG is notified to CU3F. Therefore, the P base 2F transmits, to the CU 3F, the recovery response 2 including the serial number = 2 and the processing result = processing NG.

  Further, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request to the P 2 F. In P stand 2F which received that, it returns communication start response to CU3F.

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of added balls when the added response has not been reached due to the power supply disconnection / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing another example of processing in the case where there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery matches in the addition response not reaching (the response of the addition response from P 2F to CU 3 F not reaching) due to power off and communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 58, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the addition serial number = m to the P-base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without being counted up while the counting number is m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU3F determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to the P base 2F, The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 F determines the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  After that, a power failure occurs in CU3F, and the operation of CU3F stops. However, P unit 2F can not detect that the operation of CU 3 F is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in CU 3 F. In order for the P-unit 2F to detect a disconnection of the communication line, a period in which the next command can not be received from the CU 3 F for one second or more is required.

  Therefore, the P-unit 2F receives the command of the status information request of the CU 3 F and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU 3 F is stopped. However, due to some cause (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit, etc.), a situation occurs in which the game balls can not be added. In this case, the P platform 2F sends back to CU3F a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 50, gaming ball addition result = NG, and addition serial number = m. However, the response of the state information response sent back to CU3F has not arrived at CU3F since the operation of CU3F is stopped. In addition, in P stand 2F, since game ball addition abnormality has occurred, it is not possible to process the addition ball from CU 3 F, and the update is not performed with the last transmission addition serial number = m last time.

  After that, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. In addition, in P stand 2F, it is a state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3 F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2 F to the CU 3 F. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1 to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. The P unit 2F that has received it returns the recovery information backed up in the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control substrate 17F) as a response to CU3F based on the received recovery request command (recovery response) (Previous final transmission serial number = n + 1, previous final transmission addition serial number = m)). The recovery information includes the previous last transmission serial number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last transmission additional serial number = m.

  In the CU 3 F that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the card ID of the recovery information and the card insertion time match the stored card ID and card insertion time. In CU3F, when the card ID and the card insertion time match, and the previous last transmission addition serial number of recovery data of P unit 2F = m and the previous last transmission addition serial number stored in CU 3F do not match, addition recovery Request processing Therefore, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, the recovery request 2 including the previous final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 and the number of added balls = 125.

  In response to that, the P-base 2F notifies the game ball addition is not processed by the game ball addition abnormality (game ball addition NG) by the recovery response 2. Recovery response 2 includes recovery result = process NG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response 2 including the recovery result = process NG, the CU 3 F clears the game ball addition request state and puts it in the OFF state, and performs the third check described later. Further, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request to the P 2 F. In P stand 2F which received that, it returns communication start response to CU3F.

  Furthermore, since CU3F is in the OFF state after the game ball addition request state is cleared, state information including game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 without notifying P base 2F again of the addition request. Send a request to P 2F. If it is not possible to add the number of added balls = 125 of the recovery request 2 to the number of gaming balls = 50, the P base 2F that received it notifies the current number of gaming balls = 50 to the CU3F without addition. Do. Specifically, the P platform 2F transmits, to the CU 3F, a state information response including the number of game balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m. In addition, since the game ball addition result is NG, the addition serial number remains “m” without being updated to “m + 1” transmitted in the state information request. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b). The CU 3 F cancels the consumption of the determined balls based on the information on the current number of gaming balls = 50 included in the state information response transmitted from the P-table 2 F.

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< abnormal system sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of added balls when the addition request has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing another example of processing when a command for addition request from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not been reached due to power disconnection or communication circuit disconnection. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery does not match because the addition request has not been reached (the command of the addition request from CU3F to P platform 2F has not been reached) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 59, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n and the addition serial number = m to the P-base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without being counted up while the counting number is m.

  Thereafter, the player presses the re-play button. Therefore, the CU3F determines consumption of the balls, transmits a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to the P base 2F, The information which converted the ball into the game ball is notified. At this time, the CU 3 F determines the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of added balls = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the re-play button, the P unit 2 F is powered off and the operation is stopped before the command of the state information request is received. Therefore, the P-unit 2F can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3F.

  Since the P unit 2 F is stopped, the CU 3 F can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 F detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P-unit 2F, and the P-unit 2F is further replaced, and a new P-unit 2F starts operation. When P stand 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 F and P stand 2 F, and information including main chip ID and payout tip ID is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Ru. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. In addition, CU3F performs addition recovery even if P stand 2F is replaced. In the P-base 2F that has received it, based on the received command of the recovery request, recovery information backed up in the P-base 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) is sent back as a response to the CU 3 F. However, since the P unit 2F is newly exchanged, the last transmission addition serial number is not backed up last time, and the initial value "0" is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  In the CU 3 F that has received the recovery response, it is determined whether or not the previous last transmission addition serial number of the recovery information matches the stored last transmission addition serial number of the previous time. If CU3F does not match the last transmission addition serial number of recovery data for P unit 2F = 0 and the last transmission addition serial number = m + 1 stored in CU3F being backed up, the command of the previous state information request has not been issued It is determined that it has been reached and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific additive recovery process, recovery of the number of additive balls = 125 balls is requested to P platform 2F. Therefore, the CU 3 F transmits the recovery request 2 (number of added balls = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P-unit 2F.

  The P unit 2 F performs an addition process to the number of added balls included in the recovery request 2, updates the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time, and backs up the data. Furthermore, in P unit 2F, the fact that the addition processing is OK is returned to CU 3 F as recovery response 2 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). The CU 3 F that has received it clears the addition request state. In addition, CU control section 323F of CU3F which received recovery response 2, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game stand information which is transmitted from P base 2F as the aforementioned recovery response is appropriate value Execute the third check process to check the The third check process will be described later based on FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request to the P 2 F. The P unit 2F having received it clears the recovery data (game information) and sends a communication start response to the CU 3F. Further, the CU 3 F transmits a status information request to the P base 2 F. In P stand 2F which received that, CU3F is notified of unnoticed game stand information (the number of game balls = 175) by a state information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

  Here, although the case where the replay button for starting the game was pressed by the deposit of balls was described, the same operation is performed when the bonus button for starting the game is pressed by the withdrawal of balls.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, recovery processing of the number of counting balls when the counting response has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the count response from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery is coincident with the count response not reaching (the command of the count response from the CU3F to the P unit 2F not reached) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 60, the initial number of balls held is 0 and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed to transmit a count request to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P platform 2F sends back to CU3F a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100 and counting request = ON. In addition, in the P platform 2F, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counted serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3F, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 F adds the number of counting balls to the number of balls to set the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after receiving the command of the status information request, the P-unit 2F generates a power-off and stops its operation. Therefore, the P-unit 2F can not receive the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 1, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = ON from the CU 3F. That is, the count response from the CU 3 F is not reached for the P-table 2 F.

  Since the P unit 2 F is stopped, the CU 3 F can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 F detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2F, and the P-unit 2F starts operation. When P stand 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 F and P stand 2 F, and information including main chip ID and payout tip ID is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Ru. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m + 1 to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2F that received it, the previous last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m + 1, and on the P unit 2F inside (specifically, delivery control board 17F) the last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 Are identical to each other, it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3 F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3 F. In this case, the P-base 2F executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P platform 2F is updated from the number of gaming balls = 500 to the number of gaming balls = 400 at this time. In addition, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2F sends a recovery response, which is a response, back to the CU 3F.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). In addition, since the CU3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. In addition, CU3F processes last time game stand information received from P stand 2F, updates last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In P platform 2F which received that, CU3F is notified of uninformed game stand information (the number of game balls = 400) by a status information response. Specifically, the transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 400 are included as the status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 9 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting request is not reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the count request from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery matches when the counting request has not arrived (the command of the counting request from P 2F to CU 3F has not arrived) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 61, the initial number of balls held is 0, and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed to transmit a count request to the CU 3F. Specifically, the P platform 2F sends back to CU3F a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100 and counting request = ON. In addition, in the P platform 2F, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counted serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3F, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  However, before receiving a command of status information response, the CU 3 F generates a power-off and stops its operation. That is, in CU 3 F, the counting request from P platform 2 F has not arrived yet. After that, since no status information request is sent from the CU 3 F, the P unit 2 F detects that the communication line has been disconnected after 3 seconds and performs control to stop the game. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F transmits a stop command to the launch control board 31F, and the launch control board 31F stops the rotational drive of the launch motor 18F.

  After that, the power failure is restored at CU3F, and CU3F starts operation. When the CU 3 F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2 F to the CU 3 F. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. On P unit 2F that received it, the previous last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m, and on the P unit 2F inside (specifically, delivery control board 17F) the last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 Are not matched (mismatched), it can be determined that the status information response transmitted last from P unit 2F to CU3F before communication disconnection has not reached CU3F. In this case, the P-table 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, and turns the counting request state OFF. That is, the P-base 2F cancels the counting request transmitted immediately before the power interruption, and maintains the number of gaming balls = 500 at this time. In addition, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2F sends a recovery response, which is a response, back to the CU 3F.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). Since the CU3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. In addition, CU3F processes last time game stand information received from P stand 2F, updates last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In the P platform 2F that has received it, CU3F is notified of the unreported gaming machine information (number of gaming balls = 500) by the state information response. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 500 as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

<< Abnormal sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response has not been reached due to the power off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing another example of processing when there is a power failure, a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the count response from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine has not arrived yet. In particular, a sequence for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery is coincident with the count response not reaching (the command of the count response from the CU3F to the P unit 2F not reached) due to power off or communication line disconnection. A diagram is shown.

  In FIG. 62, the initial number of balls held is 0, and the number of gaming balls is 500. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the serial number = n, the counting serial number = m, and the counting response = OFF to the P-unit 2F. Thereafter, in the P platform 2F, the count button 28F is pressed to transmit a count request to the CU 3F. Specifically, P stand 2F sends back to CU3F a response of a status information response including serial number = n, gaming ball number = 500, counting serial number m + 1, counting ball number = 100, counting serial number m + 1 and counting request = ON. . In addition, in the P platform 2F, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100 and the counted serial number = m + 1 are notified to CU3F, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time, updated data and counting request state ON Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 F executes processing for adding the number of counting balls to the number of balls having balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition processing can not be performed. For this reason, the CU 3 F transmits a command of a status information request including the counting serial number = m and the counting response = OFF (because of the counting abnormal state). However, after receiving the command of the status information request, the P-unit 2F is powered off and the operation is stopped. Therefore, the P-unit 2F can not receive the command of the status information request from the CU 3F. That is, the count response from the CU 3 F is not reached for the P-table 2 F.

  Since the P unit 2 F is stopped, the CU 3 F can not receive a response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission, and thus retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 F detects disconnection of the communication line by not being able to receive a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  After that, the power failure is restored in the P-unit 2F, and the P-unit 2F starts operation. When P stand 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between CU 3 F and P stand 2 F, and information including main chip ID and payout tip ID is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Ru. CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, inquires whether main chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned . If it is registered properly, it will be an appropriate authentication result.

  After the authentication sequence, the counting history sequence shown in FIG. 53 is started, and when the counting history request command is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F, the counting history data stored in the P base 2 F is transmitted to the CU 3 F . After the counting history sequence, the CU 3 F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1 and the previous last transmission counting serial number = m to the P-unit 2 F. That is, the CU 3 F requests the P base 2 F to notify of recovery information. In the P unit 2F that received it, the previous last transmission counting sequence number of the received recovery request = m (not updated as "m" because of counting abnormality) and the P unit 2F inside (specifically, the payout control) Since the previous last transmission counting serial number = m + 1 backed up on the substrate 17F does not match (mismatch), the status information response transmitted last from the P unit 2F to the CU3F before the communication disconnection reaches the CU3F It can be judged that it is not done. In this case, the P-table 2F does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, turns the counting request state OFF, and decrements the last transmission serial number in the previous time by one (-1). At this time, the P-table 2F cancels the counting request before the power interruption and keeps the number of gaming balls = 500. In addition, based on the received recovery request command, the P-unit 2F sends a recovery response, which is a response, back to the CU 3F.

  The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P base 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute check processing. This first check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (a). Since the CU3F does not perform the addition recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. In addition, CU3F processes last time game stand information received from P stand 2F, updates last transmission serial number last time, and backs up the said data. When the CU 3 F transmits a communication start request command to the P-unit 2 F, the counting serial number is cleared to “0” (initial value). In response to the communication start request, the P-unit 2F transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3 F. After receiving the communication start request, the P unit 2 F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting serial number to “0” (initial value).

  When the communication with the P-unit 2F is started, the CU 3 F transmits, to the P-unit 2 F, a status information request including the serial number = 3. In the P platform 2F that has received it, CU3F is notified of the unreported gaming machine information (number of gaming balls = 500) by the state information response. Specifically, it includes transmission serial number = 3 and the number of gaming balls = 500 as a status information response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response performs a second check process to check whether the number of gaming balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later based on FIG. 66 (b).

<< Addition request error >>
Next, the process of the addition request abnormality will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of processing when a game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending / ball-dropping and ball dispensing. In particular, a sequence diagram for explaining the processing in the case where the addition result of the game balls at the time of the ball lending, the ball dispensing, and the ball dispensing is abnormal is shown.

  In FIG. 63, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 F transmits a command of the state information request including the serial number = n, the game ball addition request = OFF, and the addition serial number = m to the P base 2 F. In response to this, the P-platform 2F returns a response to the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 50 and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3F. In addition, since the counting request included in the response of the state information response is OFF (not shown), the counting serial number is transmitted to the CU 3 F without being counted up while the counting number is m.

  After that, the player presses the ball withdrawal button. Therefore, the CU3F determines consumption of balls and balls, and transmits a command of state information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to P-base 2F Then, the information (number of added balls = 125 balls) obtained by converting the balls / pools into the game balls is notified. At that time, the CU 3 F backs up the data of the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of gaming balls before update) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175, and the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding the game balls in P platform 2F. Therefore, P unit 2F receives the command of state information request of CU3F, serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = NG and addition serial number = m + 1. A response of the status information response including is sent back to CU3F. The P-base 2F notifies the CU 3 F of information on the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number of the previous time.

  CU3F which received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG, P the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 balls and the addition serial number = m + 1 Retransmit to 2F. Although CU3F is a retransmission of the command of the status information request, the serial number is updated and is incremented from n + 1 to n + 2, and the command of the status information request is retransmitted while the addition serial number is m + 1.

  However, P stand 2F remains in the state where abnormality has occurred in the process of adding the game balls. Therefore, P stand 2F receives the command of the state information request resent by CU3F, serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before addition of game balls), result of game ball addition = NG and addition serial number = The response of the status information response including m is sent back to CU3F.

  Furthermore, CU3F which has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG again is the status information request of which the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125 balls and the addition serial number = m + 1 Perform the second retransmission of the command to P 2F. Note that CU3F is a retransmission of the command of the status information request, but the serial number is updated and counts up from n + 2 to n + 3 and the command of the status information request is retransmitted with the addition serial number remaining at m + 1.

  The P stand 2F is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding the game balls. Therefore, P unit 2F receives the command of state information request resent by CU3F, serial number = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 50 (number of gaming balls before addition of gaming balls), result of gaming ball addition = NG, and addition serial number = The response of the status information response including m is sent back to CU3F.

  CU3F, even when resending the command of the state information request twice, when receiving the response of the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG from P platform 2F, the processing of adding the game ball in P platform 2F It is in the state of waiting for addition error recovery, assuming that an error occurs in the

  After the addition abnormality is recovered in P platform 2F, CU 3 F retransmits the command of the state information request including serial number = n + X, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls and addition serial number = m + 1 to P platform 2F . In P stand 2F, since addition error is restored, addition processing to the game ball is executed and the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before addition of game balls) + 125 (the number of addition balls) = 175. The last transmission addition serial number is updated to back up the data.

  After carrying out the addition processing to the game ball, the P-base 2F transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1 and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU3F. In response to this, the CU 3 F turns off the addition request state.

<Operation concerning addition serial number>
FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the operation of P platform 2F and CU 3F regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an addition serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 64 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 F and the P platform 2 F.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an addition serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. P base 2F which received the telegram of (1) sends back the telegram of (2) containing the same normal serial number n and the addition serial number m as the received telegram like (2).

  The CU 3 F that has received the telegram of (2) transmits the telegram of (3) (normal serial number n + 1, addition serial number m) in which one serial number is updated. P base 2F which received the telegram of (3) sends back the telegram of (4) including the same normal serial number n and additional serial number m as the received telegram.

  As described above, each time the CU 3 F receives a message from the P-unit 2 F, the CU 3 F normally updates one serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, P stand 2F does not usually renew a serial number. Also, the addition serial number is not updated unless an addition request occurs.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a storage ball withdrawal operation) is generated, the CU3F transmits a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated to P platform 2F (normal serial number n + 2) , Add serial number m + 1). The request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 F has already determined processing for the addition request (withdrawal of the card balance and withdrawal of the balls).

  The P base 2F receives the request message of (5), and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that the addition serial number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed by, for example, the payout control unit 171F of the P-table 2F. The payout control unit 171F determines whether or not the process of adding the game balls is possible on the side of the P-platform 2F. The case where the addition process of the game ball is not possible is, for example, the case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, the acceptance message of the two messages of (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, the rejection message of the two messages of (6) is transmitted. In the consent message, the addition serial number is the addition serial number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition serial number is set to the addition serial number m included in the message transmitted and received one before the (6). The normal serial number is n + 2, which is included in the request message of (5), for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 F includes an area for backing up and storing the added serial number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backing up and storing the normal serial number included in the received telegram. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323F of CU3F. The CU control unit 323F of the CU 3F that has received the message of (6) compares and determines the addition serial number stored in the backup with the addition serial number included in the message of (6). As a result, if the stored add sequence number and the add sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the added serial number sent is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request is rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 64 shows the case where the request message does not reach P platform 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2F waits for the telegraphic message arrival from the CU 3 F, no telegraphic message is transmitted from the P base 2 F to the CU 3 F. After transmitting the request message of (5) ', the CU 3 F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms), and resends the same request message (5) ′ ′ because there is no response from the P base 2F.

<Operation concerning counting serial number>
FIG. 65 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the operation of platform P 2 F and CU 3 F regarding counting serial numbers. When the counting request is not generated, the telegram including the normal serial number and the counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG. 65 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 F and the P base 2 F.

  In (1), a message including the normal sequence number n and the counting sequence number m is transmitted from the CU 3 F to the P base 2 F. P base 2F which received the telegram of (1) sends back the telegram of (2) including the same normal serial number n and counting serial number m as the received telegram like (2).

  The CU 3 F that has received the telegram of (2) transmits the telegram of (3) (normal serial number n + 1, counting serial number m) in which one serial number is updated. As described above, each time the CU 3 F receives a message from the P-unit 2 F, the CU 3 F normally updates one serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, P stand 2F does not usually renew a serial number. Also, the counting serial number is not updated unless a counting request occurs.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) occurs, a request message of (4) in which one counting serial number is updated is transmitted from P platform 2F to CU 3 F (normal serial number n + 1, counting serial number m + 1 ). The request message includes data in which the counting request bit is turned ON. The P-table 2F is not executing the counting process at this stage.

  P unit 2F receives the request message of (4), and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting serial number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether to accept this counting request. This determination is performed by, for example, the CU control unit 323F of CU3F. The CU control unit 323F determines whether or not the counting process (the process of adding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, the case in the middle of the process (wagon service etc.) using balls.

  When the request is accepted, the consent message of the two telegrams of (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, the denial telegram of the two telegrams of (5) is transmitted. In the consent message, the counting serial number is the counting serial number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection telegram, the counting serial number is set to the counting serial number m included in the telegram transmitted and received one before the (4). The normal serial number has been updated from the request message of (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P-table 2F has an area for backing up and storing the counting serial number included in the immediately preceding transmission message and the normal serial number. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F of the P-table 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P-unit 2F that has received the message of (5) compares and determines the counting serial number stored in the backup with the counting serial number included in the message of (5). As a result, if the stored counting serial number and the counting serial number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request is rejected.

  (4) 'of FIG. 65 shows the case where the requested message has not reached P platform 2F due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3 F waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message of (3), and resends the same message (3) because there is no response from the P-unit 2F. The P-series 2F that has received the telegram of (3) that has been retransmitted has the normal serial number included in the telegram of n + 1, and normally transmits the serial number even though the request telegram of (4) 'has been sent earlier. Since it has not changed, it is determined that the request message of (4) 'has not arrived. Then, the P-table 2F retransmits the same request message (4) ′ ′ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number (addition serial number, counting serial number) different from the normal serial number is included in the message and transmitted. These request sequence numbers are added and updated when the communication partner is requested to perform operations such as addition request and counting request. Otherwise, addition and update are not performed even if transmission and reception of a message are performed.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated each time a message is sent from the CU 3 F regardless of the presence or absence of a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is mutually updated in both CU 3 F and P 2 F You may operate.).

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, although it can be determined using the serial number included in the received telegram from the other party, whether the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, is the received telegram indicating an acceptance telegram indicating request acceptance? It can not be specified until it is a denial message indicating rejection of request.

  However, as described above, the request message having the updated request sequence number is transmitted using the request sequence number such as the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number as in the present embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response thereto. When a telegram including the same request serial number as that of is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, but also whether the telegram sent back from the other party is an acceptance telegram Can identify. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request telegram includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned ON, the received telegram is also the acceptance telegram even when this data is determined. It can identify whether it is a rejection message or not. However, it is possible to delete such a request bit from the message by using the request sequence number. As a result, the message data amount can be reduced, and the process of determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In the present embodiment, although the update value for the request serial number when the request occurs is +1, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, or -2 are adopted. May be

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323F will be described based on FIGS. 66 (a), (b), and 67. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a). At step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 300, it is determined whether or not there is storage of gaming machine information. This is to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is included in the recovery response transmitted from P platform 2F, and in the case of FIGS. 54 and 55 described above, the gaming machine information (specifically, Since the last time the game table information is included, the determination of YES is made by the SF 300. If it is determined that the gaming machine information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of the gaming machine information, the control proceeds to SF301, and the additional balls included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, the previous gaming machine information) has a predetermined threshold value. It is determined whether it is N1 or more. This threshold N1 is the maximum addition number (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of a big hit) of the game ball accompanying the prize during one cycle (200 ms) of the state information request and the state information response between the CU3F and the P platform 2F. The number is set to a value slightly larger than the number 120 (for example, 125). Therefore, in the normal case, the received added ball number should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the fact that the added number of balls is larger than the threshold N1 means that the gaming machine information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to a fraud etc. being performed on the P base 2F while offline There is a possibility that it has been sent to CU3F. In that case, the control proceeds to SF 304 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hole server 801F to the effect that an error has occurred. (In this case, an error notification may be issued by the hole server 801F). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801F, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to SF 305, and the CU control unit 323F waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control section 323F stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and when the reset signal is input, CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 42).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in SF301 and SF303, the information stored in the CU3F side is that the CU3F or P-base 2F is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection and the communication is restored thereafter. And the recovery process may be due to the fact that the information transmitted from the P-unit 2F is completely inconsistent. Even if it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be judged as an anomaly, so that it is possible to release the reset waiting state by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and make it intervene by artificial judgment by a game arcade clerk To be able to respond properly.

  On the other hand, when the determination of NO is made by SF301, the control proceeds to SF302, and the number of additional balls received from P is added to the number of gaming balls stored in the CU control section 323F and An operation of subtracting R1 which is the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from P platform 2F is appropriate, the latest number of played balls R1 is calculated using the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls. It is calculated. Next, the difference between the calculated R1-received game ball number, ie, the difference between R1 and the received game ball number, is calculated by SF303, and it is determined whether the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. A judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is equal to or more than this threshold N2, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed in the same manner as described above, and the control proceeds to SF304 or later as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the number of received game balls is an appropriate value, and the number of received game balls is determined as the number of new game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the second check process will be described based on FIG. 66 (b). The number of added balls in the gaming machine information (specifically, the current gaming machine information) included in the status information response from P platform 2F sent in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is predetermined. It is judged by SF 310 whether or not the threshold value N3 or more is satisfied. The number of added balls received is from when the P unit last transmitted the status information response to the CU3F until the power is turned off at the P unit or until the P unit detects the communication line cut and the game is stopped. The fluctuation amount of the number of added balls in such a relatively short limited period does not become so large, and falls within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is set as the threshold N3. Then, when the number of added balls received is equal to or more than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to SF 314 and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error occurs in the hole server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification may be performed by the hole server 801F). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801F, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to SF 315, and the CU control unit 323F waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control section 323F stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and when the reset signal is input, CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, when the determination of NO is made by SF310, the control proceeds to SF311 to add the number of added balls to the number of gaming balls stored by the CU control section 323F and to subtract the number of received balls Then, an operation to calculate R2 is performed. Here, "the number of stored game balls" as described above refers to the number of game balls received from P platform 2F when the determination of NO is made by SF 303, as described above. Then, it is judged by SF 312 whether or not the difference between R2 and the number of gaming balls received from P platform 2F is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold N4. Originally, R2 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is greater than or equal to this threshold N4, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed in the same manner as described above, and the control proceeds to SF 314 or later as described above.

  When the determination of NO is made by SF 312, the control proceeds to SF 313, and CU control unit 323F stores the number of gaming balls received from P platform 2F as the number of gaming balls of the initial value, and Control ends.

  After this processing of SF313 is performed, transmission and reception of normal status information request and status information response are performed between the CU3F and the P base 2F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F determines the initial value by SF313. With the number of gaming balls stored as the number of gaming balls as an initial value, the current number of gaming balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from P platform 2F based on the current number of gaming balls It is determined whether or not the difference with the number of coming game balls exceeds the predetermined number of error balls (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, it is judged as abnormal, and the above-mentioned SF304, SF305, SF314, SF315 Similar control is performed.

  Next, control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. Immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P-unit 2F, the CU control unit 323F executes this third check process (see FIGS. 56, 58, and 59).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls according to the game ball addition request according to the P game 2F despite the CU 3 F outputting the addition request of the number of game balls to the P machine 2 F The addition recovery of the number of game balls is performed when the addition process of is not performed. Then, with the recovery response 2 sent from the P-unit 2F to the CU 3F, the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed is notified. The CU control unit 323F determines, by SF 320, whether the recovery result is a process failure. Process NG, that is, when the addition recovery is not properly performed, the control proceeds to SF324, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, and an error occurs in the hole server 801F. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to that effect (in this case, error notification may be performed by the hole server 801F). In place of or in addition to the hall server 801F, control may be performed to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, control proceeds to SF 325, and the CU control unit 323F waits for reset. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control section 323F stops the control until the reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320F by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, and when the reset signal is input, CU The control unit 323F is reset and returns to the same state as power on (see FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, when the recovery result is the processing OK, the control proceeds to SF 321, and the CU control unit 323F adds the number of added balls transmitted to the P base 2F to the currently stored game number. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of added balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU3F is normally performed in the P base 2F, so the number of added balls is added to the number of game balls and the normal game balls at the current time It is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control proceeds to SF 322, and an arithmetic operation is performed to calculate R3 by adding the number of added balls transmitted from P platform 2F to the number of gaming balls after the addition and subtracting the number of subtracted balls. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game table information (specifically, the previous game table information) transmitted from P platform 2F as a recovery response, and the previous game platform information is included in the recovery response. If not, the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, it is judged by SF323 whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by the CU3F is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are habits of the same value, and the difference is a mean of zero. However, with the progress of control on the CU side and P side during the game, an error ball may be generated between the two. The error balls (for example, five pieces) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is equal to or greater than this threshold N2, the possibility of the occurrence of a fraud is assumed as described above, and the control proceeds to SF 324 and later as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the number of received game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the number of received game balls is an appropriate value, and the number of received game balls is determined as the number of new game balls. As CU, the CU control unit 323F stores it.

  As described above, the previous game information is transmitted first as game information from the P platform 2F to the CU3F, and then the current game information is transmitted this time, so that both game information can be distinguished on the CU3F side. In order to be transmitted, the CU control unit 323F can determine the suitability of each of the two pieces of gaming machine information. As a result, for example, the game ball number data in the previous game table information sent from the P platform 2F is not to be significantly different from the game ball number data currently stored by the CU control unit 323F, and For example, the game ball number data in the current game table data to be sent thereafter is also not so much different from the game ball number data in the previous game machine information received by the CU 3 F. If there is a large difference in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is improperly padded.

  Temporarily, when the sum total data which totaled the last game table data and this time game data are collectively transmitted to P3F from CU2F, compared with the case where the last time game table data and this time game data are individually distinguished. Therefore, only rough judgment can be made, and it becomes difficult to judge fraud accordingly. In order to prevent such inconveniences, the game console data is transmitted in two steps so that both data can be distinguished in the CU control section 323F, and it becomes possible to finely distinguish abnormality of each game console data, which is abnormal It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after the propriety of the number of added balls is first determined, if it is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls, and the number is determined. The number of gaming balls sent is compared with the number of gaming balls sent from P platform 2F to determine whether the number of gaming balls sent is appropriate or not, but it is simply transmitted from P platform 2F The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3 F to determine whether the game ball is appropriate or not.

  Furthermore, CU3F is the number of final game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as "the number of CU game balls") and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from P platform 2F (hereinafter "P" "The last game ball number in the table last time" and the number of game balls in the latest game table information received from the P platform 2F (hereinafter referred to as "the number of P latest game balls") The determination may be made. As a specific example of comparison and determination among three parties, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number of P last game balls, and if correct, the number of P last game balls and the number of P latest game balls are compared and determined. Do. Alternatively, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number P of the previous game balls, and if it is correct, the number of CU gaming balls is compared with the number of P latest gaming balls. Furthermore, the number of P previous game balls and the number P latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if correct, the number of CU game balls and the number P last game balls are compared and determined, and further the number of CU game balls and P The table latest game ball number is compared and determined.

  The first to third check processes described above are preferably performed when the CU 3 F or the P base 2 F is not replaced (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication interruption, it is common for the number of game balls on the CU side and P side to be largely different in recovery processing, which is why the above-mentioned first This is because an error is determined as a result of check processing to third check processing. Therefore, control may be performed so that the first check processing to the third check processing are not performed in the recovery processing at the time of communication recovery when the CU 3 F or the P base 2 F is replaced after the communication disconnection. Specifically, when the difference between the previous last transmission sequence number transmitted from P base 2F as the recovery response and the previous latest transmission sequence number stored in CU control section 323F is 2 or more, CU3F or P base 2F is The CU control unit 323F determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323F does not perform the first check processing to the third check processing.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether the CU3F or the P unit 2F is replaced, the CU3F may be controlled not to check the previous game data and the current game data at the time of recovery. In this way, it is possible to prevent the annoyance of the check abnormality determination caused by the replacement of the CU 3 F or the P platform 2 F.

<Operation regarding request serial number>
Next, the method of updating the serial numbers described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 40 to 65 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, the method of updating the serial number as described below may be applied to the communication sequence shown in FIG. 40 to FIG.

<< Update both serial number and request serial number >>
FIG. 68 is a conceptual diagram for illustrating the operation of the P-unit 2F and the CU 3F regarding the request serial number. One of the apparatus A and the apparatus B shown in FIG. 68 is the P base 2F, and the other is CU3F. A device that generates a request for the other party is A device, and a device that receives the request from A device is B device.

  When the A device is CU3F and the B device is P platform 2F, the request serial number is an addition serial number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is P platform 2F and the B device is CU3F, the request serial number is a counting serial number, and the request is a game ball counting request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, these two cases are conceptualized and explained. While there is no request for the device B, the device A transmits a message in which the request sequence number m is not updated as in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated each time a message is sent. Device B receives this and sends back a telegram as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request serial number is not updated as m.

  As long as no request occurs in the A device, as in (1) and (2), while updating the normal serial number, both sides transmit the telegram. During this time, the normal sequence number included in the telegram received from the other party is checked to determine whether the telegram transmitted immediately before has reached the other party.

  When a request occurs in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which a request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned on.

  The device B that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, the CU 3 F determines whether it is possible to add balls at the CU 3 F side. Alternatively, if it is an addition request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding game balls is possible on the side of the P platform 2F. The case where addition processing of balls is not possible is, for example, the case in the middle of processing (wagon service etc.) using balls. Further, the case where the addition process of the game balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the game balls have already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  If the request is accepted, an acceptance message in which the request serial number is updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A-device, as described above (4). On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described under (4), a rejection message not updated with the request serial number being m + 1 (also referred to as a rejection telegram; the same applies hereinafter) to the A device Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in each case.

  The A-apparatus has storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The A-device which has received the message of (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means with the request sequence number included in the message of (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (in this example, m + 1), it is determined that the request is rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (in this example, m + 2) (in other words, , If the request serial number sent is one in advance), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request serial number is further updated by one, and a message including the specific request value (the number of counting balls and the number of adding balls) is transmitted to the B-device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B-device.

  The case where the request message of (3) does not reach the B apparatus due to noise or other factors is shown in (3) 'of FIG. In this case, the B-device determines that there is no response when a predetermined standby time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the telegram of (2) was transmitted, and retransmits the telegram of (2). As a result, the message of (2) arrives at the device A that has transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A transmits the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to it does not correspond to either the request acceptance or the request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message Because of the delayed request sequence number), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. In addition, it is also possible to make such determination using the direction of a normal serial number. That is, while the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, so it can be determined that the request message has not arrived based on such a situation.

  If the device A determines that the request message has not arrived, it resends the request message of (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the request serial number is included in the message and transmitted separately from the normal serial number. This request sequence number is started to be updated upon requesting the communication partner to perform an operation such as addition request or counting request, and is stopped at the end of the request operation or upon rejection of the request. Other than that, even if telegrams are sent and received, they are not updated.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated each time a message is exchanged regardless of the presence or absence of a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only in one of the A device and the B device, The other may send back the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  Therefore, in the case of a normal serial number, although it can be determined using the serial number included in the received telegram from the other party, whether or not the transmitted request telegram has arrived at the other party, but the received telegram is an acceptance telegram indicating request acceptance. It can not be specified whether it is a rejection message indicating rejection of the request.

  However, as described above, when the request serial number is used as in the present embodiment, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived to the other party according to the request serial number, but also the telegram sent back from the other party is accepted. It can be specified whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request telegram includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or counting request bit) is turned ON, the received telegram is also the acceptance telegram even when this data is determined. It can identify whether it is a rejection message or not. However, it is possible to delete such a request bit from the message by using the request sequence number. As a result, the message data amount can be reduced, and the process of determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< update only one of the serial number and request serial number >>
FIG. 69 is a diagram for describing a modified example of the operation of the P base 2F and the CU 3F with respect to a normal serial number and a request serial number. This modification differs from the example shown in FIG. 68 in that the normal serial number is not updated when the request serial number is updated.

  That is, in this modification, of the normal serial number and the request serial number, when the request is not generated, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the update of the normal serial number is stopped and only the request serial number is updated. After that, when the series of processing for the request ends, or when the rejection telegram for the request is sent, the update of the request sequence number is stopped and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  Therefore, in the message exchange before the request occurrence shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 69, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, but the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message of (3) transmitted upon the occurrence of a request, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message of (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number being n + 1.

  Even in this case, the A-device that has received the message of (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  Also, as shown in (3) ', even when the message of (2) is retransmitted from the device B without the request message reaching the device B, the device A reaches the request message based on the request serial number. It can be determined that it did not do.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal serial number is stopped from the time when the request occurs to the end of processing for the request, there is no problem because the request serial number takes over the function of the normal serial number during that time It does not occur. In addition, during the period, there is also an effect that the process of updating the normal serial number or checking the normal serial number becomes unnecessary.

<Origin of registration (update) and deletion (clear) of recovery information>
In the abnormal sequence shown in FIGS. 52 to 62, the sequence for performing the recovery process and recovering the system using the recovery information stored in the P-unit 2F or CU 3F has been described. The recovery information used for the recovery process includes, for example, "previous final transmission serial number", "previous final transmission addition serial number", "previous final transmission counting serial number", "number of requested counting balls", "card ID", "card insertion""Time","storecode","SC substrate ID", "game ball information", "game information", "number of game balls", "ball unit price" and the like.

  These pieces of recovery information are newly registered or updated, and the timing (trigger) to be stored in the P-unit 2F or CU 3F is different in each information. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining a trigger of registration (updating) and erasure (clearing) of recovery information. The timing (trigger) of registration or update of each recovery information will be described with reference to FIG. The “previous final transmission sequence number” is newly registered or updated when P base 2 F transmits a response of the status information response to CU 3 F (during status information response transmission). The “previous final transmission addition serial number” is the CU state Bit3 = “1” (at the time of game ball addition request) included in the command of the state information request transmitted from the CU3F, and the P unit 2F generates a response of the state information response CU3F Are newly registered or updated when transmitting to (when transmitting a status information response).

  The "previous final transmission counting serial number" and "number of requested counting balls" are Bit4 = "1" (when counting is requested) of gaming machine status 1 included in the response of the status information response that P unit 2F transmits to CU3F. It is newly registered or updated when transmitting a response of the status information response to the CU 3 F (during status information response transmission). “Card ID” and “card insertion time” are newly registered or updated when P base 2F transmits a response of a card insertion response to CU 3 F (at the time of card insertion response transmission).

  “Store code” and “SC board ID” are sent when P stand 2F transmits a response for card insertion response to CU 3 F (card insertion response sent) or when P stand 2 F receives a command of counting history request from CU 3 F It is newly registered or updated (when counting history is requested). “Game ball information”, “game information”, “game ball number” and “ball unit price” are newly registered when P base 2 F transmits a response of status information response to CU 3 F (during status information response transmission) or It will be updated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the timing (trigger) of erasure (clearing) of each piece of recovery information will be described. “Previous final transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission counting serial number” and “number of requested counting balls” are when P stand 2F transmits a response to communication start response to CU3F (at communication start response transmission time) or P stand 2F When an instruction to clear the provided RAM is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM), the information is erased. In the "previous final transmission addition serial number", the information is erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM).

  "Card ID" and "card insertion time" are when P stand 2F transmits a response of card return response to CU 3 F (card return response transmission) or when an instruction to clear RAM provided in P stand 2 F is issued The information is erased (when the RAM clear is instructed). In addition, “card ID” and “card insertion time” are when P stand 2F detects a shop code mismatch and sends a response to the communication start response to CU3F (at the time of communication start response transmission when a shop mismatch is detected) Information is erased.

  The “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” erase information when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P-unit 2F is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM). “Game ball information” and “Game information” are sent when P platform 2F transmits a response to communication start response to CU 3 F (at the time of communication start response transmission) or when an instruction to clear RAM provided in P platform 2 F is issued. The information is erased (when the RAM clear is instructed). The "number of game balls" and the "ball unit price" are erased when an instruction to clear the RAM provided to the P-table 2F is issued (at the time of instruction to clear the RAM).

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC 325aF. First, the encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipping key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a real authentication key, a temporary authentication key, a valid key (commercial) , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key). The board shipping key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of the communication test message before shipping. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the time of the first communication with the hall server, and stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325 b F generates a substrate initial key from embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The communication for authentication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (limited operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the substrate initial key mode, as described above, since it is necessary to properly communicate with the hall server at least once to obtain the substrate initial key, security is secured.

  Here, the "limited period" is, for example, a limited period of 2 days. In this way, by enabling time-limited operation, even if key exchange with the key management server can not be performed immediately after introducing the system to the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the introduction of the system. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the fixed period in one day, for example, every morning from 9 o'clock to 17 o'clock.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned board | substrate initial key mode has provided the restriction | limiting which enables the communication for authentication which used the board | substrate initial key for a limited period, this invention is not limited to this, The amount of money which can be used You may limit the remaining amount of card, or cash). Alternatively, the game may be forcibly terminated to control the gaming machine to the inactivated state when the number of times of variation of the symbol in the variable display device reaches a predetermined number. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be terminated to control the gaming machine to be in a disabled state. In addition, it is possible to allow only the game by inserting cash and prevent the game using the remaining amount of the card from being performed, or to limit the game to only the game using balls.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received from the key management server as part of the board security information. By performing authentication communication using the substrate authentication key, the communication mode (substrate authentication key mode) is switched from timed operation using the substrate initial key to permanent operation (normal operation). The board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  The CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server and the SC 325b F transmits the valid key to the communication control IC 325aF for both the timed operation using the substrate initial key and the permanent operation using the substrate authentication key. This is realized by enabling communication between P units and CUs by setting for.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325 b F from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325 b F. Also in the communication control IC 325 a F, the same as the SC 325 b F Is generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. The main authentication key may be acquired from the key management server or the like. Also, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from the key management server or the like. Furthermore, while acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data, and the real authentication key is generated from the first data and the second data. It may be generated.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and during the period until the main authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, 2 days) elapses), SC 325 bF and It is used for cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. Encrypted communication (provisional authentication key mode) using this temporary authentication key is permitted (limited operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325 b F and the communication control IC 325 a F store the temporary authentication key in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that the SC 325bF receives via the CU control unit 323F at the time of the first communication with the hall server, and transmits (sets) the communication control IC 325aF. Communication with P units becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P units.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for a pair of gaming machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325 b F using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date and time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for a pair of gaming machines.

  Note that, even if the key described above has a configuration in which key data is embedded as it is in each part, information for generating key data is stored in each part, and the information May be used to generate key data.

  Next, a method of acquiring an encryption key and a method of performing encryption communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325 b F acquires a valid key via the CU control unit 323 F at the time of the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325 b F can communicate with the P units by transmitting (setting) the acquired valid key to the communication control IC 325 a F. The CU control unit 323F receives the substrate initial key at the time of the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325 b F generates a substrate initial key from embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325 b F performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323 F using the acquired substrate initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323 F in a timely manner using the substrate initial key. In addition, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F at the time of power on returns the unified shop code for identifying the game arcade in which the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, authentication is performed using a substrate maker code stored as initial information in both. The substrate maker code is a code that specifies the maker that manufactured the security board 325F. Exchange of the substrate connection request and the substrate connection response is performed on condition that the authentication using the substrate maker code is successful (see FIG. 77). The unified store code is included in the substrate connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the substrate connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests substrate security information from the key management server, and the substrate security information is included in the substrate security information by receiving the substrate security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server. Get board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired substrate authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the substrate authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after acquiring the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  This board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F may acquire the predetermined first data from the key management server or the like. The predetermined second data may be generated, and the substrate authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325 b F performs encrypted communication with the communication control IC 325 a F using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC performs encrypted communication with the CU control unit using the substrate authentication key, thereby decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server with the temporary authentication key, and inquires about the substrate inquiry number. When the inquired substrate inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipping, and is generated from the update information as in the case of the SC 325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1, and by performing communication with the CU control unit thereafter using the communication key 1, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible. It becomes. Further, the SC receives notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC by setting the valid key to the communication control IC, and performs communication with the communication control IC thereafter using the communication key 2 Thus, business telegraphic communication with the gaming machine becomes possible.

<Command and Response Transmitted and Received Between CU Control Unit and SC>
Next, communication in the CU 3 F shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325F will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 72 and 73, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  72 and 73 show the transmission direction and whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response and the names of transmission information and their outlines.

  First, a command named substrate connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board connection request command requests the SC 325 b F to connect to the game machine (P unit 2 F). The SC 325 bF transmits a response named “substrate connection response” to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the response of the substrate connection request.

  The CU control unit 323F transmits a substrate shipping key request command to the SC 325bF. The command of the substrate shipping key request is for requesting the SC 325 b F for a substrate shipping key. A response of the board shipping key response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the board shipping key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key.

  The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board maker code is a code for specifying the maker that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF. The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the substrate maker code. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication information of the substrate serial ID.

  The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the substrate serial ID. A response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication information of the substrate maker code.

  The command of the substrate serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the substrate serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the substrate serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication information of the board serial ID.

  A command of substrate initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the substrate initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the substrate initial key. A response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate initial key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the substrate initial key.

  A command of substrate initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board initial key. A response of the substrate initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate initial key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the substrate initial key.

  The command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the substrate authentication key.

  The command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the substrate authentication key.

  The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the substrate authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board shipping key.

  The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325 b F to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board shipping key.

  A command of version information notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The version information notification command is to notify the SC 325 b F of the version of the board authentication key. The response of the version information response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of this version information response is to notify the CU control section 323F that the version information has been received.

  A command of substrate authentication result notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the substrate authentication result notification notifies the SC 325 b F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323 F and the SC 325 b F. A response of the substrate authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A command of security substrate inquiry instruction notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification requests the SC 325 b F for security substrate inquiry information. The response of the security substrate inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A command of security substrate information notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the security substrate information notification is for notifying the SC 325 b F of the security substrate information. The response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the security board information result is to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  The command of the counter information request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the counter information request is for requesting counter information from the SC 325 bF. The response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the counter information response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  The CU control unit 323F transmits a communication key request command to the SC 325bF. The communication key request command requests the SC 325 b F for a communication key. A response of a communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the communication key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  The command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification requests the SC 325 b F for inquiry information of the gaming machine chip. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is to notify the CU control section 323F of inquiry information of the gaming machine chip.

  The command of gaming machine chip information notification is transmitted from CU control unit 323F to SC 325bF. The command of the gaming machine chip information notification is for notifying the SC 325 b F of the collation result of the gaming machine chip information. The response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the gaming machine chip information result is to notify the CU control section 323F that the gaming machine chip collation result has been received. The notification result included in the response of the gaming machine chip information result is the gaming machine chip information notification result by combining the collation result of the main control chip and the collation result of the payout control chip. Therefore, the gaming machine chip information notification result indicates that the verification result of the main control chip is OK in the case of "0x00" and the verification result of the payout control chip is also OK in the case of "0x01". "OK" indicates that the result of collation of the dispensing control chip is not acquired yet, "0x02" indicates that the result of collation of the main control chip is not acquired and the result of collation of the dispensing control chip is OK, "0x03" In this case, it is indicated that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired yet, and the collation result of the delivery control chip is also not acquired. Further, the gaming machine chip information notification result indicates that the verification result of the main control chip is OK and the payout control chip is the verification result of NG in the case of “0x04”, and the verification result of the main control chip in the case of “0x05”. "NG" indicates that the check result of the dispensing control chip is OK, "0x07" indicates that the check result of the main control chip is NG, and the check result of the payout control chip is not yet acquired, "Ox08" It is indicated that the collation result of the main control chip is not acquired and the collation result of the delivery control chip is NG. As described above, the gaming machine chip information notification result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as information representing the collation result of the main control chip and the payout control chip individually. As described above, since the verification result of each of the main control chip and the payout control chip obtained from the key management server 800F is output as information representing individually, it is easy to determine which control means has not been verified. Can.

  A command of substrate state request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The substrate status request command requests the SC 325 b F to display the substrate status. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the CU control unit 323 F. The response of the substrate state response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and processing executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described based on FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, a process of starting up the power of the CU control unit 323F at the time of power on / hole installation will be described. This FIG. 74 shows a sequence when the CU 3 F is installed in the game arcade and power is first turned on, and in particular, a start-up sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the CU 3 F is powered on, the CU control unit 323 F and the SC 325 b F are activated. When CU3F is installed in the game arcade and power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323F sends the board authentication key A and the board authentication key A message authentication code (more specifically, from the hall server) from the host device. For example, a MAC key, etc. (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a MAC key) and a valid key (for commercial / P shipment) are acquired. Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control section 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the game arcade, and is installed in the key management center The encryption key is used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The substrate initial key A is decrypted using the substrate maker code, while the MAC key of the substrate initial key A is similarly decrypted using the substrate maker code. These decryptions are performed by a decryption method according to encryption methods such as DES (Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), and IDEA (International Data Encryption Algorithm).

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute a board maker code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and the authentication is OK when the substrate initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. The detailed processing of the substrate initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform security substrate information inquiry sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and when security substrate information can be acquired, the acquisition becomes OK. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes the board serial ID, the board authentication key, and the like. The detailed processing of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key downloaded from the key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325 aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a communication key exchange sequence using the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, and exchange the communication key for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform the communication key exchange sequence by using the substrate initial key as the encryption key, and generate the communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired by the substrate information acquisition sequence, but the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key timely when the substrate information can not be acquired. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence using the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, and make inquiry / notification of gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of a substrate information request to request the SC 325bF for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 bF sends back to the CU control unit 323 F a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323F performs processing according to the state of each board. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323F returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, it transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 F .

  When the CU control unit 323F receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be properly acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes P unit chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is sent to the CU control unit 323F.

  When the CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325bF. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the state is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b F transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323 F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. The business message communication with this gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is, as described above, timed communication, and is permitted only for a fixed period (for example, two days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (board initial key mode (board initial key operation)). If the fixed period (for example, 2 days) in this timed operation is over, the temporary operation is stopped, and the SC 325bF notifies the key management server of the over via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. Ru.

  After that, the CU3F sends a recovery request to the P-unit 2F, and the P-unit 2F sends a recovery response response (recovery response) including the last transmission sequence number of last time, the card ID under insertion last time, and the last card insertion time to CU3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and for normal start-up will be described. FIG. 75 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a start-up sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the CU 3 F is powered on, the CU control unit 323 F and the SC 325 b F are activated. When CU3F is installed in the game arcade and power is turned on for the first time, CU control unit 323F is a board serial ID key, board from the host device (specifically, via a hall server from a key management server) The MAC key of the authentication key version, the substrate authentication key A, and the substrate authentication key A is acquired. The substrate serial ID key is decrypted by the substrate initial key, the substrate initial key A is decrypted by using the substrate serial ID, and the MAC key of the substrate initial key A is similarly decrypted by using the substrate serial ID. Be done. These decryptions are performed by a decryption method in accordance with an encryption method such as DES, AES or IDEA.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute a substrate maker code authentication sequence, a substrate authentication key authentication sequence, and a security substrate information inquiry sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform the substrate authentication key authentication sequence using the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. The detailed processing of the substrate authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence using the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  If the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or if there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325b F executes authentication with the communication control IC 325aF. .

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a communication key exchange sequence by using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325 bF further acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325 aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence using the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, and make inquiry / notification of gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of a substrate information request to request the SC 325bF for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 bF sends back to the CU control unit 323 F a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323F performs processing according to the state of each board. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323F returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, it transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 F .

  When the CU control unit 323F receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be properly acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes P unit chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is sent to the CU control unit 323F.

  When the CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325bF. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the state is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b F transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323 F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. The communication at this time is a normal communication mode (substrate authentication key mode (substrate authentication key operation)) without restrictions such as the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, processing for turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and setting it up at the time of shipping will be described. This FIG. 76 shows the sequence at the time of factory shipment before CU3F is shipped to the game arcade, and in particular, the factory shipment start-up sequence using the substrate shipment key will be described. The said sequence is a process in CU control part 323F and SC325bF of the state which is not connected to a high-order apparatus at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the CU 3 F is powered on, the CU control unit 323 F and the SC 325 b F are activated. The CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute a substrate maker code authentication sequence and a substrate initial key authentication sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After the processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence using the substrate initial key as the encryption key. However, since CU3F is not yet installed in the game arcade because of the stage at the time of factory shipment, the CU control unit 323F can not acquire the substrate initial key from the hall server of the game arcade. The result is NG.

  After that, the CU control unit 323F requests the substrate shipment key request command to request the substrate shipment key used for the test of the security substrate 325F to the SC 325bF because the substrate initial key authentication sequence becomes authentication NG. Send to After receiving the substrate shipping key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits, to the CU control unit 323F, a response for a substrate shipping key response including the substrate shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC 325bF as the encryption key. The detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  If the substrate shipping key can be authenticated by the substrate shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a communication key exchange sequence using the substrate shipping key as the encryption key, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using random numbers and data of the current time. The method of generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the data at the current time, and any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between devices performing encrypted communication may be used. It is also good. The communication key exchange sequence is to exchange a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with the gaming machine to enable a game by the gaming machine, and the detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence using the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, and make inquiry / notification of gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence will be described later.

  After that, the CU 3 F makes a communication test request to the P base 2 F, and the P base 2 F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3 F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of a substrate information request to request the SC 325bF for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 bF sends back to the CU control unit 323 F a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323F performs processing according to the state of each board. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323F returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, it transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 F .

  When the CU control unit 323F receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be properly acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes P unit chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is sent to the CU control unit 323F.

  When the CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325bF. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the state is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b F transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323 F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can communicate only with the gaming machine and the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. The CU3F that has passed the communication test at the time of factory shipment is delivered to the game arcade, and the sequence at the time of the first power supply start-up is the hole installation start-up sequence described in FIG. The sequence is the normal start-up sequence described in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate maker code will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325b F, a command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the substrate maker code. In addition, since the board maker code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests the SC 325bF for a challenge code.

  The SC 325 b F that has received the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the substrate maker code, and notifies the CU control unit 323 F of the generated challenge code by a response of the substrate maker code authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the substrate maker code authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF with the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2. Specifically, the challenge code received using the substrate maker code as a key is encrypted to generate a response code.

  The SC 325bF receives the command of the substrate maker code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code matches by decrypting the response code with the substrate maker code as a key and extracting the challenge code) Suppose that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F by a response of the substrate maker code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a substrate maker code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, it is assumed that the check result is NG (incorrect). In that case, the authentication is repeated n times, and in the case of NG continuously n times, the SC 325 b F is in a non-response state (HALT), and the substrate authentication key and the real authentication key are cleared. After entering the non-response state (HALT), the SC 325 bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325 a F, and repairs will be performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of CU control unit specific information (unified store code, model number, current time), and transmits a substrate connection request command requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the command of the substrate connection request from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the address, and the current time, and when the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response to the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been received (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not match the previous unified store code, a response of a substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not received (NG) is sent back to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM A transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 74) which is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key while clearing the authentication key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a substrate connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the state of the substrate initial key mode which is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the substrate initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of the state of the board shipping key mode, which is a mode in which processing is performed using the key as the encryption key, authentication using the board shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 78 is a symbol representing one of them. The CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key for the SC 325bF, calculates an algorithm (for example, an H-MAC algorithm or the like using a hash function) with the MAC key, A command of substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 1 requesting authentication information is transmitted. Although the command of the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, it may be encrypted using the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key as the encryption key. The SC 325 b F that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or the board shipping key.

  The SC 325 b F that has received the command of substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the substrate initial key or substrate shipping key to the CU control unit 323 F, and uses the MAC key for H-MAC. It is calculated and sent back as a response of substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or the board shipping key.

  After that, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key for the SC 325bF, calculates H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication Send with 2 commands. The command of the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b F that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information to check the board initial key or the board shipping key to the CU control unit 323 F, and checks the MAC. Do. Then, the SC 325 b F returns an authentication result to the CU control unit 323 F in response to the substrate initial key / substrate shipping key authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires, from the SC 325bF, authentication log information such as a substrate initial key authentication result and a substrate shipping key authentication result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, processing of an authentication sequence of the substrate serial ID and the substrate authentication key will be described.

  First, in the state of the substrate authentication key mode in which communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is a mode in which processing is performed using the substrate authentication key as an encryption key, the CU control unit 323F authenticates the substrate serial ID to the SC 325bF. To send a command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 to request. In addition, since the substrate serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests the SC 325bF for a challenge code.

  The SC 325 b F that has received the command of the substrate serial ID authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the substrate serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323 F of the generated challenge code by a response of the substrate serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, the challenge code is encrypted using the board serial ID as a key to generate a response code), The generated response code is notified to the SC 325 b F by a command of substrate serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325 b F receives the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the response code is decoded using the board serial ID as a key to extract the challenge code), and the challenge code matches. For example, it is assumed that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F by a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. If the check result is NG, the SC 325 bF notifies the CU control unit 323 F of the check result by including the check result in the board authentication result notification and the authentication result in the board authentication result response. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a substrate serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  After that, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of version information notification to the SC 325bF in order to notify of version information of the board authentication key. The version information notification command is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b F having received the command of version information notification returns a response of version information response to notify the CU control unit 323 F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Although the response of the version information response is not encrypted, it may be encrypted using a substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  After that, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number of the authentication information with the substrate authentication key to the SC 325bF, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and executes the command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information. Send. In addition, although the command of the board | substrate authentication key authentication request 1 was encrypted by the board | substrate authentication key, you may encrypt using a board | substrate initial key or a board | substrate shipping key as an encryption key. In order to verify the board authentication key, the SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 decrypts the random number of the authentication information and checks the MAC.

  The SC 325b F receives the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1, encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F, calculates H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs board authentication key authentication Reply in response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the substrate authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 command to the SC 325bF. The command of the substrate authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to verify the board authentication key, the SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC for the CU control unit 323F. Then, the SC 325 bF returns an authentication result as a response to the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323 F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of substrate authentication result notification to the SC 325bF in order to notify the substrate authentication result. The command for substrate authentication result notification is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key. The command of substrate authentication result notification notifies the substrate serial ID authentication and the authentication result of the substrate authentication key to the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of substrate authentication result notification transmits a command of substrate authentication result response to notify the control result of substrate serial ID authentication and substrate authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The command of the substrate authentication result response is encrypted using the substrate authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a substrate authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining processing in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 80, first, CU control unit 323F transmits a command of security substrate inquiry instruction notification in order to request information for inquiring of the higher-level device from SC 325bF. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notice to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server), the SC 325bF receives the command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification and sends it. The response of the security board inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be sent back is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key using the board initial key or the board authentication key, and a key that the CU control unit 323F and the hall server can not decrypt The inquiry information is encrypted by the "key for secrecy". As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  The CU control unit 323F that receives the response of the security board inquiry result receives the information (substrate serial number and board serial number) of the security board 325F in the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query the inquiry information) and wait for a response from the higher-level device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF do not have to wait for a response from the host device, and perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of gaming machine chip information, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and execute necessary processing when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, upon receiving the inquiry result (substrate serial ID and substrate authentication key) of the security board information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the security board information. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of security substrate information notification including a substrate serial ID and a substrate authentication key which are inquiry results. The command of the security board information notification to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325 bF confirms the inquiry number, and sends a response of the security board information result in order to notify the CU control unit 323 F that the security board information notification command has been properly received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned may not be encrypted, but in the case of encryption, the board initial key or the board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A, and uses it as authentication key information at the next reset. In addition, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information of the substrate information inquiry and the substrate information notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to inquire gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. It should be noted that the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be sent may not be encrypted, but in the case of encryption, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. After that, since the SC 325 b F that has received the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification has completed the acquisition of the gaming machine chip information, CU control of the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result including the information of gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK Reply to part 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted by the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted by using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the CU control unit 323F receives a response of the result of the inquiry about the returned gaming machine chip, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 71). Inquires for gaming machine chip information and waits for a response from the host device. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the process of the next step (business message process with the gaming machine) without having a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, it is impossible to stop the operation of the gaming machine during that time, so the process of the next step without a response from the host device Execute (business message processing with the gaming machine). During the inquiry about gaming machine chip information, even if the reset operation (for example, the operation of the reset button (not shown) or the power re-input) is performed, the request for the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is not issued again.

  Thereafter, upon receiving the collation result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the collation result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of gaming machine chip information notification including the collation result. It should be noted that the command for notification of the result of checking the gaming machine chip collation to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b F returns a response to the gaming machine chip information result to notify the gaming machine maker code and the model code to the CU control unit 323 F when the collation result is OK after receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command. The response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF and a gaming machine chip information collation result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, processing of a sequence of substrate authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the CU 3 F is powered on, the CU control unit 323 F and the SC 325 b F are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute a substrate maker code authentication sequence and a substrate authentication key authentication sequence.

  The substrate maker code authentication sequence authenticates the substrate maker code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing of the substrate maker code authentication sequence, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform the substrate authentication key authentication sequence using the substrate authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, if the substrate authentication key authentication is an authentication NG, the SC 325 b clears the substrate authentication key information as an authentication error.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the substrate initial key as an encryption key.

  When the authentication of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, thereafter, the security substrate information inquiry sequence, the communication key exchange sequence, the gaming machine chip information inquiry as in the processing of the hole installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and the game machine and business message communication become possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325 b F notifies the key management server 800 F of an alarm of “substrate authentication key update abnormality” indicating that the authentication of the substrate authentication key sequence has become an authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining processing of a communication line disconnection (PIF) sequence. The communication line disconnection described with reference to FIG. 83 is a case in which the communication line between the P-unit 2F and the CU 3F via the PIF circuit 326F (see FIG. 39) is disconnected.

  First, the P base 2F and the CU 3F are in communication via the PIF circuit 326F. At this time, the P-unit 2F and the CU 3F encrypt information to be communicated using a communication key. Thereafter, a communication line disconnection between the P-unit 2F and the CU 3F occurs. The CU control unit 323F transmits a command of the status information request to the SC 325bF, but since a communication line between the P 2F and the CU 3F is disconnected, a response of the status information response to the status information request is returned from the SC 325bF. There is nothing to do. When the communication in which the response of the status information response to the status information request is not returned is continued n times, the CU control unit 323F sends a command of the substrate status request for requesting the status of the security board 325F and the P base 2F to the SC 325bF. Send. The command of the substrate state request to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the substrate status request command transmits, to the CU control unit 323F, a response of a substrate status response including information on the status of the security substrate 325F and the P platform 2F. The response of the substrate state response to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The information included in the substrate state response response includes the substrate state, error state, fraud detection state, installation change information, fraud detection information, and the like. For example, when a communication line disconnection occurs in communication via the PIF circuit 326F, Bit0 = "1" (PIF line disconnection) in the error state included in the response of the substrate state response. If the store or the like where the CU 3 F is installed is different, Bit 2 of the fraud detection state included in the response of the substrate state response becomes “1” (installation combination change detection). In addition, when connected to a game board development jig or a P unit 2F that has been connected to a development unit before connection, Bit3 = “1” in the fraud detection state included in the response of the board status response (illegal game machine Connection detection).

  As long as communication line disconnection continues to occur in communication via PIF circuit 326F, Command 0 for substrate status request transmission and Bit0 in error state for the substrate status request command = “1” (PIF line disconnection The response of the substrate state response including the information of) is repeated between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  When the communication line between P unit 2F and CU3F is restored via PIF circuit 326F, SC 325bF detects the restoration of the communication line, and an error state Bit0 = “0” in response to the transmitted substrate state request command. A response of a substrate state response including information of 0 ′ ′ (no PIF line disconnection) is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F acquires the gaming machine chip information of the connected P base 2F from the communication control IC 325aF. Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence using the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, and make inquiry / notification of gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number, a payout control chip number, and the like. The detailed processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence is as described above.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F transmits, to the SC 325bF, a command of a substrate information request to request the SC 325bF for the status of the security substrate and the gaming machine. The SC 325 bF sends back to the CU control unit 323 F a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = operational enable. When the operation of the security board is not possible, the CU control unit 323F performs processing according to the state of each board. Specifically, upon receiving a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable), the CU control unit 323F returns the process to the communication key exchange sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the communication key can not be generated normally in the communication key exchange sequence, it transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = communication key request (unusable) to the CU control unit 323 F .

  When the CU control unit 323F receives a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = P base chip inquiry request (unusable), the processing returns to the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the main control chip number and the payout control chip number can not be properly acquired in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the board state includes P unit chip inquiry request (unusable). The response of the substrate state response is sent to the CU control unit 323F.

  When the CU control unit 323F receives the response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable, the CU control unit 323F repeatedly transmits the substrate state request to the SC 325bF. That is, when the SC 325 b F determines that the state is not normal except for the communication key exchange sequence and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the SC 325 b F transmits a response of the substrate state response including the substrate state = unusable to the CU control unit 323 F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can communicate with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with this gaming machine, it becomes possible to play a game in the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. The communication at this time is a normal communication mode (substrate authentication key mode (substrate authentication key operation)) without restrictions such as the restricted communication mode.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining processing of an inquiry timeout sequence of security board information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security substrate inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF for information to be inquired of the higher-level device. The command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notice to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server), the SC 325bF receives the command of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification and sends it. The response of the security board inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security substrate inquiry instruction notification to be sent back is encrypted using the substrate serial number as the encryption key using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  The CU control unit 323F that receives the response of the security board inquiry result receives the information (substrate serial number and board serial number) of the security board 325F in the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query the inquiry information) and wait for a response from the higher-level device. While inquiring about security board information, the CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF do not have to wait for a response from the host device, and perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of gaming machine chip information, gaming machine Execute business message processing etc.)

  Thereafter, CU3F is P unit when the waiting time of the security board information inquiry has timed out before the CU control unit 323F receives the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device. Send a command of status information request requesting information on the status of 2F. The command of the status information request is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the command of the state information request acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325 bF returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3 F. At this time, the SC 325 b F returns a status information response including “substrate inquiry present” indicating that the security substrate information is requested to be inquired of the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a substrate state request command to request the SC 325bF for information to inquire of the higher-level device. The command of the substrate state request to be transmitted is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key.

  In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (substrate serial number and inquiry information) to which the SC 325bF receives the command of the substrate state request, inquires of the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server), the substrate state The response of the response is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. In the response of the substrate status response to be sent back, the substrate serial number is encrypted using the substrate initial key or the substrate authentication key as the encryption key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the concealment key. As a result, only the key management server can decrypt and decipher the inquiry information.

  Based on the board serial number and the inquiry information, the CU control unit 323F that has received the board status response response sends information on the security board 325F (board serial number and inquiry) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Inquires for information) and keeps waiting for responses from higher-level devices.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining processing of a query (collation) time-out sequence of gaming machine chip information.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification to request the SC 325bF for information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the higher-level device. The command for notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325 b F acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and thereafter, the SC 325 b F, which has received a command of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, inquires to a higher order device (specifically, key management server via hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response to the result of the game machine chip inquiry (authentication OK) is sent back to the CU control unit 323F. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly to the key management server via the hall server) based on the main control chip information and the payout control chip information. Inquires about control chip information and delivery control chip information) and waits for a response from the host device. While querying gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, but perform the processing of the next step (for example, authentication processing of communication control IC, authentication processing of security board information, gaming machine Business message processing etc.) and execute necessary processing when gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F causes the gaming machine chip information inquiry waiting time to time out before receiving the inquiry result (main control chip information and payout control chip information) of the gaming machine chip information from the host device. , The CU 3 F transmits a command of status information request requesting information on the status of the P platform 2 F. The command of the status information request is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the command of the status information request acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P-unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325 bF returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3 F. At this time, the SC 325 b F sends back a status information response including “chip information inquiry existence” to request an inquiry to the key management center of gaming machine chip information.

  In response to the above-described gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to inquire information to the higher-level device. The command for notification of gaming machine chip inquiry instruction to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The SC 325 b F, which has received the command of the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, notifies the CU control unit 323 F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) to inquire of the upper apparatus (specifically, key management server via hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. The main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the concealment key, and the other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result sends the gaming machine chip information (mainly to the key management server via the hall server) based on the main control chip information and the payout control chip information. The control chip information and the payout control chip information are inquired, and the host device continues to wait for a response.

  In the sequence between CU control unit 323F and SC 325bF described above with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, characteristic portions will be collectively described below.

  There is a "board initial key authentication sequence" as a sequence executed after CU3F is received and installed in the game arcade (see FIG. 74). In this "board initial key authentication sequence", at the time of the first power-on carried in and installed in the game arcade, the board initial key is downloaded and acquired from the host device (hall server), and authentication is performed using the board initial key. Sequence. Under the condition that the authentication result of the substrate initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security substrate information inquiry sequence” is executed using this substrate initial key (see FIG. 74). The substrate authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security substrate information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences and the like are executed using this substrate authentication key, and the communication key is The gaming machine and the business telegram communication are executed using it (see FIG. 75).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security substrate information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 74) using the substrate initial key, there are cases where the substrate authentication key can not be acquired. When a CU maker ships a CU3F to a game arcade, the substrate authentication key transmits the substrate authentication key of the CU3F to the key management server and stores it in the key management server, and the CU carried into the game arcade is Although the board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU maker to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. Also, when the CU3F installed in the game arcade executes the security board information inquiry sequence and tries to download the board authentication key, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is not possible. It may be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key can not be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key can not be downloaded, and if the operation of the business communication such as business message communication with the game machine after that can not be performed at all, an operation problem such as a decrease in the operation rate in the game arcade occurs. Therefore, when such an unexpected situation occurs, control is performed so that temporary operation of actual operation can be performed using a substrate initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, a communication key exchange sequence is executed using a substrate initial key already acquired from a host device (specifically, a hall server), and a communication key (session key) is generated using random numbers and time data. The CU control unit 323F and the SC 325b share the communication key (session key), and use the communication key (session key) to perform business message communication to perform operation control. The actual operation control by the communication key exchanged using this substrate initial key is permitted only for a certain period of time because the substrate initial key is a temporary key and the substrate authentication key can not be acquired in an unstable state. Temporary operation control is performed. Specifically, the actual operation control using this substrate initial key is permitted only for two days, and when the substrate authentication key can not be obtained even at the time of power supply start on the third day, the control after that is stopped. Control is performed to notify that the abnormality has occurred and to notify the hole server or the hall management computer that the abnormality has occurred. In addition, since the temporary control of temporary operation permitted only for a fixed period (for example, 2 days) with the substrate initial key is that the substrate initial key is stored in the hole server, at least the CU control unit 323F is the hole server. It is acceptable that it is secured that it is connected to.

  Also, the above-mentioned “board initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 78, that is, even at a stage not yet carried into the game arcade. If the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived because the board initial key is not obtained yet. Ru. Then, each sequence after the board shipping key request and the board shipping key response shown in FIG. 78 is executed, and communication of the communication test message with the gaming machine is executed. That is, it is judged by the “board initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the board initial key is acquired or not acquired at the factory shipment stage. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial board key has been acquired or not acquired at the factory.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P-table 2F will be described in more detail. First, in P platform 2F shown in FIG. 38, communication between main control board 16F provided on game board 26F and payout control board 17F provided on front frame 5F is the main control provided on main control board 16F. This is performed between the unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F provided in the front frame 5F. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between the main control unit 161F, the payout control unit 171F, and the communication control IC.

  Although the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F illustrated in FIG. 86 are described below as being configured as one chip, a plurality of chips may configure the same function. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes (e.g., a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the prize sensor 162F, a process of detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F, etc.) in the main control unit 161F. ) Is a circuit that executes a control program for performing. The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing encryption communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and is configured of, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of non-volatile memory. . In addition, since the main control storage unit 161cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by the external power supply.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF includes a CPU that is an arithmetic processing function, and the payout control unit 171F performs various processes (controls the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F, and the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. On the other hand, it is a circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion of game balls to balls, etc., and a user program stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing encryption communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F and encryption communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, a control program, data, and the like, and is configured of, for example, a non-volatile memory FeRAM. In addition, since the payout control storage unit 171 cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by the external power supply.

  The payout control unit 171F transmits and receives data to and from the communication control IC 325aF of CU3F via the communication control circuit 171bF. Specifically, the payout control unit 171F receives various commands as shown in FIG. 41 described above from the communication control IC 325aF of CU3F. Then, the payout control unit 171F stores data included in various commands. These data are basically stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF configured by a RAM or the like. However, among these data, there are data which should preferably not be stored in the payout control storage unit 171 cF in which the user program and the like are stored, from the viewpoint of security.

  Therefore, the payout control unit 171F (payout control circuit 171aF) does not store predetermined data (security related information) related to security among the data received by the communication control circuit 171bF in the payout control storage unit 171cF, but pays out. It is stored in a predetermined storage area in the control circuit 171aF. That is, the payout control circuit 171aF stores the security related information received by the communication control circuit 171bF in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF without notifying the user program. This user program is not a program predetermined by specifications such as a control program for controlling the basic operation of the CU 3 F, but is a program that can be added at the development stage of the gaming machine. Therefore, security can be improved by not notifying predetermined data to a user program that is relatively easy to access from the outside. Further, by not storing predetermined data in the payout control storage unit 171cF accessible from the outside, access to the predetermined data is prohibited to improve security.

  For example, the security related information is the “count reception time” included in the command of the status information request, the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” included in the card insertion notification command, and the like. The security related information is not limited to this, and includes predetermined arbitrary data which is considered to be preferable not to be stored in the payout control storage unit 171 cF from the viewpoint of security.

  Then, the payout control circuit 171aF updates or deletes the security related information stored in its own register when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the “count reception time” stored in the register to “Bit4 =“ 1 ”of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the state information response that the P base 2F transmits to the CU3F ( At the time of counting request), when the response of the status information response is transmitted to the CU 3 F (when transmitting the status information response), updating is performed. The payout control circuit 171aF causes the RAM (for example, the main control storage unit) provided when the P base 2F transmits a response to the communication start response to the CU3F (when the communication start response is transmitted) or when the P base 2F transmits the communication start response. 161 cF, the payout control storage unit 171 cF, etc.) is cleared (when the RAM clear instruction is issued).

  Further, the payout control circuit 171aF transmits the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” stored in the register to the CU3F when the P base 2F transmits a card insertion response response (during card insertion response transmission) or P terminal 2F newly registers or updates when it receives a command of counting history request from CU 3 F (when counting history is requested). The payout control circuit 171aF erases the “store code” and the “SC substrate ID” when an instruction to clear the RAM provided in the P base 2F is issued (at the time of the RAM clear instruction).

  As described above, the information on "counted reception time", "store code" and "SC board ID" is deleted or updated in the payout control circuit 171aF when the above conditions are satisfied, so that security can be ensured. it can.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 53, the “store code” is used in the counting history sequence when returning from the incommunicable state. Specifically, referring to FIG. 53, payout control circuit 171aF transmits a command of counting history request including serial number = n, store code and SC substrate ID via communication control circuit 171bF to communication control IC 325aF of CU3F. Receive from In the payout control circuit 171aF, the “store code” transmitted from the CU3F in response to a card insertion notification command and stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF and the “store code” transmitted from the CU3F in the counting history request command Compare with When the “store code” matches as a result of comparing these, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 to the response of the counting history response so that it can be transmitted to the CU 3F. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF sends back a response of the count history response including the serial number = n, the count history 1 and the count history 2 to the CU3F (communication control IC 325aF). As described above, the communication control circuit 171bF can improve the accuracy of the recovery process by transmitting counting histories (counting history 1 and counting history 2) for the past two times to the CU3F (communication control IC 325aF). The plurality of counting histories transmitted from the communication control circuit 171 bF to the CU 3 F are not limited to the past two times, but may be counting histories of the past three times or more.

  On the other hand, when the “store code” does not match as a result of comparing them, the payout control circuit 171aF sets data as no counting history in the response of the counting history response transmitted to the CU 3 F. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF sends back to CU3F a response of a count history response including serial number = n and no count history. Here, when a response of counting history response including serial number = n and no counting history is sent from CU2F to CU3F (when the above-mentioned "store code" does not match), the payout control circuit 171aF Prohibit the continuation of

  That is, when the "store code" stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF matches the "store code" transmitted from the CU3F by the command of the counting history request, the communication is disabled. It is possible to return to the previous gaming state using the counting history, but if it does not match, the previous gaming state is not returned from the incommunicable state.

  Although the case where the payout control circuit 171aF compares “store code” has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. The communication control circuit 171bF refers to the register of the payout control circuit 171aF and the payout control circuit The “store code” stored in the register in 171 aF may be compared with the “store code” transmitted from the CU 3 F by the command of the counting history request. In this case, the communication control circuit 171bF notifies the payout control circuit 171aF of the determination result. In the case of the determination result that the "store code" matches, the payout control circuit 171aF sets the stored data of the counting history 1 and the counting history 2 in the response of the counting history response, and the "store code" matches In the case of the judgment result that it does not, data is set to the response of the counting history response as no counting history. Then, the communication control circuit 171bF sends back to CU3F a response of the count history response including the set data.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 87 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, and has, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, and a recovery function.

  The authentication communication function is a function of performing mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F of the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function to encrypt or decrypt a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can automatically insert a message of a tamper resistant code or automatically insert a code for detecting a communication error. Also, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F by the communication interval setting, and receive the information of the payout control unit 171F.

  The interrupt function notifies, for example, an interrupt after the message is completely decoded, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication status changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encrypted communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a time-out time of the communication response, or can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87, the communication control circuit 161bF is a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and encryption communication for performing encryption communication with the payout control unit 171F. It has control part 600F.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include, for example, an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, a payout control game It has an information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like.

  The authentication status register 611F is used to check whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F is authenticated or not, the state of communication and authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 612F is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing gaming information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, and gaming information is stored in the buffer in the first in, first out (FIFO). Be written. In addition, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, a communication break occurs between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and gaming information written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to a communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program is not necessary to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F, and the processing load on the main control unit 161F Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. In addition, since the transmission data buffer 613F is configured by non-volatile memory, backup by the external power supply is not necessary. The registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are configured of volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data of the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which the data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication has been completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F is the information requesting to clear the data such as the serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 600F in communication with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data is erased. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF, and controls a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. The circuit 171 b 1 F and the part of the configuration for performing encrypted communication with the communication control IC 325 a F will be described below as a communication control circuit 171 b 2 F.

  First, FIG. 88 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, and has, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function of performing mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU 3F. The encryption communication function is a function to encrypt or decrypt a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can automatically insert a message of a tamper resistant code or automatically insert a code for detecting a communication error. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F by the communication interval setting, and receive the information of the main control unit 161F.

  The interrupt function notifies, for example, an interrupt after the message is completely decoded, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication status changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a time-out time of the communication response, and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the communication control circuit 171b1F is a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. The control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, a main control game It includes an information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like.

  The authentication status register 711F is a state of whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, a state of communication and authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and a communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 712F is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing the gaming information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and the buffer is played with FIFO (First In, First Out). Information is written. Further, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a non-volatile memory, a communication break occurs between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and the gaming information written in the register not transmitted due to the communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program is not necessary to generate gaming information written in the data reception register 713F, and the processing load on the main control unit 161F. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. In addition, since the data reception register 713F is configured by the non-volatile memory, the backup by the external power supply becomes unnecessary. The registers other than the data reception register 713F are configured of volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register for writing a request to clear data of the data reception register 713F.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written to the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not it is completed is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F is a request for clearing data such as a serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 700F in communication with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171b1F additionally includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting register 719cF.

  The main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting register 719cF transmits the data of the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is terminated. It is a register that sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, 5 seconds to 15 seconds). Seconds). Thereby, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been caught and dropped between nails and the like in the game area 27F) when authentication is broken due to a power off or disconnection, the floating ball wins. Information can be stored and protected securely. In addition, even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage in which the retention time of the balls is long, the effective period can be set to be longer so that the information that the floating balls have won can be reliably stored.

  Essentially, after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is terminated, information can not be written to the data reception register 713F from the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information on the winning of the floating balls after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is broken. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets the effective time to the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are set by the encryption communication control unit 700F. The information can be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F within the valid period even after the authentication between the above and the above has been terminated. The setting value of the main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting register 719cF can be read out after being set by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 89 is a block diagram for describing a configuration of a communication control circuit 171 b 2 F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325 a F. As shown in FIG. 89, communication control circuit 171b2F communicates with communication control IC 325aF, for example, authentication status register 721F, authentication interrupt setting register 722F, transmission data buffer 723aF, data reception register 723bF, transmission data count register 724F. Received data count register 725F, recovery communication addition ball request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F is used to check whether the chip ID of the dispensing control unit 171F is authenticated, the state of communication and authentication between the card unit and the dispensing control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the dispensing control unit. The state has been written. The authentication interrupt setting register 722F is set as to whether or not to permit an interrupt that changes the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF. The business message is written in the FIFO (First In, First Out) in the buffer. Be The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) for writing the business message sent from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and the buffer is FIFO (First In, First Out). Will be written.

  Note that by configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, a communication break occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register not transmitted due to the communication failure. The written task message is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program is not necessary to generate a business message written in transmission data buffer 723aF and data reception register 723bF, and the payout control unit The load of processing of 171 F and communication control IC 325 a F can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required for recovery processing can be reduced. In addition, since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by non-volatile memory, backup by the external power supply becomes unnecessary. The registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured of volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition balls is written when an addition ball is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power failure and recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction balls is written when a subtraction ball is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power failure and recovery. The recovery communication subtraction ball request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and information indicating whether it has been completed or not is written. The encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F is a request for clearing data such as a serial number held by the encrypted communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and the data has been deleted ( It is a register in which information indicating clear completion is written.

  The payout control unit 171F does not notify the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF of the security related information among the data received by the data reception register 723bF of the communication control circuit 171b2F in the encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , And stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF. That is, since the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF is restricted from directly accessing the received security-related information in the data reception register 723bF, the security-related information is stored in the payout control storage unit 171cF. I can not export. Although the communication control circuit 171 b 2 F has described the case of receiving the security related information by the data reception register 723 b F, the communication control circuit 171 b 2 F separately provides a security related information reception register which can not be directly accessed by the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171 a F. May be

  In addition, although the security related information received by the data reception register 723bF is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF, the configuration of the payout control unit 171F which the user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF can not directly access. explained. However, the payout control unit 171F is not limited to this, and does not store the security related information received by the data reception register 723bF in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF, and holds only in the data reception register 723bF. The user program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF may not be directly accessible.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, when returning from a state in which communication is not possible, such as power off, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control storage A recovery process of transmitting predetermined information stored in the unit 171cF is executed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform recovery completion confirmation processing for resuming generation of predetermined information by execution of the user program, on the condition that the recovery processing ends. Specifically, recovery completion confirmation processing will be described using a flowchart. FIG. 90 is a flowchart for explaining recovery completion confirmation processing.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are powered on to recover from the incommunicable state such as power off, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start the process of the authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication result is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F check whether the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). If the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is checked whether a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F have not been written with a flag indicating recovery completion (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  Main control unit 161F and payout control unit 171F start processing of the user program when a flag indicating recovery completion is written in recovery communication completion register 618F and recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting processing of the user program, for example, means for transmitting a signal for starting processing of the user program to start processing of the user program, and stopping means for stopping processing of the user program are provided. There is a means for starting the process of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program is performed before the information to be recovered by the recovery processing is determined. Can be properly resumed by preventing the user program from being written.

<Commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 91 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, and the names of transmission information and their outlines.

  First, a command named power on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. The command of the power on notification notifies the payout control unit 171F that the power is on and communication is started. A response with the name of power on reception is transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F. The response to the power on reception is a response to the main control unit 161F that the power on notification is received and communication is started.

  Next, a command named gaming state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. The command of the gaming state notification notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. A response named gaming state response is transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F. The response of the game state response is a response to the main control unit 161F that the game state notification has been received.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, based on FIGS. 92 and 93, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F according to the process executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 92, the sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 92 is processing executed at the time of communication resumption after communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has ended normally.

  Further, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is communication based on a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. The communication of power on notification and power on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F determines that the communication line has been disconnected and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F can not be received even if one second has passed since the response was sent.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. When the main control unit 161F does not receive the response command within the polling interval time, the main control unit 161F retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F both store the serial numbers used for transmission and reception in the storage unit, and use them for confirmation of normality of the command, power failure recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when the power is turned on, communication of power on notification and power on / off is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and a new authentication sequence is started. . In the authentication sequence, as described above, the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated, and that the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F. . Further, processing of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed according to the authentication sequence. For communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the processing is performed, encrypted communication is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence ends, the main control unit 161F transmits a command of gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number as "n". The payout control unit 171F returns a response of game state reception to the main control unit 161F as "n" without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a command of the gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number being "n + 1". The payout control unit 171F sends back a response of game state reception to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number and transmits a command of the gaming state notification to the payout control unit 171F as "n + 2". Then, the payout control unit 171F returns a response to the gaming state reception to the main control unit 161F as “n + 2” without counting up the serial number.

  In the communication between the main control section 161F and the payout control section 171F, an interval from the command transmission of the gaming state notification of the serial number "n" to the transmission of the command of the gaming state notification of the serial number "n + 1" The intervals from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game state notification of the serial number “n + 2” are each 200 ms intervals.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a process when the status information request has not been reached due to power off / communication line disconnection will be described. In FIG. 93, in particular, there is a power failure / communication circuit disconnection (for example, when the power of the payout control unit 171F is turned off and then turned on again), the game state notification has not been reached (from the main control unit 161F) It is a sequence diagram for demonstrating the process in case a communication other party corresponds by recovery control part 171F, and the command has not arrived.

  Referring to FIG. 93, before power-off occurs during the game, main control unit 161F transmits to payout control unit 171F a gaming state notification including serial number = n. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits, to the main control unit 161F, gaming state reception including the serial number = n.

  Then, after the power is turned off in the payout control section 171F during the game, the payout control section 171F is turned off when the gaming state notification including the serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control section 161F to the payout control section 171F. Because it is a state, it can not receive the game state notice. After that, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop the communication on the assumption that the power is cut off after one second because the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted.

  Thereafter, when the authentication sequence is started between the power on and the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F is a power supply including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous final transmission serial number) = n + 1. The input notification is sent to the payout control unit 171F. Since the payout control unit 171F transmits the gaming state reception sequence number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power failure occurs, the payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F is n. Therefore, the payout control serial number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F and the main control serial number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F do not match. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits, to the main control unit 161F, power on reception including the serial number = 1.

  The main control unit 161F transmits the gaming state notification including the serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the content after the recovery processing, and transmits gaming state reception including the serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the gaming state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  In addition, although the above-mentioned recovery processing was carried out because the serial numbers did not match, the information included in the recovery game information (for example, the number of game information, winning ball information, etc.) is the payout control with the main control unit 161F. Recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the part 171F.

<Unauthorized gaming machine connection detection>
Next, the mechanism of the unauthorized gaming machine detection detected by the CU 3 F will be described. The card unit connectable to the P unit 2F is not limited to a card unit used for commercial use (corresponding to the above-described CU3F, hereinafter simply referred to as CU3F, commercial CU). It may be a game board development jig for developing a board, a card unit for development (CU for development) used for development of P platform 2F, or the like.

  However, it is conceivable to play a game on the P platform 2F illegally using a card unit connectable to the P platform 2F other than the commercial CU. For example, a large number of game balls are lent to a game console development jig other than a commercial CU or a P platform 2F connected to a development CU, separated from the game console development jig or a development CU, and then P platform 2F It is possible to connect a commercial CU to play a game illegally.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the P unit 2F connected to the commercial CU has been connected to a game board development jig other than the commercial CU or a development CU in the past to operate the commercial CU. Stop. Concretely, the structure which detects whether it connected to the game board development jigs other than commercial CU or development CU in the past using a figure is demonstrated.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when the P-unit 2F connected to the game board development jig is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the game board development jig 3EF shown in FIG. 94 is configured by a CU control unit 323F and a communication control IC 325aF which are the same as commercial CUs, except that the game board development jig 3EF has the P unit development SC 325EbF. In addition, in the SC 325 EbF for P-unit development, an identification ID indicating that it is a game board development jig is embedded. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC substrate ID, and is stored in the SC 325 EbF as a part of the SC substrate ID.

  As shown in FIG. 94, when the P board 2F is connected to the game board development jig 3EF, when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the game board development jig 3EF to the P board 2F as the game machine message notification, P board An identification ID is transmitted from the development SC 325 EbF to the P-base 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P-unit 2F is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC substrate ID of the SC 325 EbF is also stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171 a F together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up to another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  The SC substrate ID is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF as described above, but is not notified to the user program 171pF executed by the payout control circuit 171aF. Therefore, since the P substrate 2F can not read the SC substrate ID from the payout control circuit 171aF and can not illegally copy the SC substrate ID, the security is enhanced. The SC substrate ID (including the identification ID) stored in the register of the payout control circuit 171aF can be erased by clearing the RAM of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing in the case of exchanging a unit from the game board development jig 3EF to CU3F will be described. When the P platform 2F connected to the game board development jig 3EF is connected to the CU 3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU 3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after the power is turned on. By this gaming machine message notification, an SC board ID including an identification ID (identification information representing that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the P base 2 F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC substrate ID to the P base 2F is not limited during the process of the authentication sequence, and the player inserts a card, for example, after changing the unit to CU3F and turning on the P base 2F. It may be the timing when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 F as the gaming machine message notification. That is, any timing may be used as long as it is possible to prevent the player from playing illegally using the number of game balls provided by the game board development jig 3EF. In FIG. 94, in order to distinguish between the identification ID from SC325EbF for P unit development and the identification ID from SC325bF for commercial, the identification ID from SC325EbF for P unit development is illustrated, and from SC325bF for commercial The identification ID is not shown.

  The P base 2F that received the identification ID from the commercial SC 325bF is the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. It is determined whether or not. It should be noted that the P platform 2F is a connecting device other than a commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF or not. It may be determined only by When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171 pF It notifies that only the game board development jig 3EF has been set, and sets Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 3 (connected to the game board development jig) = “1” included in the response of the state information response.

  As for CU3F, the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF based on the information of Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response transmitted as the game machine message from the connected P platform 2F. It detects that it was. Specifically, the SC 325 bF reads the information of Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3 EF if the information is “1”. When detecting that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the SC 325bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU 3 F can prevent the illegitimate game from being played without incorporating information in the gaming board development jig 3 EF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323 F. In addition, when it is detected that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, the CU 3 F may notify by sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  In FIG. 94, the identification ID is shown as being written in user program 171 pF in order to express that the information of Bit 6 = “1” in fraud detection state 3 is written in user program 171 pF in an easy-to-understand manner. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the ID of P stand 2 F to CU 3 F is used to express clearly how a response of the status information response including information of Bit 6 = “1” of fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Although illustrated as being sent to the user, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF, the flag included in the response of the state information response (the fraud detection state 3 Instead of writing to the user program 171 pF as Bit 6 (game board development jig connection) = “1”, as shown in FIG. 94, the information of the identification ID itself of the game board development jig 3EF is written in the user program 171 pf It may be crowded. Furthermore, it may be determined based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171 pF whether it is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. In addition, the information transmitted from P platform 2F to CU3F is not a flag (Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 3 (game board development jig connection) = “1”), but as shown in FIG. 94, the game board development jig Information of the identification ID itself of 3EF may be transmitted.

  Furthermore, the P platform 2F is stored without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the game board development jig 3EF. The identification ID may be transmitted to the SC 325 bF via the user program 171 pF. That is, the determination as to whether or not the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF may be performed not by the P platform 2F but by the SC 325bF to detect the game board development jig connection.

  Also, when exchanging units from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF, the information of Bit 6 = "1" of fraud detection state 3 from the P base 2F connected as described in FIG. A response containing a status information response is sent. However, since another game board development jig 3EF after unit exchange has a shipment maker code of the game machine development maker code set in SC325 EbF for P unit development, Bit6 of the fraud detection state 3 transmitted is "=" It may be configured so as not to detect that the card unit connected in the past is the game board development jig 3EF, ignoring the information of 1 ′ ′. That is, the card unit detects an error in the game board development jig connection when it is determined that the unit has been exchanged from the game board development jig 3EF to another game board development jig 3EF according to the shipping maker code set in SC. do not do. As a result, in the development process of repeating the connection between the game board development jig 3EF and the P platform 2F, the process of detecting an error in the game board development jig connection is not performed, so the work of development and maintenance becomes easy.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when the P base 2F connected to the development CU is connected to a commercial CU by unit replacement. First, the CU3DF for development shown in FIG. 95 is configured by the same CU control unit 323F and communication control IC 325aF as the commercial CU except that it has the SC 325DbF for development. Further, in the SC 325 DbF for development, an identification ID indicating that it is a development CU is embedded. Specifically, the identification ID is an identification code included in the SC substrate ID, and is stored in the SC 325 DbF as a part of the SC substrate ID.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the P base 2F is connected to the development CU3DF, when a command for card insertion notification is transmitted from the development CU3DF to the P base 2F as gaming machine message notification, the identification ID is set from SC325DbF for development. It is sent to P platform 2F. The identification ID transmitted to the P-unit 2F is stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF. The SC substrate ID of SC325DbF is also stored in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF together with the identification ID. Note that only the identification ID may be backed up to another storage device of the payout control circuit 171aF.

  Next, processing in the case of exchanging a unit from CU3DF for development to CU3F will be described. When the P base 2F connected to the development CU3DF is connected to the CU3F by unit replacement, a gaming machine message notification is transmitted from the CU3F in the processing of the authentication sequence after power on. By this gaming machine message notification, an SC board ID including an identification ID (identification information representing that it is a commercial CU) is transmitted from the SC 325 bF to the P base 2 F. Note that the timing for transmitting the SC substrate ID to the P base 2F is not limited during the process of the authentication sequence, and the player inserts a card, for example, after changing the unit to CU3F and turning on the P base 2F. It may be the timing when the command of the card insertion notification is transmitted from the CU 3 F as the gaming machine message notification. That is, any timing may be used as long as it is possible to prevent the player from playing illegally using the number of game balls provided by the development CU 3DF. In FIG. 95, in order to distinguish between the identification ID from SC325DbF for development and the identification ID from SC325bF for commercial, the identification ID from SC325DbF for development is illustrated, and the identification ID from SC325bF for commercial is illustrated Not shown.

  Upon receiving the identification ID from the commercial SC 325 b F, the P base 2 F determines whether the identification ID (identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) stored in the payout control circuit 171 a F is the identification ID of the development CU 3 DF . It should be noted that the P-table 2F determines whether or not the identification device stored in the payout control circuit 171aF is a connection device other than a commercial CU3F without determining whether the identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF or not. It may be alone. When the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU3DF, the card unit connected in the past without notifying the identification ID stored in the user program 171 pF is for development Only the fact that it is CU3DF is notified, and Bit5 (CU connection for development) of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response is set to "1".

  In CU3F, the card unit connected in the past was CU3DF for development based on the information of Bit 5 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as the gaming machine message from the connected P platform 2F. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325 bF reads out the information of Bit 5 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3 DF if the information is “1”. When the SC 325 b F detects that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU 3 DF, it stops communication with the CU control unit 323 F. As a result, the CU 3 F can be prevented from playing an illegal game without incorporating information in the development CU 3 DF connected in the past into the CU control unit 323 F. Further, when it is detected that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU3DF, the CU 3 F may notify by sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  In FIG. 95, the identification ID is illustrated as being written in the user program 171 pF in order to express that the information of Bit 5 = “1” of the fraud detection state 3 is written in the user program 171 pF in an easy-to-understand manner. However, as described above, the stored identification ID itself is not notified. In addition, the ID of P stand 2 F to CU 3 F is used to express clearly how a response of the status information response including information of Bit 5 = “1” of fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from P stand 2 F to CU 3 F Although illustrated as being sent to the user, the stored identification ID itself is not notified.

  Of course, as described above, when the payout control circuit 171aF determines that the stored identification ID is the identification ID of the development CU 3 DF, the flag (bit 5 in the fraud detection state 3 (development of fraud detection state 3) is included in the response of the state information response. Instead of writing in the user program 171 pF as CU connection for connection = “1”), information of the identification ID itself of the development CU 3 DF may be written in the user program 171 pF as shown in FIG. Furthermore, it may be determined based on the identification ID stored in the user program 171 pF whether or not it is the identification ID of the development CU 3 DF. In addition, the information transmitted from P stand 2F to CU3F is not a flag (bit 5 of fraud detection state 3 (CU connection for development) = "1"), but as shown in FIG. 95, the identification ID of the development CU3DF itself Information may be sent.

  Furthermore, the P-table 2F stores the identification without determining whether the identification ID stored in the payout control circuit 171aF (the identification ID of the card unit connected in the past) is the identification ID of the development CU 3 DF. The ID may be transmitted to the SC 325 bF only via the user program 171 pF. That is, the determination as to whether or not the card unit connected in the past is the development CU3DF may be performed not at the P base 2F but at SC 325bF to detect the development CU connection.

  In addition, also when exchanging a unit from one CU3DF for development to another CU3DF for development, the response of the status information response including the information of Bit5 = "1" of fraud detection status 3 from the P base 2F connected as described in FIG. Will be sent. However, another CU3DF for development after unit replacement has the shipment maker code of the game apparatus development maker code set in SC325DbF for development, so the information of Bit5 = "1" of fraud detection state 3 transmitted , And may not detect that the card unit connected in the past is the development CU3DF. That is, the card unit does not detect an error in the development CU connection when it is determined that the unit exchange from the development CU3DF to another development CU3DF is performed by the shipping maker code set in the SC. As a result, in the development process of repeating the connection between the development CU 3 DF and the P base 2 F, the process of detecting an error in the development CU connection is not performed, and the work of development and maintenance becomes easy.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is detected whether the P unit 2F connected to the CU3F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or CU3DF for development other than the CU3F in the past, and the CU control unit Since the communication with the 323 F is stopped to stop the operation of the CU 3 F, it is possible to prevent the game from being played illegally by connecting it to the game board development jig 3 EF other than the CU 3 F or the development CU 3 DF in the past. For example, before connecting P platform 2F to commercial CU3F, it is connected to gaming board development jig 3EF or CU3DF for development to lend out a large number of gaming balls, and using the gaming ball rented after connecting to commercial CU3F It is possible to prevent unauthorized play of the game.

  Next, the case where a gaming machine simulator other than the P unit 2F is connected to the commercial CU3F will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram for describing a mechanism of detection when a gaming machine simulator is connected to a commercial CU3F. Here, the gaming machine simulator is a device for connecting to check whether, for example, a commercial CU3F operates normally, and it is possible to virtually output signals and information necessary for the inspection to the commercial CU3F. it can. Therefore, the commercial CU3F is connected to the gaming machine simulator or connected to the P-unit 2F to prevent the intentional connection of the gaming machine simulator and transmission of illegal game information. It is necessary to detect.

  First, the gaming machine simulator 2AF shown in FIG. 96 has a payout control unit 171AF as in the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171AF includes a user program 171A pf executed by the payout control circuit 171AaF and the payout control circuit 171AaF. In the user program 171A pF, an identification ID indicating that it is the gaming machine simulator 2AF is embedded.

  As shown in FIG. 96, when the gaming machine simulator 2AF is connected to a commercial CU3F, communication between a gaming machine message notification command and a gaming machine message response response is performed between the CU3F and the gaming machine simulator 2AF. For example, CU3F transmits a command of state information request to notify the state of CU3F to gaming machine simulator 2AF. When receiving the command of the status information request from the CU 3 F, the gaming machine simulator 2 AF transmits, to the CU 3 F, a response of a status information response notifying the gaming information, the gaming machine status, and the like.

  The response of the status information response transmitted to the CU 3 F includes information for notifying the CU 3 F that the connection with the gaming machine simulator 2 AF is made. Specifically, based on the identification ID embedded in the user program 171 ApF, the gaming machine simulator 2 AF sets Bit 7 (gaming machine simulator connection) = “1” in fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the state information response.

  In CU3F, the connected gaming machine is the gaming machine simulator based on the information of Bit 7 of fraud detection state 3 included in the response of the status information response transmitted as the gaming machine message response from the connected gaming machine simulator 2AF. Detect that. Specifically, the SC 325 bF reads the information of Bit 7 of the fraud detection state 3 and detects that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator if the information is “1”. When detecting that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the SC 325 bF stops communication with the CU control unit 323F. As a result, the CU 3 F can prevent an unauthorized game from being played without incorporating information of the connected gaming machine simulator 2 AF into the CU control unit 323 F. In addition, when it is detected that the connected gaming machine is a gaming machine simulator, the CU 3 F may notify by sound or light, or notify the upper server of the detection result.

  It should be noted that the identification ID is from the gaming machine simulator 2AF in order to express how the response of the status information response including the information of Bit7 = "1" of the fraud detection state 3 is transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to CU3F. It is illustrated as sent to CU3F.

  Of course, the information to be transmitted from the gaming machine simulator 2AF to the CU 3F is also not the flag (Bit 7 in the fraud detection state 3 (game machine simulator connection) = "1"), but identification of the gaming machine simulator 2AF as shown in FIG. Information of the ID itself may be transmitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is detected whether the gaming machine connected to the CU 3 F is a commercial P unit 2 F or the gaming machine simulator 2 AF, and the communication with the CU control unit 323 F is stopped. Since the operation is stopped, it is possible to prevent unauthorized play by connecting the gaming machine simulator 2AF to CU3F intentionally. For example, the gaming machine simulator 2AF can count a large number of gaming balls for CU3F as holding balls, and prevent the piracy to play a game by lending the waiting balls counted after connection to the P platform 2F as the gaming balls .

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for describing notification processing of operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. The P-unit 2F illustrated in FIG. 97 is connected to the CU 3F, the hall server 801F, the key management server 800F, and the machine history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each serial ID (hereinafter, also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. Also, the key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF is associated with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the information on the front frame 5F and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system which stores the information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The security board 325F is connected in parallel with the payout control unit 171F via a PIF circuit 326F which is a parallel interface circuit.

  When the manufacturer (game machine maker) ships the fore frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 97, the game machine installation information (operation information from the P stand 2F ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. A chip ID, a security chip ID of the other party when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined, and the like are included. The security chip ID can not be changed or deleted after being registered in the machine history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the input of shipping information to the machine history management center 800AF is input from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. Then, the machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on each, and notifies from the stored information and the P platform 2F It collates with the determined gaming machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality. As notification of an abnormality, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, An error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. As a result, a predetermined notification is provided to urge an artificial response by the clerk. The information stored by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F with the security chip ID can not be changed after the shipping information registration to the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F be registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installing in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (which may be only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall are removed and stored in the warehouse, the P platform 2F is not in operation. As shown in FIG. 97, non-operational information is notified from the P-unit 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operation information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information due to the fact that the security chip ID of the front frame 5F of the P unit 2F and the game board 26F which have been installed is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the machine history management center 800AF associates and stores the input front frame 5F and removal information of the game board 26F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and notifies from the stored information and the P platform 2F Check against the unavailability information. If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality.

  If a second-hand dealer resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 97, the game machine installation information (operation information) from the P stand 2F is the machine The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (re-sales information) of the game board 26F re-sold by a second-hand manufacturer is input to the machine-history management center 800AF. Then, the machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P platform 2F Check the game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality.

  Furthermore, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (which may be only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) in which the disposal company has been installed are discarded, as shown in FIG. As described above, the machine history management center 800AF is notified of the non-operation information from the P platform 2F. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (may be only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the P platform 2F that has been installed This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the disposal company is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the machine history management center 800AF associates and stores the input front frame 5F and removal information of the game board 26F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and notifies from the stored information and the P platform 2F Check against the unavailability information. If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipping to disposal will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the flow of history information (machine history information) from the shipping to the disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine for managing the history is not limited to the above-mentioned enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P unit 2F), and a conventional CR gaming machine is also included. Of course, it goes without saying that not only the pachinko gaming machines but also the S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to the P machines 2F to be described later, the conventional pachislot machines, and the like are included in the target gaming machines.

  Referring to FIG. 98, when the gaming machine is shipped from the gaming machine maker to Hall A, the server (not shown) of the gaming machine maker carries out the communication line for the shipping information regarding the shipped gaming machine. It inputs to machine history management center 800AF using it. The machine history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing details of the flow until shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 99, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker when ordering a gaming machine from the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine maker receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order for the gaming machine according to the sales contract. Upon confirmation of the order, the gaming machine maker sends copies of the warranty and the verification notice to Hall A, and starts production of the gaming machine. In the gaming machine maker, the produced gaming machines are shipped from the gaming machine maker to Hall A (delivered to Hall A). Also, after the gaming machine to be shipped to the hall A is delivered to the transporter, the server of the gaming machine maker inputs shipping information on the gaming machine to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. When receiving the input of the shipping information, the machine history management center 800AF registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 100A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 100 (b) is a diagram showing registration classification included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 100 (a), the shipping information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a main control chip ID number (main chip ID), a main control product code, and a gaming machine. It includes a frame serial number, a dispensing board management number, a dispensing control chip ID number (dispensing chip ID), a dispensing control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P unit 2F), or a gaming board with parts replaced or a gaming machine frame. It is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 100 (b), when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and “21” to “25”. , Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P unit 2F. Further, the registered type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the game board + the gaming machine frame, and the game board (part replacement) are the parts replaced, respectively. Further, registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are the gaming board, gaming machine frame, gaming board + game machine frame, parts of the game board, and parts of the gaming machine frame which are respectively replaced. When the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame is replaced, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, parts replacement in which the serial number of the game board and the gaming machine frame is changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the game machine maker name and the model name of the game machine are specified according to the registration type.

The game board production number and the main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by the ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P base 2F (setting unnecessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (no setting is required in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame serial number and the payout substrate management number are information according to the two-dimensional code. The payout substrate management number is not required to be set in the conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by the ID reader, and is set only in the case of P platform 2F (setting unnecessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting unnecessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipping date is the date when the gaming machine was shipped, and is the date when shipping was confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying a carrier name. The hole code is information for specifying a hole name of a delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when the shipping information is registered, and “1” when the registered shipping information is cancelled. When the manufacturer of the gaming machine registers incorrect shipment information in the history management center 800AF, the manufacturer sets the cancellation flag of the incorrect shipment information to “1”, and registers again in the history management center 800AF.

  When the machine history management center 800AF receives the shipping information in which the cancellation flag is set to "1", the machine history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information in which the cancellation flag is set to "0" with the same contents as the accepted shipping information. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag in which "1" is set is deleted from the storage area of the machine history management center 800AF. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to "1" (on state).

  Furthermore, the machine history management center 800AF can allow reception of shipping information including a cancellation flag in which "1" is set, until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag in which “1” is set can not be registered in the machine history management center 800AF.

  Here, as the predetermined condition, there are, for example, time, a period, and the like. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to receive the shipping information including the cancellation flag in which "1" is set, until 8:00 pm of the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the machine history management center 800 AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (on state), and after the predetermined condition is established (for example, after 8 pm on the registration date It is possible to prevent the falsification of shipping information.

  In the case where the gaming machine is a sealed circulation type gaming machine (P unit 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number is specific information for identifying the individual of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is a conventional CR. In the case of a gaming machine, at least one of a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine slot production number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual game machine.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the shipping information is the same as that of the conventional CR gaming machine even if the gaming machine is the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P unit 2F) or the conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the histories of the enclosed circulation-type gaming machine (P unit 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be uniformly managed.

  Referring again to FIG. 98, when the gaming machine is delivered to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in Hall A, the server (not shown) in Hall A is connected via the communication line. Installation information on the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping, and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing details of the flow until installation information is registered in the device history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the equipment history management center 800AF are not configured to be able to communicate. . In FIG. 101 (a), the conventional CR game machine is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. FIG. 101 (b) mainly shows the case of the enclosed circulation type game machine (P unit 2F), and the P unit 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. It is assumed that

  Referring to FIG. 101 (a), when the gaming machine manufacturer delivers the gaming machine to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery date is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery receipt, the gaming machine manufacturer's installation information of the gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When the installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registered result is output via a communication line or as a document. In addition, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is carried out, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined place in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 101 (b), when the gaming machine manufacturer delivers the gaming machine to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery date is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is carried out, and when the change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined place in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via the communication line, when the game machine installed in the hall A is powered on, the machine computer automatically operates the hall computer from the hall computer. The installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping, and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of contents of installation information input to the machine history management center 800AF in FIG. 101 (a). Referring to FIG. 102, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, gaming board manufacturing number, main board management number, gaming machine slot manufacturing number, hall code, and cancellation flag are the same as the contents described in FIG. 100, the detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 101 (a), since it is assumed that the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in the hall A, the registration type number is “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 101 (a), the machine history management center 800AF receives the game machine maker name, model name, game board manufacture number, main board management number, and the like as installation information input from the game machine maker. A play slot serial number, an installation date, and an installation destination hall name are registered.

  Further, in the case of FIG. 101 (b), the machine history management center 800AF is provided with the machine name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, and the like as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer. The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The machine history management center 800AF may receive the partial information as the installation information, and may register the information common to the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring again to FIG. 98, when the gaming machine installed in Hall A is removed, removal information is described in the documents from Hall A, and the documents are sent to machine history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from an input unit (not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or discard information to be described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. You may register removal information.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the machine history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 103 (a), it is assumed that the conventional CR game machine is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by the communication line.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 103 (b), it is mainly assumed that the P platform 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 103 (a), when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application form. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  Referring to FIG. 103 (b), since the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable, the machine history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If it is determined that communication with the gaming machine, which should be installed in hall A, has not been performed for a certain period (for example, one month), it is determined that the gaming machine is not operating and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. As in FIG. 103 (a), the machine history management center 800AF may register removal information in the storage area based on the documents sent from the hall A.

  When the conventional CR game machine is removed, the machine history management center 800 AF has, as removal information, a game machine maker name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game slot production number, a removal date, and removal. The hall name is registered. In addition, when P stand 2F is removed, in addition to each information registered in case of the conventional CR gaming machine, withdrawal control board management number is additionally registered in machine history management center 800AF as removal information. Be done.

  Again, referring to FIG. 98, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is put into the warehouse of the dealer and the received gaming machine is sent out to another hole B, the dealer makes an application document. The second-hand movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers used movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application document. When the machine history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the distributor are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs used movement information to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line. It is also good.

  If a game machine delivered from a distributor is delivered to another hall B and the game machine is installed in another hall B, the hall B is also installed in the flow as described in FIG. 101. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. In addition, even when the gaming machine installed in the hall B is removed, removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF in the flow as described in FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from the hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal company describes the disposal information from the processing company in the application documents, and the documents of the machine history Send to the management center 800 AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from an input unit in the own apparatus. When the machine history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer may input discard information to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  When the gaming machine maker discards the gaming machine traded from the hall A, the hall computer inputs discarding information on the gaming machine to be discarded through the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers the input discarding information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the device history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 104, when the acceptance acceptance notification of the trade-in of the gaming machine is made from the gaming machine maker to Hall A, the gaming machine is handed over from Hall A to the gaming machine maker. After collecting and storing the gaming machine, the gaming machine maker requests the processing company (discarding company) to dispose of it in the case of discarding. When the gaming machine maker receives a notification (processing details etc.) from the processing company that the disposal processing of the gaming machine is completed, the server of the gaming machine maker carries out the disposal information regarding the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800 AF. When receiving the input of the discarding information, the machine history management center 800AF registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the discarding information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the discarding information includes a registration type, a discarding date, a game board manufacturer code, a game board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and a game machine. It includes a frame serial number, a delivery substrate control number, an operator code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, gaming board manufacturing number, main board management number, gaming machine slot manufacturing number, and cancellation flag are the same as the contents described in FIG. 100, the detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The disposal date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for specifying a game machine maker who manufactured a game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer's code is information for specifying a gaming machine manufacturer who manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for specifying a business operator who has carried out the disposal process. Typically, it is the business code of the processing company (discarding company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the business code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When the conventional CR game machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800 AF is to discard the game machine name, game board production number, main board management number, game frame production number, disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, a payout control board management number is additionally registered in the machine history management center 800AF as discard information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Be done.

<Management of front slot and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P unit 2F) has been described, but the P unit 2F is a combination of the fore frame 5F and the game board 26F. It is also possible to manage the history separately from the board 26F. Therefore, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

  FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram for explaining the history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The machine history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 106 is associated with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F and information of the front frame 5F and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 107 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the table, and the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is managed. The machine history management center 800AF includes a central processing unit (CPU) 8001F as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) 8002F storing operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM functioning as a work area of the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a large-capacity storage device 8005F such as a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are provided.

  FIG. 107 is a schematic view of a table storing information on the fore-frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the history of the fore-frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 107, a payout side table (FIG. 107 (a)) for storing information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F and in association with the security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 107 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  The machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) The semiconductor chip maker 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame maker 191F which is a manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip maker 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board maker 192F which is a maker of the game board 26F. The semiconductor chip 17aF for payout control and the semiconductor chip 16aF for main control are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip maker 190F, but may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip makers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip maker 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID to the payout side table. , Update the delivery side table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip maker 190F notifies the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF to the machine history management center 800AF, and the main control security chip ID in the main control side table To update the main control side table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F assembles the semiconductor chip 17aF for payout control into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships the manufactured front frame 5F to the hole 193F and sets it. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hole 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the front frame serial number, the delivery substrate management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Furthermore, the information specifying the preceding frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a maker code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the semiconductor chip 16aF for main control into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Furthermore, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F, and combines and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. Do. As information for specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the model name of the game machine, the product code, the maker code, the game board production number, the main control board management number, and the product code for main control , Carrier code, hole code, shipping date, and installation date are included.

  (8) The hole 193F operates the P base 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P-table 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the incorporated payout control security chip ID and main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P unit 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P unit 2F, and transmits a necessary password to the P unit 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the gaming machine installation information to the machine history management center 800AF, pays out so as to store the main control security chip ID of the pair (combined) in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store the payout chip security chip ID of the pair (combined) in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F and the game board maker 192F. Match

  If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality. Further, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management state of the front frame 5F in which the information (the information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 107 (a)) such as the shipping date included in the delivery side table is updated. The management status (5) of the front frame 5F in which (shipment) has been updated and information on the main control security chip ID of the pair (information shown in (a) in FIG. 107A) included in the delivery side table is updated. Judging that "status" is "installation". The management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or may be stored in another storage area. At the time of initial failure after shipping registration, reshipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF is a game board 26F of which information such as the shipping date included in the main control side table (the information of (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 107 (b)) is updated. The gaming state 26F of the gaming board 26F in which the management status (status) is "shipment" and the information on the payout chip security chip ID of the pair (information shown in (b) in FIG. 107B) included in the main control side table is updated. Determine the management status (status) as "installed". The management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. At the time of initial failure after shipping registration, reshipment is not performed.

  Next, for storage, (10) When the hall 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and a game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in a warehouse. (11) The warehouse company 194F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the dispensing side table so as to store it in association with the dispensing control security chip ID. In addition, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. Note that, as shown in FIG. 107, the manufacturer of the gaming machine, the installation source hall, the removal date, the storage date, and the storage location are included as storage information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operation information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The non-operation information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the delivery side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse company 194F.

  If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF manages the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F in which the information (information of (11) shown in FIG. 107) such as the storage date included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated. Judge (Status) as "Save". When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F need not necessarily be removed as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In that case, in the machine history management center 800AF, only the information (11) (see FIG. 107) of either the delivery side table or the main control side table is updated.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) Hall 193F requests second-hand dealer 195F to resell front frame 5F and game board 26F stored by warehouse vendor 194F. The second-hand contractor 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs the same in the hall. (13) The second-hand contractor 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of resale information on the resealed front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the second-hand supplier 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of resale information of the re-sold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. Note that, as shown in FIG. 107, the installation source hall, the date of removal, the date of installation, and the name of the sales company are included as resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  When the fore-frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the fore-frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined to operate the P-platform 2F. When driven, the P-table 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the incorporated payout control security chip ID and main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P unit 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P unit 2F, and transmits a necessary password to the P unit 2F. In addition, the key management server 800F notifies the gaming machine installation information to the machine history management center 800AF, and the payout side is stored so that the main control security chip ID of the pair (combined) is associated with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store the payout chip security chip ID of the pair (combined) in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand contractor 195F.

  If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF manages the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F in which information such as the name of the sales company (information in (13) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. It is determined that (status) is “resale”, and further the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the security chip ID of the pair (information of (9) shown in FIG. 107) included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated. The management state (status) of the board 26F is determined to be "installation". When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are to be resold, it is not necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In that case, in the machine history management center 800AF, only the information (13) (see FIG. 107) of either the delivery side table or the main control side table is updated. Furthermore, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, it is not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are resold, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall May be resold. In addition, reshipment at the time of resale does not occur.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal contractor 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The discard contractor 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and the game board 26F in an appropriate manner. (15) The discard contractor 196F notifies the discard history information of the discarded front frame 5F to the machine history management center 800AF, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discard trader 196F notifies the discard history information of the discarded game board 26F to the machine history management center 800AF, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, an installation source hall, a collection date, and a disposal date are included as disposal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operation information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F. The non-operation information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operating information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the delivery side table and the main control side table updated by the disposal company 196F.

  If the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is abnormal as a result of collation, it notifies the abnormality. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF manages the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F in which information (information of (15) shown in FIG. 107) such as the disposal date included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated. (Status) is judged as "discard". When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, it is not necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In that case, in the machine history management center 800AF, only the information of either (15) (see FIG. 107) of the delivery side table or the main control side table is updated. Furthermore, when discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to the case of discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board installed in the hall 193F You may discard 26F.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
As a result of collating the gaming machine installation information and the non-operation information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF gives notification of the abnormality if it is abnormal. Specifically, the process of determining whether the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described using a flowchart. FIG. 108 is a flowchart for describing the abnormality determination processing of management of the fore frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF has a front frame 5F and a game board 26F in which information (information of (15) shown in FIG. 107) such as the disposal date included in the payout side table and the main control side table is updated. Determine the management status (status) as "discard".

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF confirms whether or not the change from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). The transition prohibition table indicates, as shown in FIG. 109A, a management state in which the transition from the previously determined management state is prohibited. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or re-sold, so in the transition prohibition table, the management state is from “shipment” to “discard” or Transition to "resale" is prohibited. Also, since no front frame 5F, once installed, stored and resold, is shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is "Install", "Storage" and "Resale", and "Shipment" To prohibit transition to Furthermore, since the front frame 5F that has been discarded is not shipped, installed, stored and resold, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is from “discard” to “shipment”, “installation”, “storage” and “resale” To prohibit transition to In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF 212: N), the machine history management center 800AF selects the front frame 5F and the game board based on the information from the key management server 800F. The operating state of the 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, when the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, the machine history management center 800AF determines that it is in the operating state, and when the non-operating information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information Is not sent), it is judged as non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). The update abnormality table, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), shows the operation state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211. Specifically, when the fore-frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, the operating state is in the business hours, but in the non-operating hours, the normal operation is not performed. When the status is "installation", it is determined as abnormal if "operating outside business hours". In addition, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, they are always in a non-operating state, so when the management status is "shipment", "storage", "resale", and "discard" in the update abnormality table. When it becomes "operation", it determines that it is abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operation state is included in the update abnormality table (SF 214: Y), the machine history management center 800 AF reports an abnormality (SF 215). The means for informing the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the machine history management center 800 AF or outputting an alarm sound from the voice output device. In addition, when the change to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF 212: Y), the machine history management center 800 AF also reports an abnormality (SF 215).

  When the determined operation state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N), the machine history management center 800AF ends the process.

  As described above, the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table for storing the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID, and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. Based on the information stored in the large-capacity storage device 8005F, including the main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID, and the CPU 8001F stored in the payout side table and the main control side table, the management state of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F Determine the abnormality of Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F which may be distributed separately with the respective security chip IDs.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the above explanation, the slot machine is also abbreviated as "S unit" in the following because of the abbreviation of "P unit" for pachinko gaming machines.

  The above-described gaming system using gaming balls and balls is similarly applied to the S car. However, since the game is performed without using balls in the S unit, in the following, the game ball is referred to as a game point, and the ball is referred to as a point.

  Referring to FIG. 110, slot machine (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as game machine or S stand) 2SF is provided to front door 2bSF with respect to main body frame 2aSF so that it can be opened and closed with its left edge as a swing center. It is done. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 110, CU is connected to the left side of the drawing of S stand 2SF in the same manner as P stand.

  In the S unit 2 SF, the bet number is set by using the gaming points, and the gaming points are added and updated according to the winning. For this reason, when playing a game in S stand 2SF, the insertion operation of the medal is unnecessary. Therefore, no medal insertion slot and medal payout opening are provided in the S stand 2SF.

  Inside the casing of S stand 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. Plural kinds of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral part of the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF.

  A touch panel display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display equivalent to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (such as game points and points) the same as the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game, etc. Is displayed. The display 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display 54F of FIG. 38, and the display is controlled on the CU side. The display 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, but, similarly to the P base, the panel portion further below (at a position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. 110) You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout openings.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has one bet BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “gaming point = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the gaming state When setting the number of bets (for example, "playing point = 3" in RT (Replay Time) where the normal gaming state before occurrence of BB and the winning probability of replay become high probability, "playing point = 2" in bonus) And a stop switch 8LF, 8CF, 8RF which is operated when the rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped respectively is provided. There is.

  When playing a game in the S unit 2SF, first, as in the P unit, after securing the game points using the adjacent CUs, the bet number is set using the game points. The game points are obtained by deducting the remaining amount of prepaid cards inserted in the CU, points, or stored medals (corresponding to the P balls) deposited in the game arcade. In order to use the game points, one bet switch 5SF or the max bet switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, the gaming points are deducted by 1 by setting the number of bets, and the display of the gaming points on the display 510F is also decremented and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined in accordance with the bet number and the game state becomes effective, and the operation of the start switch 7SF becomes effective, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF continuously fluctuate. In this state, when one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the transparent window.

  And one game is ended by stopping all the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) determined in advance on activated pay lines is each reel 2LF, 2CF, In the case of stopping as the display result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a gaming point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the gaming point of the display 510F is added and updated.

  In the case of the S unit, it is possible to count the game points in the same manner as the P unit. As shown in FIG. 35, the S-unit 2SF is provided with a count button 28SF for counting gaming points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 38). The player executes the counting operation based on the display 510F displaying an indication prompting the counting operation, as in the P-unit, at an arbitrary timing. Then, the game points are counted and the game points decrease while the points increase are displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P side and the S side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3 F as a status information response via the P unit 2 F or the S unit (slot machine) 2 SF. You may

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be roughly divided into special roles with a transition to the Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB), and small roles with the payout of medals. There is also a replay role (replay) that can start the next game without requiring the setting of the bet number.

  The main control unit (S) that controls the S 2 SF when a start operation is detected, for example, which of the plural types of winning combinations is to be won or none of the winning combinations is not won. (Corresponding to the main control unit 161F) of This determination is determined, for example, by drawing random numbers generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the stop operation of the reel by the player, and draws the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range on the basis of the stop operation, otherwise the other symbols Control to draw in, stop the three symbols, and determine the presence or absence of a prize. When the main control base determines that a prize is to be won, the main control base gives the player the gaming points corresponding to the type of the prize (adding the gaming points).

  The payout control unit of the S-unit 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hole in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of S stand 2SF is delivered to the hole from the slot machine maker separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to the board mounting board for connecting the wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26F shown in FIG. 37, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32F provided on the game board 26F.

  To connect the mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and the convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side at a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF) in the main body frame 2aSF of the S stand 2SF Connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34aF and 34bF and the concave drawer connector 33F shown in FIG. 37, and are devised so that the substrate attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. Wires extending from the concave drawer connector are connected to the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF, various operation switches (buttons), and the like.

  In addition, S stand 2SF has a configuration that performs open detection of front door 2bSF corresponding to front frame 5F of P stand 2F and connection detection between main frame 2aSF and the board mounting board, and loop-like power line 500F The main control board is also connected in series.

  A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value by the S unit, and a variable display capable of variably displaying plural types of identification information that can be identified respectively It is a slot machine in which one game is ended by the display result being derived to the device, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before being derived, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow occurrence of a plurality of types of winnings, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine including a derivation control means to perform and a giving means for giving a game value when the winning is generated is configured.

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and the transmission / reception mode thereof. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 111 is obtained by replacing the term in FIG. 40 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further description is omitted.

  In addition, as information to be output to the outside of the P platform 2F, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning information signal capable of specifying the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won and the number of winnings, and in the current gaming state A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. In addition, as information output to the outside of P stand 2F, it is not the structure output outside from an information output circuit like the pachinko gaming machine 1 mentioned above, but the information is output from the main control part 161F through the payout control part 171F. You may do it.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information of the number of held memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a pending storage number signal capable of specifying the latest pending storage number in the current gaming state can be output from the gaming control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  Further, from the game control microcomputer of the main control board 16F to the payout control microcomputer of the payout control board 17F, in addition to the information as described above, the following firing stop signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, magnet Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal prize detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the microcomputer for payout control may manage these various information.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the touch of the player's hand at the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly performing a shooting stop control when operated). Is operated, when the bat operating handle 25F is not rotated by more than a fixed rotation angle, or when a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied, such as when the CU3F and the P base 2F are not electrically connected. Output when determined by the game control microcomputer.

  In the game control microcomputer, the electric wave sensor detection signal is inputted to the main control board 16F by the electric wave detection signal from the above electric wave sensor (electric wave switch) 163F for detecting an abnormal electric wave (illegal electric wave). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal is a game ball using a magnet in a configuration in which a magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (unauthorized magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (microcomputer for game control). The magnet detection error is determined in the game control microcomputer by the fact that the magnetic detection signal from the magnet sensor is input to the main control board 16F based on the illegal game using the magnet for changing the track etc., and the determination Output based on

  In the configuration where the incorrect winning detection signal is connected to the main control board 16F, a count switch for detecting winning balls to the special winning opening, the special winning opening is closed, and to the special winning opening of the winning sensors 162F. Is detected based on the detection signal of the prize sensor for detecting a prize ball, and when an irregular prize error is judged in the microcomputer for game control by the detection of the prize ball into the special prize opening, it is outputted based on the judgment .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) to be transmitted from the main control portion 161F to the payout control portion 171F is completed when the power of the P platform 2F is turned on. Such a game state information setting completion signal is used, for example, as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P base 2F side (pachinko gaming machine side).

  Also, in addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for payout control of the payout control board 17F to the microcomputer for game control of the main control board 16F, the following glass frame / body frame open signal, number of winning Various information such as abnormal signal, unauthorized addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, nighttime open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving shift request signal The transmission may be performed, and the game control microcomputer side may manage these various information.

  The glass frame / main body frame open signal is a glass door 6F or a glass door 6F or a payout control microcomputer as a detection signal from the glass door open detection switch 12F or the front frame open detection switch 13F is input to the payout control board 17F. When it is determined that the front frame 5F is released, it is output based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether or not the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than the predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with regard to the number of winnings according to the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Based on the judgment, it is judged whether or not the winning number is abnormal, and when the winning number abnormality is judged, it is outputted based on the judgment.

  When the payout control board 17F receives a ball addition request from CU3F in a state other than during card insertion into the CU3F, the payout control microcomputer determines an incorrect addition error in the unauthorized addition detection signal, and the judgment is made based on the judgment. Output based on.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer as the radio wave detection signal from the above radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F for detecting abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormality signal, game sensor 162F, ball lift switch (upper) 41aF, far ball detection switch 33AF, out ball detection switch 701F, and the firing ball detection switch is a game ball by the change of the capacitance by passage of the ball It is composed of a proximity switch to be detected, and it is judged by the payout control microcomputer whether or not such a proximity switch is abnormal based on the number of detected balls, and when the abnormality is judged, the judgment Output based on For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is constantly turned on by the unauthorized electric wave, the firing of the ball is not detected, while the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the firing ball detection switch, A wrinkle is generated in the number of firing balls and recovery balls (out balls), and it is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal.

  The nighttime opening detection signal is output when it is determined that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer as follows. At night when the P stand 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on detection signals output from the glass door open detection switch 12F and the front frame open detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F is released is counted. Then, when the P base 2F is powered on, any one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer based on the count value of the number of times of release which is output from the counting counter to the payout control board 17F when the power is turned on. The height is determined. Note that the nighttime open detection signal may be output by detecting the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F.

  The count notification request signal is output to request notification of the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that there is a count request according to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to carry out voice output and numerical display regarding counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify information of card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON when it is determined by the payout control microcomputer that the card can be removed by the CU 3 F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the touch of the player's hand (for example, when the predetermined period is not detected) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving shift request signal is “0”. , Or when it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition such as when the card is not inserted in CU3F, or when the fluctuation display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal Is output as an operation request signal to shift to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control such as light emission stop of various lamps is reduced.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown where the information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening in which the gaming ball has won and the number of winnings. The external output of such a winning information signal may be applied to P platform 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the hold storage number signal, the firing stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted to the payout control microcomputer from the game control microcomputer of P platform 2F described above The present invention may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. In addition, transmitting various signals such as the glass frame / body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted to the game control microcomputer from the payout control microcomputer of the P platform 2F is described above. It may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modification and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above will be listed.

  (1) In the present embodiment, the addition serial number and the counting serial number are defined in the message format as separate data respectively, but they may be standardized as the request serial number. In particular, since addition of game balls and counting of game balls are reverse processes, it is difficult to think that both processes occur simultaneously, and from that point of view it is possible to reduce both telegram data amounts by sharing both serial numbers It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request occurs until the request serial number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the serial number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request serial number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the case of the example of FIG. 48, it is conceivable to set the counting serial number included in the last status information response indicating the completion of counting to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  In addition, request serial numbers such as addition serial numbers and counting serial numbers, and normal serial numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated according to a predetermined rule stored by both P base 2F and CU3F (additional update, subtraction It may be updated or updated by another arithmetic expression. In this case, the serial numbers are not "continuous numbers" such as 1, 2, 3 but data updated with a concept such as A, B, C and so on.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units) which is an example of a game machine is applied to the above-mentioned game system, for example, the reels and various sensor portions attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels Corresponds to the board, the other configuration corresponds to the front frame of P units. However, the detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33AF of the front frame shown in FIG. 38, the launch control board 31F, and the launch motor 18F are unnecessary for the S-unit.

  The conventional S car is provided with a credit function, and when this is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the bet number is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, an upper limit is set for the credit, and when a prize occurs while the number of credits has reached the upper limit, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S unit according to the present embodiment, when the bet number is set, the gaming points are subtracted, and when the winning occurs, the gaming points are added. Further, when the number of gaming points reaches a predetermined number, a display prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary for the credit to reach the upper limit and the medals to be paid out as in the conventional S car. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper in S stand concerning this embodiment.

  As a result, the game arcade does not need to secure a large number of medals, and the economic burden is reduced. In addition, the game arcade is freed from the task of replenishment and recovery of medals and the maintenance task for dealing with medal clogging and the like. The game player is relieved from the inconvenience of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credits are full, and it becomes easier to concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if the S is medalless, the player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by piling up boxes containing medals beside his seat. An inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, since the function of displaying a dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring. In addition, as for the dollar box display in the case of S, it is desirable to replace a large number of balls with a large number of medals being loaded.

  When S machine is applied as a gaming machine, each data is as follows using two types of data of "points" and "gaming points" and two types of data of "credit" and "credit excess point". It is also possible to configure a gaming system to be converted. These four types of data are displayed on the S display 510F or the display 29SF.

  First, when a prepaid card remaining amount, stored medal, or conversion operation from a point (a lending operation, a stored medal payout operation, a point payout operation) is detected, each is withdrawn and converted to a gaming point Ru.

  The game points are data corresponding to medals in the conventional slot machine. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to display the points of the gaming points on the display unit 510F or the display unit 29SF and to display medal images corresponding to the number of the gaming points. For example, when a simulated insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) in which the player touches this medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears, and the game points are subtracted, Instead, one bet number is set. The bet number is set to 3 which is the maximum value by performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times.

  Thereafter, when the pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, the credit is added according to the detection. An upper limit (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit, a credit excess point is added.

  The bet number setting can be performed as described above using gaming points, and can also be performed using credits. That is, when the one-sheet BET switch 5SF is operated, the bet number setting value is incremented by one and the credit is decremented by one. Further, if the MAX BET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, scores corresponding to the winning are added to the credits. When a prize winning that exceeds the upper limit of the credit occurs, the score for the over is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a prize is generated exceeding the upper limit of the credit in the conventional slot machine. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess point on the display 510F or the display 29SF, and to display medal images corresponding in number to the credit excess point. In addition, it is desirable to change the color of the medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game points.

  In addition, it is desirable that a credit excess point be converted into a gaming point by the operation of the player. For example, when a simulated medal conversion operation (for example, an operation such as pushing a medal) in which the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to the gaming point is detected, the medal image disappears and the credit excess is exceeded. It is assumed that points are subtracted and gaming points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit falls below the upper limit, the credit excess point may be automatically converted to the credit.

  When the player executes the counting operation, each of the gaming points, credits, and over-credit points are counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are listed as “card number of balls holdings + play points + credits + credit excess points”. Note that "the number of balls possessing a card" is a point before conversion (the number of balls possessed by the player at this moment) which has not been converted into gaming points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, gaming points, credits, and excess credit points may be stored in both by exchanging data between CU and S, or points may be It may be stored only at the CU side, and at the S side only for others. Also, the excess credit point may be displayed as a dollar box display.

  Also, in the above description, the example using credit excess points has been described, but it is not necessary to use credit excess points. In this case, when the credit upper limit is exceeded, the game points may be added.

  (3) In the present embodiment, gaming points are added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, the game points are added by consuming the balls (stored medals). In other words, the card frequency or storage balls are converted into gaming points. On the other hand, the card frequency and the storage balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card frequency and the balls may be converted into points once.

  (4) In the present embodiment, the gaming points are converted to points by the counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting 3 points may be converted into points. Alternatively, it may be converted into a number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined percentage of the score by less than 100%.

  (5) The recording medium for recording points in an identifiable manner may be a portable terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the CU is provided with a communication unit for communicating with the portable terminal, and by holding the portable terminal over the communication unit, the CU recognizes the ID stored in the portable terminal, and thereafter, this embodiment will be described. Enables the game in the procedure as described. On the other hand, when the game is over, by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit again, the points at the end of the game are added to the points of the player through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting the gaming points may be provided on the CU side. The operation means in that case may be displayed on the touch panel or may be configured by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when a card return operation is performed and there are uncounted gaming points remaining, a message prompting counting is displayed on the P or CU display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted gaming point remains when a card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P unit or CU side, In addition to the fact that uncounted gaming points remain, it may be notified that the card is returned after the completion of the automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted gaming point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that the player may temporarily leave the seat, and the indicator (the CU side or the P base side) is A message may be displayed confirming whether it is a temporary absence. Furthermore, the display may be configured by a touch panel, and the player may be able to make an input in response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily leaving the seat, the card may be ejected once while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side or the P side or both sides. Thereafter, when a card of the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, you may raise the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full. That is, the judgment reference value of the full tank judgment may be made different between the big hit and the time when it is not so. This makes it possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during a big hit and making a full tank determination immediately and stopping the firing.

  (9) The number of gaming balls when a big hit occurs is stored, and during the big hit, even if it exceeds the judgment threshold value of full tank, the number of playing balls increased after the big hit is acceptable If it is within the value (for example, 1000 balls), it may be determined not to be full.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times more than twice may be adopted. This can prevent an erroneous operation. Further, in this case, in the one-time operation, another function different from the counting function may be exhibited. For example, if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after one operation, the function to light the lamp for calling the store clerk is exhibited, and within 2 seconds from 1 operation It is also conceivable to exert a counting function when the second operation is detected.

  (11) The "predetermined processing" of the "recording medium processing means for processing so as to enable predetermined processing with the gaming points as the points when the predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected" is, for example, Processing of CU when used by inserting a card ejected from a CU into another CU connected to another game machine (processing of deducting and converting a ball that is recorded in a card identifiable manner into a game ball) And ball sharing processing, or wagon service processing etc.). Alternatively, the "predetermined process" may be a process for accepting a card by a prize exchange for prize exchange and consuming points specified by the card to enable prize exchange.

  Further, the above-mentioned “recording medium processing operation for processing so as to enable predetermined processing as points” is, for example, a card return operation. Further, the “predetermined process” is a process of specifying the mark on the card inserted in the CU so as to be identifiable, when the card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “identifiable recording” means recording the points directly on the card, and without recording the points on the card, to the server connected to the CU with the card ID and the points connected. It includes a method of transmitting and associating and storing an ID and a point in the server.

  (12) If the counting operation is performed during the firing of the ball, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of gaming balls at that time is equal to or less than the reference value. In addition, even if the number of gaming balls when the counting operation is detected during firing of the balls exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is determined to be a predetermined number. If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of gaming balls when the counting operation is detected does not reach the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  In addition, it may be judged whether or not the firing operation of the ball is detected whether or not the game is in progress, and the number of balls in the game (floating balls floating in the game area 27F) becomes 0. It may be determined whether there is (not in play) or not (in play). Furthermore, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is in motion, whether or not the jackpot is in progress, whether the attacker is open, or the like.

  Furthermore, "in the game" in the case of invalidating the counting operation in the game by applying S units as a gaming machine is, for example, a period from when the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF start rotating until they stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected to when the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF stop.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 48, although P is equipped with a counting ball number counter that temporarily stores counted counting balls (balls having balls), it does not have a counter that stores the accumulated value of counting balls. . However, a counter ball cumulative storage counter may be provided on the P side for storing the cumulative value of the counter ball. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card balls (count balls). If balls are recorded in the inserted card itself in this area, the card is held. The current number of balls held by the player, including the balls, is stored. For this reason, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game can not be specified only in this area. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls sent from the P unit after the game starts, and when the balls are converted to game balls, the CU Subtract balls.

  (14) The display prompting the counting operation in FIG. 51 may be a sentence "Please count because there are game balls remaining" in a sentence, or the counting button 28F is displayed on the screen and blinks. It may be a display that In addition, the P platform 2F that has received the card return preparation state ON may blink the game balls of the game ball number display 29F, or when the game ball number display 29F is configured by the image display device Alternatively, the message described in the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29F to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to make the number of gaming points to be converted into points different in one operation different in accordance with the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, in the case of long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more) While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in the case of a short push (e.g., a continuous operation of less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the number of remaining game balls is small, for example, less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all the game balls be counted by the operation of the count button.

  (16) If, according to the remaining number of gaming points, the number of points counted in one short press operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of gaming points is less than 200, all the gaming points are counted in one short press operation of the count button. When the number of gaming points is 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of playing points is 5,000 or more and less than 10,000, 2,000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When the game balls (game points) are counted and point conversion is performed, control may be performed to output not only counting display but also counting sound from the speaker 270F. In addition, when counting the gaming points, it is conceivable to perform an image display in which the balls fall one by one from the ball storage plate to the counter.

  (18) A conversion display for converting gaming points into points based on the counting operation (a display showing counting of game balls and showing an increase in the number of balls) and subtraction of the game points on data The timing of performing the operation of adding points can be various. The above operation may be performed after the conversion display is completed. Also, for that purpose, the counting data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is finished. In addition, such a modification is applicable similarly, also when converting a point into a gaming point.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response system in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station is adopted. However, the primary station and the secondary station The relationship with may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting a communication scheme having such a master-slave relationship, a scheme may be adopted in which both transmit data to the other when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In the present embodiment, the game ball (game point) is stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game ball (game point) is stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side is stored. In this case, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (point holding points) are stored only on the CU side, but may be stored also on the gaming machine side. In particular, the game ball (game point) is stored only on the game machine side, while the card holding ball (point held) is stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed by the display 54F may be similarly performed by the display 312F.

  (22) In CU3F, the number of stored game balls is updated based on the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) and the value of the subtraction ball number counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P-base side If the value of the number of gaming balls becomes negative when the number of gaming balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P-base side, an error (abnormality) determination is made Error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, for halls) An error notification may be performed by the management computer or the hall server 801F).

  (23) If a loan operation or a conversion operation (rental operation) from a point (ball) to a game point (game ball) is detected, the game points may be incremented one by one, In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) may be displayed to be counted up. In addition, conversely, even when the counting operation of the gaming points is executed, the points may be displayed so as to count up a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units when counting up and displaying the gaming points or points may be set from among a plurality of types. At the time of setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S displays.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while it is detected by the touch sensor that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidation of the counting operation means both detecting the counting operation but not performing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Alternatively, even if the player does not invalidate the counting operation just by touching the hitting operation handle, and turns the hitting operation handle to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output, even if the counting operation is invalidated. Good.

  In these cases, when the counting operation is detected, a message of "Please release the handle" may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the screen of the touch panel, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the game machine side or on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display on the gaming machine side or CU side described as the touch panel type display.

  (26) A gaming system according to the present embodiment includes point use operating means for executing predetermined point use processing using points. Here, the predetermined point use process includes a process for executing a wagon service or a process of dividing and sharing points (balls having balls) (a process of dividing and transferring points to others). It is a concept. The point use operating means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote control provided to a game clerk in order to instruct the CU or the game machine to execute a point use process.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 42 to 65 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming device such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, for example, CU3F, P The present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming devices such as a stand 2F, a jet counter, a POS terminal and the like. Also, the control of the request sequence numbers shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b inside the CU3F, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF. You may

  For example, when the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323F transmits the game ball addition request message, and the consent to this is sent. Alternatively, the SC 325 b F returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325 a F based on the response from the P base 2 F.

  When the processing related to the game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits the game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323F. Then, the communication control IC 325aF sends back an acceptance or rejection telegram in response to the response on the side of the P base 2F.

  When processing concerning the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b, the SC request is based on the request of the P base 2F side by the SC 325bF CU control unit via the communication control IC 325aF The CU control unit 323F sends an acceptance or rejection message to the H.323F in response to the message.

  When the processing relating to the counting request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325aF, the communication control IC 325aF transmits the counting request message based on the request of the P base 2F side, The security chip (SC) 325 b sends back the rejection message based on the instruction of the CU control unit 323 F.

  (28) In the above embodiment, the identification of the player's identity is performed by the card ID, but instead or in addition to that, the player's identity is determined by the player's fingerprint or the biomass such as retina The determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the CU stores the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the card ID and the insertion time coincide with each other as the score at the current time, but the gaming machine and the CU3F The CU is controlled to store the score transmitted from the gaming machine as the score at the present time, with the communication started as a further condition after the communication is interrupted and until the predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) elapses. May be Specifically, the CU control unit 323F is provided with a timer for counting a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after the communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F is interrupted, and at the start of communication between the gaming machine and the CU3F (at restoration). It is determined whether or not the timer is still counting (the time is not up), and it is determined that the counting is in progress as a further condition, and the CU transmitted the score sent from the gaming machine at the current time. Control to memorize as a score.

  In addition, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine as a score at the current time on condition of matching of the final serial number etc. used between CU3F and P platform 2F. .

  (30) In the above-mentioned embodiment, although what directly added the number of game balls and the game points was shown by generation of a prize, instead, points are added by generation of a prize, and the added points are added May be controlled to add the number of game balls and the game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, in the case where the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls) of the player's possession and the game points corresponding to the withdrawal are added, the withdrawn value Although what showed the addition of the game points of the same value as, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add the game points equivalent to the consumption tax equivalent amount to the actually withdrawn value.

  (32) In the present embodiment, the key management server is installed at the key management center remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game arcade. This makes it easier to speed up the communication between the CU and the key management server as compared with the case where the key management server is installed outside the game arcade, and can reduce the incidence rate of communication failure.

  (33) The CU control unit 323F receives substrate security information (including a substrate authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hole server 801F. However, instead of this, substrate security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without interposing the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable to directly connect the key management server 800F and the CU with a line, or to provide a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the balls and written to the card and discharged. By doing this, the interruption process is performed, and then the player who interrupted the game comes back, inserts the card into the original CU3F again, and converts the balls into the game balls, thereby making the balls into 125 game balls It showed what was converted and it became possible to play a game. However, instead of this, CU3F stores the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation as a deposit ball (C-ID and the insertion time are also stored) different from the game ball and the ball, and does not add the ball. Discontinue processing by discharging the card without recording the ball. When the ejection card is reinserted, all of the deposit balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and controlled so as to be playable. Alternatively, the deposit ball in this case is transmitted from the P unit to the CU based on the interruption operation and stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is reinserted. The information on the deposit ball may be transmitted to the P platform side and stored as the game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when transmitting the information of the deposit ball, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P unit as the addition instruction of the game ball.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is temporarily added to the balls, written to the card and ejected, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. By making the card, you can not exchange prizes with that card. As the method of prohibiting the prize exchange in this manner, it is conceivable to adopt the following method other than using the flag during the interruption of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the CU transmits the information (including the card ID) to the hall server, and the hall server side stores the interrupted card of the player as the interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, the POS or the like inquires of the hall server, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for the exchange of prizes is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted in advance from the hall server to the POS side. In addition, if the card used for the prize exchange is an interruption card, the prize exchange using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the gaming machine is determined that “the game device (CU) is determined with the gaming points as the points, on condition that the conversion process for all the gaming points is completed (gaming points = 0) Processing of receiving a card with a prize exchange and consuming points specified in the card to enable exchange of prizes, inserting a card ejected from a CU into another CU connected to another game machine Includes a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (card return button 322F operation)) for performing processing of the CU in the case of using it.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, ball balls, game balls, remaining amount of cards, balls, and others, ball number information and game stand information have been described. However, the gaming information also includes other information related to gaming on the gaming machine. For example, when the player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on the variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information capable of specifying the character Is also included in the game information. Such information of the screen design including the character matching the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game and stored, for example, in association with the card ID of the player, and when the game is newly started, It may be downloaded from the server to the CU or P.

  (37) In the game ball number indicator 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased by one in conjunction with the firing or counting operation of the balls. Further, in the game ball number display 29F, a display is performed in which the number of balls is increased one by one or each predetermined number of units in accordance with the ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, it is not simply to digitally display the number of game balls, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to ball bullets, or by counting Whether it is something that is due to the occurrence of a prize, whether it is due to withdrawal of a ball, or it is due to lending operation, etc., an image according to the type is displayed together with the display update of the number of game balls You may do it.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, although the counting display interlocked with the counting operation is performed in the gaming ball number display 29F, when the gaming ball number display 29F is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. Similarly to the display 54F, the game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be reduced while the image display in which the balls are increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display 54F, a display (for example, a display of a bar graph) in which data of the number of gaming balls is converted over time into data of the number of balls held Display the number of game balls and the number of balls digitally as it is, increase the number of balls while decreasing the number of game balls, or repeat the display of moving part of the number of game balls to the number of balls It is conceivable.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 51, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected with the game ball remaining is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined standby period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the waiting period has elapsed, for example, it is conceivable to invalidate the previous card return operation. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even if the standby period has elapsed, the display on the CU 3 F or P base 2 F side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected in the state where game balls remain may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined standby period. In this case, after all the game balls have been counted according to the counting operation after the card returning operation is detected, the card returning process may be executed by executing the card returning operation again. Alternatively, when counting of all the game balls is completed, or before or after that, a display may be displayed on the CU 3 F or P platform 2 F side display to prompt a card return operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when at least one game ball remains when the card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 51 is executed. However, the process shown in FIG. 51 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  In addition, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game ball may be made faster than that at the normal time. For example, in the normal counting operation, the game balls are displayed one by one, while in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, a display in which the game balls are collectively counted in plurals, or all games It is conceivable to display a display in which the balls are counted at once.

  Furthermore, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all the game balls are counted, but a predetermined number of gaming balls larger than those in the normal counting operation are counted. It may be For example, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted in one counting operation in a normal counting operation, but a larger number of 200 game balls are counted in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. It may be done. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all the game balls is reduced as compared with the case where there is no card return operation, and all the game balls are completed earlier Can.

  In addition, when a card return operation is detected in a state in which game balls are left, counting of all the game balls is started even if there is no detection of the counting operation, and then processing is shifted to card return processing. It is also good. In this case, when the counting of all the game balls is started, the fact that the counting of all the game balls is started may be displayed by P platform 2F or CU3F. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not counting of all the game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P platform 2F or CU3F, card return operation again, etc.) is detected. The counting of all the game balls may be started on the condition of the game.

  In addition, it is possible to invalidate the card return operation which is detected in the game (during the ball firing), but it is not to invalidate the card return operation, but to count operation in the game on P side The processing of counting based on may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the CU 3 F determines whether or not the number of gaming balls is 0 when a card return operation is detected. However, the P platform 2F may perform such a determination. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating that the card return operation is present is transmitted from the CU3F to the P base 2F, and the number of game balls stored by the P base 2F that received it is 0 It is determined whether the If it is 0, it transmits to the CU 3 F that the number of gaming balls is 0 or data for permitting the card return, but if it is not 0, the number of gaming balls is not 0 or it waits for the card return or prohibits the card return. Send the indicated data to CU3F.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P platform 2F determines whether the card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be included in the CU 3 F. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P-table 2F transmits data indicating that to the CU 3F. It is conceivable that the CU 3 F that has received it determines whether or not a card return operation has been performed within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  In the above embodiment, while the P platform 2F detects the counting operation and the CU3F detects the card returning operation, the CU 3F detects the counting operation while the P platform 2F detects the card returning operation. It is good also as composition which P stand 2F or CU3F detects with both operation. Further, the attachment positions of the counting button and the card card return button may be both CU3F and P 2F, and one may be CU 3F or P 2F.

  (39) Check the presence or absence of change in the number of balls or game balls with CU or P. If the number of balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, notify that effect with CU or P. You may do so. Alternatively, a signal for notification may be output to an external device (hall computer, call lamp on P). This makes it easy for the clerk to grasp the game abandoned platform with, for example, a few remaining balls left.

  (40) Alternatively, if the game ball of the player has changed although the card is not inserted in the CU, the CU or P may notify that effect. Alternatively, a signal for notification may be output to an external device (hall computer, call lamp on P). Thus, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, the clerk can easily grasp a stand where the ball caught on the game board gets a prize and the game ball is left being paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 F compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2 F with the data stored by itself, and the data on the P table 2 F side is not improperly flooded Make sure to correct the data. If an error is determined on the CU3F side, such a situation is merely a factor of CU3F exchange (the post-exchange CU3F does not store regular data to be compared), and is based on a fraudulent act. Because there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the clerk of the hall confirms the error and cancels the error in the portable terminal device such as the remote control. However, as described above, when the CU 3 F is replaced with a new one, the CU 3 F may not perform the above-described error determination at all. Alternatively, CU3F may not be provided with the above-mentioned error determination function regardless of whether it is replaced or not.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the player-owned value, is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309F at the start of the game, and removed from the card insertion / ejection slot 309F after the game is over The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the beginning of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game is over. That is, the recording medium reception means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium reception means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium reception means after the game is over.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 F notifies the P platform 2 F of information waiting for card removal, and the P platform 2 F that has received the notification of the information indicates that "Please remove card" and the variable display device 278 F Has been described, for example, the notification of card removal is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3 F displays “Please remove card” on the display 54 F and / or the display 312 F while notifying the P base 2 F of information waiting for card removal. In this case, the CU side may be controlled to be notified of card removal.

  (44) In the present embodiment, after the P platform 2 F receives the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = ON, it continues until the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = OFF is received. The configuration for continuing the notification of removal has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P platform 2F is waiting for card removal even if the notification of card removal is given for a certain period of time after receiving the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = ON. After receiving the command of the status information request including ON, the notification of card removal may be performed intermittently from when the command of the status information request including waiting for card removal = OFF is received.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the P store 2F in the counting history sequence receives the "store code" notified from the security board 325F of the CU3F when the card is received, and the "store code stored in the P store 2F. In the case where they coincide, recovery processing of the counting history is performed, and in the case of non-coincidence, the recovery processing of the counting history is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the counting history sequence, the P platform 2F receives the card from the security board 325F of CU3F when receiving the card, "store code" and "SC substrate ID", and P platform 2F. It may be configured to perform matching determination with the held "store code" and "SC substrate ID". Furthermore, without performing matching determination of “store code” in the counting history sequence, “store code” and “purchase code” notified from security board 325 F of CU 3 F when the P base 2 F receives the card when the recovery request is received. At least one of “SC substrate ID” and at least one of “store code” and “SC substrate ID” held in P platform 2F are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed. In the case of non-coincidence, the continuation of the game may be prohibited.

  (46) Also, an IC tag may be attached to the pachinko ball. This makes it possible to specify which pachinko ball is a ball at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any winning area (winning opening or gate). For this reason, in the tabulation process, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the emission intensity T of the same pachinko ball specified by the IC tag and the passage area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately grasp which region the pachinko ball tends to pass depending on the firing intensity. Furthermore, by associating a ball unit price (see FIG. 42) transmitted from CU3F with a pachinko ball with an IC tag, it becomes possible to change the ball unit price for each ball, and the number of remaining balls and scheduled time Accordingly, it is possible to change the ball unit price according to circumstances and expand the degree of freedom of the player's game.

  (47) When the ball hitting operation handle 25F is fixed by the player, the above-mentioned correction processing of the emission intensity can not be performed. Therefore, the fact that the hitting operation handle 25F is fixed may be detected and notified. In addition, when the firing strength is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the bat operating handle 25F is fixed.

  (48) For example, it can be detected by a touch sensor whether or not the player is touching the bat operating handle 25F.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player does not touch the bat operating handle 25F, the above-described correction processing of the emission intensity may be performed.

  In addition, in the firing abnormality determination processing, when it is detected that the player does not touch the bat operating handle 25F and it is detected that the bat operating handle 25F is fixed, it is determined that the firing abnormality is present. You may

  (49) In the present embodiment, the hall computer 900 is configured to acquire the information of P platform 2F via CU3F, but the hall computer 900 directly transmits the information of P platform 2F from P platform 2F without passing through CU3F. It may be a configuration to acquire.

  (50) In the present embodiment, when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of CU3F is in the card insertion state, the P base 2F transmits only the response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the card insertion notification command is received while the state of the CU3F is in the card insertion state, a warning is displayed on the display 54F or the like to perform notification or the upper server The notification of may be performed.

  (51) In the present embodiment, when the game is set to “Close store”, no card is inserted, and for the gaming machine in which game balls remain in P platform 2F, card ID = 0 and card insertion time = 0. The configuration has been described in which it is assumed that the virtual card has been inserted, and the remaining game balls are counted, stored in the card, and returned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card ID of the virtual card considered to be inserted is counted as the card ID of the card inserted immediately before closing the store, and the remaining game balls are inserted immediately before closing the store It may be configured to be automatically associated with the card that was used.

  (52) In the present embodiment, when the recovery request 2 command is transmitted to the P-unit 2F even though the CU3F determines that the recovery request is unnecessary, the P-unit 2F again determines the recovery processing. The configuration has been described in which the process NG is notified to the CU 3 F when the execution is unnecessary. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is not necessary to perform recovery processing determination again in P platform 2F, a warning is displayed on display 54F etc. to perform notification, or notification to that effect to the upper server You may do it.

  (53) In the present embodiment, if the state where the key management server 800F does not reach the CU control unit 323F after transmitting the health check request command continues for 10 days, for example, it is determined that the health check request time limit is over. The configuration has been described in which the timed operation function of the CU3F or P platform 2F is disabled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of days until the timed operation function of CU3F or P 2F is disabled is displayed on the display 54F, or the timed operation function having a plurality of restriction levels is stepped You may make it invalid.

  (54) In the present embodiment, the control of the setting and cancellation of the alarm setting has been described in relation to the alarm setting based on the unauthorized operation to the P base 2F and the alarm setting based on the P base line disconnection. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to control of setting and cancellation of alarm setting in relation to alarm setting based on fraud on P base 2F and alarm setting on another fraud based on P base 2F. The present invention may be applied to control of setting and cancellation of alarm settings in three or more relationships among a plurality of fraud based alarm settings for P base 2F and alarm settings based on P base line disconnection.

  (55) In the present embodiment, the configuration for storing the security related information in the register in the payout control circuit 171aF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be stored in a register (for example, data reception register 723bF) in the communication control circuit 171bF. As a result, the security related information is stored as encrypted in the communication control circuit 171bF, and the security is further improved.

  (56) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, it is determined by the P itself that the P board 2F has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or the development CU3DF in the past, The configuration in which the flag indicating the determination result is transmitted to the commercial CU 3 F and detected by the SC 325 b F has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined by the P itself that it is the P base 2F that has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or CU3DF for development in the past, detected and reported by the P itself Also, the configuration may be such that the SC 325bF of CU3F determines and detects that it is a P-table 2F that has been connected to the game board development jig 3EF or CU3DF for development in the past based on the identification ID.

  (57) In the above embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys. However, instead of the various authentication keys, for example, an authentication ID or the like may be used to perform authentication.

  (58) The above-mentioned display 54F, 510F may be configured by a display with a touch panel. Also, the information transmitted and received between the P unit and the CU is not limited to the one described in the above embodiment, and it is also possible to play what information is output from the P unit to the CU It may be possible to make an input setting by touch operation on the touch panel of the display 54F, 510F of the machine.

  Also in S stand 2 SF, the information output from S stand 2 SF is converted and transmitted to hall con- tain similarly to the above-mentioned P stand 2F, but the information to be converted includes, for example, big bonus winning and regular bonus winning And various small winnings, information indicating the replay time, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. 111, the number of times the game has been started, and the like. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of payouts when coins are paid out along with the winning.

(59) When the payout control unit 171F receives the value (= 63) at which the one-round flag stands, one or more of the following a to c are adopted and executed as the abnormality control processing. You may control as follows.
a Payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F, a display of P stand 2F (for example, a variable display device that variably displays 7-segment display 50F and identification information (symbol)) Displayed by
b In the CU 3 F that has received the anomaly information from the payout control unit 171 F, an anomaly notification such as an error number is performed.
c An alarm notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from CU3F.

  (60) In the present embodiment, the history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the delivery side table includes information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, and discard information, etc. An example is shown. However, not limited to this, for example, maintenance information, repair information, etc. may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information and the like as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. An example is included. However, not limited to this, for example, maintenance information, repair information, etc. may be included as history information of the game board 26F.

  (61) In the present embodiment, necessary information from the terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF (eg, as shown in FIG. 107, for example, An example has been shown in which the delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting information such as shipping date, installation date, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an input unit (for example, an internal unit in the machine history management center 800AF can be provided by entering necessary information in application documents and sending necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. The delivery side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. A terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is connected via a communication line even to a terminal directly connected to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF). The terminal may be a terminal (e.g., a terminal such as a warehouse trader or a second-hand trader connected via the Internet).

  (62) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which the delivery side table and the main control side table are stored in one large-capacity storage device 8005F. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the dispensing side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device storing the dispensing side table and the main control side table are stored. Mass storage devices. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can delete the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F on a security chip ID basis. Even if it is associated with the security chip ID of the pair, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be separately erased on a security chip ID basis. As a result, even in the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period of use being longer than the front frame 5F) having different periods of use can be deleted individually, each can be managed appropriately. it can.

  (63) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which the delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF by a manufacturer other than a hall or a warehouse operator. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hall itself may update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (64) In this embodiment, when a second-hand dealer resells the foreframe 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs the same, an example of storing resale information as history information of the foreframe 5F and the game board 26F is described. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when moving to another hole (for example, the same corporate code hole) in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as mere movement of 26F (management state (status) may be “installed” to “installed”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between the holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined to be abnormal. In addition, if you move the front frame 5F and the game board 26F between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and move to other prefectures between the halls of the same corporate code, perform the same processing as resale May be

  (65) In the present embodiment, the machine history management center 800AF is set, for example, as follows. The machine history management center 800AF causes a user registered in the system, which has been authenticated by clear authentication, to log in to the system. The authentication at login is (a) that the specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The designated user is not locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the effective period of the password, login is enabled, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message displays that the password change is necessary. If the password has been changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  If the authentication is successful, the machine history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures of the user and the continuous login error date and time. On the other hand, if the authentication fails, the machine history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the user is present. Note that each time the number of login failures reaches the “maximum number of login attempts” (when it is an integral multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The machine history management center 800AF updates and sets the password expiration date when (a) the user is newly registered, (b) the password is cleared, and (c) the password is changed by the user himself. The updated and set password is valid from that point on until the [Password Valid Period] elapses.

  The machine history management center 800AF transitions to a login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in when authentication fails [the upper limit number of login attempts] in the same session.

  The machine history management center 800AF warns that, upon login, if the password of the user is expired within the “password expiration warning period”, the password may expire. The warning is displayed, for example, on the login completion screen. However, when there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed, and the screen transitions to the HOME menu.

  If the number of login failures of the user exceeds [User invalidation login failure number] (permanent account lock status), or (a) From the account lock date and time, the login history rejection time is If [] has not passed (temporary account lock status), lock the account.

  The machine history management center 800AF updates and sets the account expiration date when (a) a user is newly registered or (a) when the term of validity is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used for a period from the account effective start date to the account effective end date.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the maximum number of account generations that can be generated at one time to, for example, 20 at the time of initial installation. Here, the [limit number of login attempts] is the number of times the account lock is performed for a fixed period of time due to consecutive login attempts failing, and is set to, for example, five times at the time of initial introduction. [User invalidation login failure number] is the number of times to permanently lock the account due to continuous login attempt failure, and is, for example, 100 times at initial installation. The [login attempt refusal time] is a period during which account locking occurs for a fixed period of time due to consecutive login attempts failing, and is, for example, 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Valid Period] is a password valid period set when the password is changed, and is, for example, 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period for notifying of an account password exhaustion, for example, 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of the password to, for example, 8 characters at the time of initial installation, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent the reuse of the password at the time of initial installation, for example, three generations. Further, the machine history management center 800AF registers the user information on the condition that the business user information of the corresponding user is registered. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and the address of each business operator involved in the operation of the machine history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF can not basically cancel the gaming machine's management state (status) after entering it, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is made in the "all machine history remarks column". Make them known by others. However, because there is a possibility of an incorrect insertion, cancellation is possible only for the status inserted from the gaming machine status update screen. If cancellation is possible, the authority controls to allow only a limited number of persons to execute cancellation. In addition, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine as a search target.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the type of data and the retention period for each type, for example, as follows.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business information, account information, etc.): Basically, only logical deletion is controlled, not physical deletion.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipping information, gaming machine shipping information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management starts, but editing is disabled thereafter. Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically the input of fact information, the change after the input is not permitted but is managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Since the information is detected by the system, the change is not permitted but is managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are held according to input type and node.
(7) Output journals from the system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are held according to output type and node.
(8) Recording of business communication of concentration and distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is held after seven days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, a CSV upload file, etc.): Delete after application behavior. However, if it is confirmed as unnecessary in the cleaning batch in consideration of abnormal termination etc., delete it.
(10) Model information not updated for a long time (for example, model information not updated for a long time): 2 generations are held.

  In the machine history management center 800AF, regarding abnormality of the management state (status), the information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before update and the management state (status) after update becomes abnormal. It is possible to extract only or to output only the information concerned. Therefore, based on the information output to the file, notification such as notifying the user of the management status (status) of the update failure can be performed, and it can be adapted to be updated to the correct management status (status). The user who has not updated the management status (status) may not only be contacted, but may be interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) before taking action. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF gives notification such as notification to all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which an abnormality in the management state (status) is currently occurring. Further, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F which has become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the machine history management center 800AF, the management status (status) other than “discard” and “others” is set for the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long time. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output the file of only the information. In addition, about the abnormality by which the management state (status) is not updated for a long time, the information of the processing time is extracted by a batch process, and it downloads from the terminal connected to machine history management center 800AF. In addition, one file to be downloaded has a maximum number of thresholds (initial construction time: 100,000 records) set, and when the threshold is exceeded, the file is output to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are put together and output as a compressed file.

  (66) In the present embodiment, the configuration for inputting removal information to the machine history management center 800AF has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, etc. may be used for the machine history management center 800AF. When input, removal information may be registered automatically in the machine history management center 800AF. With this configuration, the history of the gaming machine can be managed assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and the burden of inputting removal information from the hole to the history management system can be reduced.

  (67) In the present embodiment, after the gaming machine manufacturer has shipped the gaming machine to the hall, the configuration is shown in which shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The configuration may be such that the shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the information that the gaming machine maker ships the gaming machine into the hall is input. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the history of shipping status from being forgotten without being registered.

  (68) In the present embodiment, when a game machine including the enclosed frame type pachinko machine (P 2F) shipped by the game machine maker or the front frame 5F and the game board 26F constituting the P 2F is installed in the hall, The history management center 800AF stores gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P platform 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P platform 2F The game machine setting information is collated. Then, the machine history management center 800AF, as a result of the collation, if it is abnormal, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. An error notification signal of is transmitted, or the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying an abnormality as a result of the collation, and the front frame 5F and the game board 26F constituting the P unit 2F or the P unit 2F determined to be abnormal. The game may be prohibited. In addition, even when it is determined that the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal, the game history management center 800AF may provisionally permit the game on the P platform 2F for a certain period of time, so as not to hinder the business activities of the hall.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

1 pachinko gaming machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 effect display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20a 1st special variable winning ball device, 20b Second special variable winning ball device, 31 game control board (main board), 56 CPU, 560 microcomputer for game control, 80 effect control board, 100 microcomputer for effect control, 101 CPU for effect control, 109 VDP, 2F Pachinko Game machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F
Payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F indicator, 309F card insertion / ejection slot, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F Payout control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (1)

Based on the predetermined condition being established, it is possible for the player to change to a first state in which game media can enter and a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state. Game board that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
The variable winning means includes a first variable winning means and a second variable winning means,
The first variable winning means is provided at an upstream position where game media flow down,
The second variable winning means is provided at a downstream position where game media flow down,
Control can be made to a first advantageous state in which the variable winning means is changed to a first state in a first period, and a second advantageous state in which the variable winning means is changed to a first state in a second period shorter than the first period. And state control means,
The state control means
When controlling to the second advantageous state, one of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means is changed to the first state.
When controlling to the first advantageous state, after changing the variable winning means of any one of the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state, the first variable is achieved. Changing the winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state according to a predetermined order;
When changing the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means to the first state, change the first variable winning means to the second state and then change the second variable winning means to the first state The first variable winning means such that the period from changing the second variable winning means to the second state to changing the first variable winning means to the first state is shorter than the time until the first variable winning means. And control the second variable winning means,
A game board characterized in that when the first variable winning means is in the first state, a game medium is more easily entered than when the second variable winning means is in the first state.